R-01-10-11-12F1 - 10/11/2001RESOLUTION NO. R- 01- 10- 11 -12F1
WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for
the Additions and Renovations for the Street Department and the Vehicle
Maintenance Facility, and
WHEREAS, Dal -Mac Construction Company has submitted the lowest
responsible bid, and
WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of Dal -Mac
Construction Company, Now Therefore
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS,
That the Mayor is hereby authorized and directed to execute on
behalf of the City a contract with Dal -Mac Construction Company for the
Additions and Renovations for the Street Department and the Vehicle
Maintenance Facility.
The City Council hereby finds and declares that written notice of
the date, hour, place and subject of the meeting at which this
Resolution was adopted was posted and that such meeting was open to the
public as required by law at all times during which this Resolution and
the subject matter hereof were discussed, considered and formally acted
upon, all as required by the Open Meetings Act, Chapter 551, Texas
Government Code, as amended.
RESOLVED this llth day of Octo)r, 001.
RO RT A. STLUKA, (ZR. , Mayor
City of Round Rock, Texas
1.00MA\ WORLDOX\ OA \WDOX \RRSOLUTI \R110111,1.WPD /ee
September 20, 2001
Mr. Larry Madsen
City of Round Rock
Public Works Department
2008 Enterprise Dr.
Round Rock, TX 78664
RE: Public Works Facility Addition & Renovation at 910 Luther Peterson
Dear Larry,
This is to recommend DALMAC Construction Company as the best of nine (9) General
Contractors bidding on this project. Their qualifications are excellent, their references
were positive, and their bid was lowest on the base plus accepted alternates. I'm looking
forward to working with this team to make this project a success for the City.
Sincerely,
Mac Ragsdale, AIA
Principal
AUSTLV ARCHITECTURE PLUS INC. 1907 N. LAMAR BLVD. #260 AUSTIN, TX 78705 archplus @swbell.net V(512) 478 -0970 F(512) 478.0920
PROJECT:
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS FACILITIES
ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS
BID TABULATION
ARCHITECTURE +PLUUS
Architecture, Planning, & Interiors
1907 N. Lamar Blvd., Ste. 260
Austin, Texas 78705
ARCHITECTS ESTIMATE: CAL. DAYS:
ADDENDA: ALTERNATIVES:
BIDDER:
Wurzel -
TF Harper
O'Neal
Construction
Chasco
Contracting
.
PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: BB-BID BOND
CC-CASHIERS CHECK
CTC- CERTIFIED CHECK
Bid security
BB
BB
Bid security
RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGED:
1&2
1 only
1&2
1&2
TOTAL AMOUNT BASE BID:
$678,000.00
$681,911.00
$697,000.00
$767
ALTERNATIVES: ADD or (DEDUCT):
HMAC Paving
NO. 1
$ 12,700.00
$ 19,825.00
$ 12,600.00
$ 12,000.00
Open Bay Metal Building
NO.2
$ 9,300.00
$ 12,635.00
$ 11,500.00
$ 10,300.00
_,
Epoxy Floor
NO.3
$ 13,500.00
$ 6,495.00
$ 10,400.00
$ 27,300.00
Equip. Allowance
NO. 4
$135,000.00
$148,000.00
$134,600.00
$133,800.00
NO.
TOTAL BASE BID + ALTERNATIVES:
•
H
Dd
z
co
co
0
0
tI
0
o
T
N
0
m
0
0
1
x
0
N
v
0
O
0
0
PROJECT:
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS FACILITIES
ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS
BID TABULATION
ARCHITECTURE 4- PLUS
Architectuxlanning, & Interiors
1907N. Lamar Blvd, Ste. 260
Austin, Texas 78705
ARCHITECTS ESTIMATE: - - - CAL. •
ADDENDA: ALTERNATIVES:
BIDDER:
Dal -Mac
Brandes
Bros. Const.
Scott & Reid
Brath Constr.
Guerrero
McDonald As.
PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: BBBW soma
CC- CASHIERS CHECK
CTC- CERTIFIED CHECK
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGED:
1 &2
1 &2
1 &2
1 &2
1 &2
TOTAL AMOUNT BASE BID:
$577,000.00
$638,000.00
$653,000.00
$657,000.00
$668,736.00
ALTERNATIVES: ADD or (DEDUCT):
HMAC Paving
NO. 1
$ 12,200.00
$ 11,900.00
$ 15,000.00
$ 12,600.00
$ 13,005.00
Open Bay Metal Building
NO. 2 1--
$ 8,000.00
- $ 8,900.00
$ 15,000.00
$ 4,100.00
$ 8,511.00
Epoxy Floor '
NO. 3
$ 27,200.00
$ 21,000.00
$11,000.00.
$ 10,000.00
$ 6,075.00
Equip. Allowance
NO. 4 -
$130,000.00
$128,000.00
$132,000.00
$137,000.00
$130,000.00
NO.5
. TOTAL BASE BID + ALTERNATIVES:
.
r
r
c
0
c
Street De artment
Additions and Renovations for Street Department
and Vehicle Maintenance Facility
• #
Vehicle Maintenance
DATE: October 5, 2001
SUBJECT: City Council Meeting — October 11, 2001
ITEM: * 12.F.1. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor to execute a contract
with Dal Mac Construction Company for the Additions and
Renovations for the Street Department and the Vehicle
Maintenance Facility. Nine bids were received on September 11,
2001 and Dal -Mac Construction Company submitted the low bid of
$585,000. The base bid total is $577,000 plus an alternate #2 bid for
an open bay metal building in the amount of $8,000.
Resource: Jim Nuse, Director of Public Works
Larry Madsen, Construction Manager
History: This project consists of the design of six additional bays and a small engine
repair shop for vehicle maintenance. The add alternate in the amount of $8,000
is for the open bay to be built along with the small engine repair shop. The street
department project includes an addition and remodel to accommodate traffic
control needs.
Funding:
Cost: $ 585,000.00
Source of funds: Operating Budget to be transferred to Self - Finance Funds
Outside Resources: Dal -Mac Construction Company
Impact/Benefit: Provide better maintenance and sufficient area for City fleet and equipment.
Construct a small engine repair shop to service mowers, weed eaters, saws,
and equipment used by all the different city departments. Provide facilities
for traffic control needs in street department.
Public Comment: N/A
Sponsor: N/A
PROJECT MANUAL
Additions and Renovations to City of Round Rock
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT FACILITIES
Streets-INvision and Vehicle Maintenance ,
910 Peterson Place
• Round Rock, Texas
O V A . R Q '�t..
•
0 m i
k•
• If hmol•ats %'
Prepared by.
ARCHITECTURE + PLUS
1907 N: Lamar Blvd., #260
Austin Texas 78705
(512) 478 -0970
APPROVED BY ,
CIT y RNEY August 13, 2001
1
PROJECT MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONS and RENOVATIONS TO
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT FACILITIES
Streets Division and Vehicle Maintenance
CITY COUNCIL MEMBERS
Robert A. Stluka, Jr., Mayor
Tom Nielson, Mayor Pro -Tem
Alan McGraw
Carrie Pitt
Earl Palmer
Isabel Callahan
Gary Coe
CITY MANAGER
Robert L. Bennett, Jr., AICP
ARCHITECT
Architecture + Plus
1907 N. Lamar, Ste. 260
Austin, Texas 78705
(512) 478-0970
CIVIL ENGINEER
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
Department of Public Works
2008 Enterprise
Round Rock, Texas 78664
(512) 218 -5555
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
Fisher Hagood, Inc.
One Chisolm Trail, #5200
Round Rock, Texas 78681
(512) 244 -1546
MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
Myers & Associates
455 Hwy. 195, St. B
Georgetown, Texas 78628
(512) 930 -2399
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Title Page
Table of Contents
PROJECT MANUAL
ADDITIONS and RENOVATIONS TO
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
Public Works Department Facilities
Streets Division and Vehicle Maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, &
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
Section Description Page
1.0 Notice to Bidders NB -1
2.0 Bid Documents BD -1
3.0 Post Bid Documents PBD -1
4.0 General Conditions GC -1
5.0 Special Conditions SC -1
6.0 Technical Specifications TS -1
(General & Civil)
7.0 Geotechnical Report
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ARCHITECTURAL & MEP
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work
01020 Allowances
01030 Alternative Bids
01039 Coordination & Meetings
01045 Cutting and Patching
01300 Submittals
01400 Quality Control
01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
01600 Material and Equipment
01700 Contract Closeout
k A s,,a.,, 1
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02055 Demolition
02222 Excavation for Buildings
02223 Backfilling for Buildings
02250 Compaction Control and Testing
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete
03346 Concrete Floor Finishing
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
• 04100 Mortar
04300 Unit Masonry
04340 Reinforced Unit Masonry System
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06112 Framing & Sheathing
06114 Wood Blocking & Curbing
06193 Plate Connected Wood Trusses
06410 Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 Building Insulation
07900 Joint Sealers
ew to ,l laof..„
DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
08111 Standard Steel Doors
08112 Standard Steel Frames
08211 Flush Wood Doors
08330 Overhead Coiling Doors
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
08520 Aluminum Windows
08710 Door Hardware
08800 Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09250 Gypsum Board Systems
09510 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
09650 Resilient Flooring
09900 Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Not used
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Not used
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Not used
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13121 Pre - Engineered Buildings
DIVISION 14
Not used
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010 General Provisions
15050 Basic Materials and Methods
15180 Mechanical Insulation
15190 Inside Utility Trench
15191 Outside Utility Trench
15400 Water Distribution System
15405 Liquid Waste Transfer
15410 Fuel Gas Systems (Natural)
15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
15600 Mechanical Equipment D -X System
15810 Air Distribution
15850 Balancing and Testing
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010 General
16060 Schedule of Values
16070 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
16110 Raceways
16120 Wire and Cable
16130 Outlet Boxes, Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes
16140 Devices
16155 Manual Motor Starters
16158 Combination Motor Starters
16170 Safety Disconnect Switch
16195 Contactors
16430 Fuses
16450 Grounding System
16460 Transformer Dry Type
16471 Branch Circuit Panelboards
16510 Interior Lighting System
16520 Exterior Lighting System
16740 Empty Raceway Rough -In
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 4
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS FACILITY
The following specification sections were prepared by Fisher Hagood, Inc.:
02222 — Excavation
02223 — Backfilling
02250 — Compaction Control and Testing
03100 — Concrete Formwork
03200 — Concrete Reinforcement
03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete
03346 — Concrete Floor Finishing
04100 — Mortar
04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System
05500 — Metal Fabrications
06112 — Framing & Sheathing
06114 - Wood Blocking & Curbing
06193 — Plate Connected Wood Trusses
13121 — Pre - Engineered Buildings
') FiOher
QN�CCIIVIILL &
ad C
Rmmd Bock, Tend
Hagood, Inc,
RUCNRAL i?(GIHEERS
/868t 012) 244 -1618
FHI _ 20138
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,
CONTRACT FORMS &
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
1.0 NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Sealed bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent, City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street. Round
Rock, Texas 78664, for furnishing all labor, material and equipment and performing all work required
for
PROJECT: Additions and Renovations to Public Works Department Facilities
Streets Division and Vehicle Maintenance
Luther Peterson Subdivision, Lots 2 & 8
will be received until 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, September 11, 2001, then publicly opened and read aloud
at the City Hall Council Chambers at the same address. Bid envelopes should state date and time
of bid and "SEALED BID FOR ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS TO PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT FACILITIES ". No bids may be withdrawn after the scheduled opening time. Any
bids received after scheduled bid opening time will be returned unopened.
Bids must be submitted on City of Round Rock bid forms and must be accompanied by an acceptable
bid security as outlined in the Instructions to Bidders, payable to the City of Round Rock, Texas
equal to five percent (5 %) of the total bid amount. Plans and Specifications may he may be obtained
at the Architects Office, Architecture + Plus, 1907 N. Lamar Blvd., Suite 4260, Austin, Texas 78705,
(512) 478 -0970 upon deposit of a check or money order in the amount specified as Document
Security.
In case of ambiguity, duplication, or obscurity in the bids, the City of Round Rock reserves the right
to construe the meaning thereof. The City of Round Rock further reserves the right to reject any or
all bids and waive any informalities and irregularities in the bids received.
The successful bidder will be expected to execute the standard contract prepared by the City of
Round Rock, and to furnish performance and payment bonds as described in the bid documents.
Contractors and subcontractors shall pay to laborers, workmen, and mechanics the prevailing wage
rates as determined by the City of Round Rock.
DOCTJMENT SECURITY: $100 per set. refundable
PRE -BID CONFERENCE: 2:00 p.m., Wednesday, August 29, 2001
Public Works Yardsite - Street Department
910 Luther Peterson Place Drive
Round Rock, Texas _
•
Publish Dates:
Austin American Statesman:
nettccbd,Wcc maser
NB-1
Round Rock Leader:
Monday, August 13, 2001
Thursday, August 16, 2001
Monday, August 20, 2001
2.0 BID DOCUMENTS
biddoc.mst/spec BD -1
4. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes plainly marked "Sealed Bid" and showing
the name of the project, the job number if applicable, and the opening date and time.
5. Bids shall be submitted on proposal forms furnished by the City of Round Rock.
6. All proposals shall be accompanied by a certified cashier's check upon a National or
State bank in an amount not less than five percent (5 %) of the total maximum bid
price, payable without recourse to the City of Round Rock, or a bid bond in the same
amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into
a contract and execute performance and payment bonds, as stipulated by item 11
below, within ten (10) days after notice of award of contract to him. Proposal
guarantees must be submitted in the same sealed envelope with the proposal.
Proposals submitted without check or bid bonds will not be considered.
7. All bid securities will be returned to the respective bidders within twenty -five (25)
days after bids are opened, except those which the owner el:cts to hold until the
successful bidder has executed the contract. Thereafter, all remaining securities,
including security of the successful bidder, will be returned within sixty (60) days.
8. Until the award of the contract, the City of Round Rock reserves the right to reject
any and all proposals and to waive technicalities; to advertise for new proposals; or
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Prior to submitting any proposal, bidders are required to read the plans, specifications,
proposal, contract and bond forms carefully; to inform themselves by their
independent research, test and investigation of the difficulties to be encountered and
judge for themselves of the accessibility of the work and all attending circumstances
affecting the cost of doing the work and the time required for its completion and
obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal.
2. Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the plans, specifications,
or other documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he should notify at
once the Engineer and obtain clarification or addendum prior to submitting any bid.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received at the place
and time named in the Notice to Bidders. Bids received after closing time will be
returned unopened.
to do the work otherwise when the best interest of the City of Round Rock will be
thereby promoted.
9. In case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the statement of prices in the bids, the City
of Round Rock reserves the right to consider the most favorable analysis thereof, or
to reject the bid. Unreasonable (or unbalanced) prices submitted in a bid may result
in rejection of such bid or other bids.
10. Award of the contract, if awarded, will be made within sixty (60) days after opening
of the proposals, and no bidder may withdraw his proposal within said sixty (60) day
period of time unless a prior award is made.
11. Within ten (10) days after written notification of award of the contract, the successful
bidder must furnish a performance bond and a payment bond rn the amount of one-
hundred percent (100 %) of the total contract price. If the total contract price is
$25,000.00 or less, the performance and payment bonds will not be required. Said
performance bond and payment bond shall be from an approved surety company
holding a permit from the State of Texas, with approval prior to bid opening,
indicating it is authorized and admitted to write surety bonds in i his state. In the event
the bond exceeds $100,000.00, the surety must also (1) hold a certificate of authority
from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations
permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any
liability in excess of $100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as
a reinsurer in this state and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the United
States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety or reinsurer on obligations
permitted or required under federal law.
In determining whether the surety or reinsurer holds a valid certificate of authority,
the City may rely on the list of companies holding certificates of authority as
published in the Federal Register covering the date on which the bond is to be
executed.
12. If the total contract price is less than $25,000.00 the performance and payment bond
requirement will be waived by the City of Round Rock. Payment will be made
following completion of the work.
13. Failure to execute the construction contract within ten (10) days of written notification
of award or failure to furnish the performance bond, or letter of credit if applicable,
biddoc.mst/spec BD -2
and payment bond as required by item 11 above, shall be just cause for the annulment
of the award. In case of the annulment of the award, the proposal guarantee shall
become the property of the City of Round Rock, not as a penally, but as a liquidated
damage.
14. No contract shall be binding upon the City of Round Rock until it has been signed by
its Mayor after having been duly authorized to do so by the City Council.
15. The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has furnished
certification of all insurance required and such has been approved by the City of
Round Rock, nor shall the contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on
his subcontract until proof of all similar insurance that is required of the subcontractor
has been furnished and approved. The certificate of insurance form included in the
contract documents must be used by the Contractor's insurer to furnish proof
of insurance.
16. Any quantities given in any portion of the contract documents, including the plans,
are estimates only, and the actual amount of work required may differ somewhat from
the estimates. The basis for the payment shall be the actual amount of work done
and/or material furnished.
17. Bids shall be submitted on a separated contract basis. No Texas sales tax shall be
included in the prices bid for materials consumed or incorporated into the finished
product under this contract. This contract is issued by an crganization which is
qualified for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Section 151.309(5) of the Texas
Tax Code. The City of Round Rock will issue an exemption certificate to the
Contractor. The Contractor must then issue a resale certificate to the material supplier
for materials purchased. The Contractor must have a valid sal s tax permit in order
to issue a resale certificate.
In obtaining consumable materials, the Contractor will issue a resale certificate in lieu of
payment of sales tax, and the following conditions shall be observed;
1) The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporate, materials
to the City of Round Rock at the time and point of rece pt by the Contractor;
2) The Contractor will be paid for these consumable materials by the City of
Round Rock as soon as practicable. Payment will not be made directly but
considered subsidiary to the pertinent bid item. The Contractor's monthly
estimate will state that the estimate includes consumables that were received
biddoc.mstispec BD -3
during the month covered by the estimate; and
3) The designated representative of the City of Round Roc k must be notified as
soon as possible of the receipt of these materials so that an inspection can be
made by the representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled as
the property of the City of Round Rock.
18. No conditional bids will be accepted.
19. If the bidder's insurance company is authorized, pursuant to its agreement with
bidder, to arrange for the replacement of a loss, rather than by making a cash payment
directly to the City of Round Rock, the insurance company must furnish or have
furnished by bidder, a performance bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(b),
Texas Government Code, and a payment bond in accordance with Section
2253.021(c).
biddoc.msdspec BD -
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT WE, DalMac Construction Company
as PRINCIPAL and The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania
as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Round Rock, Texas
hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum of
five percent (5 %) of the total amount of the bid of the PRINCIP AL submitted to the
OWNER, for the work described below; for the payment of which suin in lawful money of
the United States of America, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents. In no case shall the liability of the SURETY hereunder exceed the sum of
$ Five Percent of the Greatest Amount Bid — Dollars (5% GAB)
The CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, T :HAT whereas, said
PRINCIPAL has submitted the above mentioned bid to the OWNER, for construction for
the work under the "SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
Additions and Renovations to City of Round Rock Public Works Department Facilities - forwhich
Streets Division R Vehicle Maintenance
bids are to be opened at the office of the OWNER on September 11, 2001
NOW THEREFORE, if the PRINCIPAL is awarded the contract, and within the time and
manner required under the heading "Instructions to Bidders ", after the prescribed forms are
presented to him for signature, enters into a written agreement, substantially in the form
contained in the Specifications, in accordance with the bid and files the two (2) bonds with
the OWNER, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for
labor and materials, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise, it shall be and
remain in full force and effect.
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the OWNER and judgement is recovered, said
SURETY shall pay all costs incurred by the OWNER in such suit, including a reasonable
attomey's fee to be fixed by the Court.
In WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this day of
September 11, 2001
DalMac C1r structio Com . an
Principa
By:
(Seal
biddoc.mst/spec
BID BOND
BD -5
The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania
Surety:
By:
(Seal)
Patricia L. Bartlett, Attomey -in -Fact
Tire insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania POWER OF ATTORNEY
Principal Bond Office: 70 Pine Street, Nev, York, N.Y. 10270
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
STATE OF NEW YORK }
COUNTY OF NEW YORK }ss.
On this 24th day of May, 2001 before me came the above
named officer of The Insurance Company of the State of
Pennsylvania, to me personally known to be the individual and
officer described herein, and acknowledged that he executed
the foregoing instrument and affixed the seal of said
corporation thereto by authority of his office.
23238 (4/99)
CER'1'1FICATE
No. 09 -B -01391
That The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania corporation, does hereby appoint
- -- Derrell C. Dodson, Sant J. Mullis, Jr., Elnora Cruthis, Karen Farmer, Patricia L. Bartlett, Darrin J. Weber,
Mike E. Mayo: of Dallas, Texas - --
its true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other
contracts of indemnity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, issued in the course of its business, and to bind the company
thereby.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania has executed these presents
this 24th day of May, 2001.
Vice President
MIRIAM TA
Notary Public, Ste1aot Now ItAt
Ouelltted In Bronx County
Commission Expires Feb. 14, 2002
Excerpts of Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania, on May 18, 1976:
"RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, or any Vice President be, and hereby is, authorized to appoint Attomeys -in -Fact to
represent and act for and on behalf of the Company to execute bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other contracts of indemnity and writings
obligatory in the nature thereof, and to attach thereto the corporate seal of the Company, in the transaction of its surety business;
"RESOLVED, that the signatures and attestations of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attomey or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company when so affixed with respect to any bond, undertaking, recognizance or other contract of indemnity or writing
obligatory in the nature thereof;
"RESOLVED, that any such Attorney -in -Fact delivering a secretarial certification that the foregoing resolutions still be in effect may insert in such
certification the date thereof, said date to be not later than the date of delivery thereof by such Attomey-in-Fact."
I, Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretary of The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania, do hereby certify that the foregoing excerpts of Resolution
adopted by the Board of Directors of this corporation, and the Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the
Resolution and the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of the corporation
this 11th day of September 2QQ1•
Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretary
PROPOSAL BIDDING SHEET
i
'i JOB NAME: Additions and Renovations to City of Round Rock .
Public Works Department Facilities - Streets Division & Vehicle Maintenance
I • JOB LOCATION: 910 Peterson Place
Round Rock, Williamson County, Texas
I. OWNERS: . City of Round Rock, Texas
DATE:
I Gentlemen:
Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned bidder
I hereby proposes to do all the work, to famish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment,
tools, materials, insurance and miscellaneous items, to complete all the work on which he bids as provided
by the attached supplemental specifications, and as shown on the plans for the construction of Additions
li and Renovations to Public Works Department Facility, Streets Division and Vehicle Maintenance and
binds himself on acceptance on this proposal to execute a contract and bond for completing said project
within the time stated, for the following prices, to wit:
i /,//
BASE BID fyE d„,, ?,eA, SEd,. ..' - w,.f//,f4d $ 37 ? Odle
I
Alternate Pricing Schedule
Words
1 Figures
• ALTERNATE NO. 1
Add HMAC Paving 'rr /4 Z14( yp grew ,v0,1 ollars $ /2,, 7.-0
I; ALTERNATE NO.2
'f Add Open Bldg. Bay A/4 ' %lievfirr!!P 1 ���— dollars $ Fi OD
!.. ALTERNATE NO. 3 i
Epoxy Floor Covering v ,
IL f Eda,W /4 e', tdP / e.e b llars $ 27 2G e
ALTERNATE NO. 4
If Equipment Allowance ai/t ,1/,, 'R 7..✓r2 // vvA I W 4,f oa dollars $ /31 Odd
I
BD -6
If this proposal is accepted, the undersigned agrees to execute the contract and provide necessary bonds and'
insurance certification as per the Instructions to Bidders and commence work within ten (10) days aft
written Notice to Proceed. The undersigned further agrees to complete the work in full within one hundred
and eighty (180) calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed in phases as indicated on the
drawings. The bidder and the Owner agree that for each and every calendar day the work, or any portion
thereof, remains incomplete after the 180 calendar -day period, the bidder shall pay the amount of Two'
Hundred Fifty Dollars ($250.00) per calendar day as liquidated damages, not as a penalty but for delay
damages to the Owners. Such amount shall be deducted by the Owners from any payment due to the bidders.
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in the proposal have been carefully checked and are
submitted as correct and final. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and may waive any
informalities.
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addendum No. 1 dated Augus 27, 2001 Received YES
Addendum No. 2 dated September 5, 2001 Received YES
Addendum No. 3 dated Received
Respec ly Submitted,
IF 4
nature
Gary Marion
9015 Mountain Ridge Drive
Suite H` 140
Austin, Texas 78759
Print Name Address
Executive Vice President
Title for
Da1Mac,.Construction Co.
Name of Firm
Date
512 - 794 -8685
Telephone, •
September 11, 200i Fred Bennett•
BD -7
Secretary, if Contractor is a Corporation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.0 POST BID DOCUMENTS
THE STATE OF TEXAS
po tbid.m4hpec master
AGREEMENT
PBD -1
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON §
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 1 I day of October 2001, by
and between (Owner) City of Round Rock, Texas of the State of Texas, acting through
Robert A. Stluka, Jr., Mayor, thereunto duly authorized so to do, hereinafter termed
OWNER, and (Contractor) Dalmac Construction Co. of Austin County of Travis and
State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements
hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by OWNER, and under the conditions
expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the
said OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described
as follows
Public Works Department Facilities
Street Division and Vehicle Maintenance
Additions and Renovations
Further described as the work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all the
materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, supervision, labor, insurance, and other
accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the
conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereof, and in accordance with the
Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions of Agreement, Special
Conditions, Technical Specifications, Plans, and other drawings and printed or written
explanatory material thereof, and the Specifications and Addenda therefor, as prepared by
Architecture Plus herein entitled the ARCHITECT, each of which has been
identified by the CONTRACTOR'S written Proposal, the General Conditions of the
Agreement, and the Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds hereof, and collectively
evidence and constitute the entire contract.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within 10 calendar days after the
date written notice to do so have been given to him, and to complete the same within 210
calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed, subject to such extensions of
time as are provided by the General and Special Conditions.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown
in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Contract, such payments to be subject to the
General and Special Conditions of the Contract. The Owner is accepting the base bid of Five
Hundred Seventy-Seven Thousand Dollars ($577,000) plus Alternate No. 2, open building
bay, in the amount of Eight Thousand Dollars ($8,000) for a total agreed price of Five
Hundred Eighty-Five Thousand Dollars ($585,000).
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the
year and day first above written.
CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
(OWNER)
Af1'EST:
Corporate Seal
postbta.m/spec master
Dalmac Construction Company
BY:
Signed:
PBD -2
(Cat TRACTOR)
_,/
,o its `Jllk 4.611
(Typ ° d name
ATTEST:
(Title)
Se , if ontractor is a
Corporation or otherwise registered
with the Secretary of State
(The following to be executed if the Contractor is a Corporation.)
I, FAD D, $E7/Ntr7p, , certify that Iam the Secretary ofthe Corporation named
as Contractor herein; that h ILI IdA¢i , , who signedthis Contract on behalf
of the Contractor was then 1h i,a `1200.47 (official title) of said Corporation, that
said Contract was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation, that said Corporation
by authority of its governing body, and is within the scope of its corporate powers.
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON
postbid.msUspec master
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BYTHESE PRESENTS: That DalMac Construction Company of the
City of Richardson , County of Dallas , and State of
Texas , as Principal, and See Below* authorized under the law
of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto
THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS, (Owner), in the penal sum of Five Hundred
Eighty - Five Thousand and no/100 dollars ($ 585,000.00 J for the payment
whereof, well and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their
heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these
presents:
The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner dated
the 11th day of October . 20 01 to which the
contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if
copied at length herein consisting of:
Public Works Department Facilities, Street Division and
Vehicle Maintenance Additions and Renovations
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the
said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall, in all respects, duly and
faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in
and by said Contract, agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed,
including but not limited to, the repair of any and all defects in said wcrk occasioned by and
resulting from defects in materials furnished by or workmanship of, the Principal in
performing the work covered by said Contract and occurring within a period of twelve•(12)
months from the date of the contract Completion Certificate and all other covenants and
conditions, according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and
Specifications hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full
force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter
2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if
it were copied at length herein.
PBD -3
Bond No. 26 -29-27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Resident Agent of Surety:
1 R. Don Hurst
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PERFORMANCE BOND (continued)
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time; alteration
or addition to the term of the contract, or to the work performed the under, or the plans,
specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on
this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have si,tned and sealed this
instrument this 19th day of October
2001 ,
Mac ction Com • a The Insurance Company of the State of Pennyslvania
Surety nn
By: /tea, JAQ) a
Patricia L. Bartlett
Executive Vice President Attomey -in -Fact
Title ' . , Title
9015 Mountain Ridge Dr., Ste R140 8144 Walnut Hill Lane, Suite 1600
Address
Address
Austin, Texas 78759 Dallas, TX 75231
Printed Name
Dodson- Bateman & Company
8350 Meadow Road, Suite 181
Address
Signature
.poibid.mulspcauster
PBD -4
1
1 PAYMENT BOND
Bond No. 26 -29-27
THE STATE OF TEXAS
1 COUNTY OFWILLIAMSON
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That DalMac Construction Company , of the City
of Richardson , County of Dallas , and State of
' Texas as Principal, and See Below* authorized under the laws of the
State of Texas to act as Surety on Bonds for Principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE
CITY OF ROUND ROCK, (OWNER), and all subcontractor:., workers, laborers,
1 mechanics and suppliers as their interest may appear, all of whom shall have the right to sue
upon this bond, in the penal sum of Five Hundred Eighty - Five Thousand and no/100 —
Dollars ($ 585,000.00 ) for the payment
' whereof, well and truly be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their
heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly ani severally, by these
' presents:
*The Insurance Company of the State of Pennyslvania
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner. dated
' . the 11th day of October , 20 01 . to which Contract is
hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same sxtent as if copied at
length herein consisting of:
' Public Works Department Facilities, Street Division and Vehicle Maintenance
t Additions and Renovations
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the
said Principal shall well and truly pay all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics, and
' suppliers, all monies to them owing by said Principals for subcontracts, work, labor,
equipment, supplies and materials done and furnished for the construction of the
improvements of said Contract, then this obligation shall be and become null and void;
' otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
' PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter
2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if
' it were copied at length herein.
' postbid.mst/spce master PBD -5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B. Don Hurst
PAYMENT BOND (continued)
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans,
specifications or drawings accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligation on
this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder,
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have si;pted and sealed this
Instrument this 19th day of October , 20 01 .
Executive Vice President
Title
.
901 Mountain Ridge Dr., Ste H140 8144 Walnut Hill Lane, Suite 1600
Address
Austin„ Texas 78759 Dallas, TX 75231
Resident Agent of Surety:
' Printed Name
Dodson- Bateman & Company
8350 Meadow Road, Suite 181
Address
Dallas, TX 75231
City, S Zip� ` �e,�
1 t
Signature
1
pesibldAnithpes motor
1
1
PBD -6
The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania
Surety
By:
Address
Patricia L. Bartlett
Attomev -in -Fact
Title
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
' 1 PRODUCER 1 COMPANIES AFFORDING' COVERAGE
I Dodson - Bateman & Company
' ( 8350 Meadow Rd, Ste 181
I Dallas, Tx 75231
I f' INSURED DalMac Construction Company C
P.O. Box 830160
Richardson, Tx 75083 -0160 D
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT the Insured named above is insured by the Companies listed above with respect to the business
operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used
by the companies, and farther hereinafter described. Exceptions to the policies are noted below. Insurance afforded
Ilf t}
yi_pnlicias de e rihpd hprane subject to all the terms, conditions and exclusions of such
policies. Limits shown may have been reduced by paid claims.
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION
I( LTR NUMBER DATE DATE
A GENERALLIABILITY CON50409264 04/1/01 04/1/02
Exclusions: Nuclear Energy Liability;
li Asbestos; Professional Liability
B
IA
1
1
1
EXCESS LIABILITY
OTHER.
postbid.mst/spec master
TC258589517 04/1/01 04/1/02
PBDq
A Zurich American Insurance Co.
B
Royal Insurance Co. of America
LIMITS
GENERAL AGGREGATE
PRODUCT: - COMP /OP AGG.
PERSONAL & ADV.INSURY
EACH OCCURRENCE
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire)
MED. •EXPENSE (Any one person)
If AUTOMOBH.ELIABILITY coN5o409243 04/1/01 04/1/02 COMBtNEL SWGLELIMIT $
1,000,000
BODILY INIURY (Per person) $
•• BODILY IN FURY (Per accident) $
PROPERTY DAMAGE $ •
EACH OCCURRENCE
PHN2041191 04/1/01 04/1/02
AGGREGATE
WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
STATUTORY LIMITS
EACH ACCIDENT
DISEASE - , OLICY LIMIT
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE
if $35,000,000 Jobsite Limit
Builders.-Risk.-
"Special •Risk" 1N3591270 04/1/01 04/1/02
$750,00( $1,000,000 , Temp Location
DESCRIP'RON OF OPEBATIONS/L /SPECIAL TEEMS /EXCEPTIONS
RE: c as -Public Work Department );acilities
Date: 10 - -
$ 2,000,000
1 2,000,000
1 1,000,000
$ 1,000,000
$ 300,000
$ 10,000
$ 20,000,000
$20,000,000
$1,000,000
51,000,400
$1,000,000
City o£ Round Rock Tex artment
i The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all licies except
. of the above described policies be cancelled or changed before the expiration d thereof. th issuing ng c ompar y will rrty ty (300) days ) days any
to the oenificate holder named below.
( wriuen tten n notice
CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of hound Rock
221 E. Main Street N SIONATiJRE OF AUTHORI2 ED REPRESENTATIVE
Round Rock, Texas 78664
•attn: Joaune Land
Typed Name: Mike E Mayo
Title: Spninr Vir•p Prn,ident
1 ISSUE DATE (MM/DD/YY)
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
Cert. # 24310 1152 n 10/19/01
'
'
Dodson
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND
CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE
DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE
POLICIES BELOW.
11 ,_� �,
� •
- Bateman
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
& C O M P A N Y
8330 Meadow Road Suite 181 Dallas, Texas 75231
214.369.9600 FAX.363.9269
COMPANY A
LETTER Zurich American Insurance Co.
COMPANY B
LETTER
INSURED
City of Round Rock
' 221 East Main Street
Round Rock, Tx 78664
Attn. Joanne Land
LETTER COMPANY C
LETTER COMPANY D
COMP E
LETTER ANY
I _COVERAGE
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MMWDDIYY)
LIMITS
POOCY EFFECTIVE
DATE (MM/DD/TY)
GENERAL
LIABILITY
COMMERCIAL GENERAL
LIABILITY
(OCCUR
PROT
BINDER
10/19/01
10/19/02
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$ 1 ono nnn
PRODUCTS.COMP/OP AGG
$
ICLAIMS MADE 1
PERSONAL ADV INJURY
$
X
OWNERS 8 CONTRACTORS'
EACH OCCURRENCE
$ 500 ono
$
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fro)
MED EXPENSE (Any ono person)
$
I
me = 1
AUTOMOBILE
LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
COMBINED SINGLE
LIMB
BODILY INJURY
(Per person)
$
HIRED AUTOS
NON.OWNED AUTOS
GARAGE LIABILITY
BODILY INJURY
(Per aaadeOI)
$
PROPERTY DAMAGE
$
EXCESS
LIABILITY
UMBRELLA FORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
EACH OCCURRENCE
$
AGGREGATE
$
'
WORKER'S COMPENSATION
AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
1STAMORY LIMITS
EACH ACCIDENT
$
DISEASE�OUCV LIMIT
$
DISEASE -EACH EMPLOYEE
$
'
'
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS /LOCATIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE' City of Round Rock - Public Work Department Facilities
2ontractor DalMac Construction Company
CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION — -- --
'
City of Round Rock
221 E. Main Street
'
Round Rock, Tx 78664
Attn. Joanne Land
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO
MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE
LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE _
J -
BOND NUMBER 26-29-27 AMOUNT $585,000.00
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we, DalMac Construction Company
(hereinafter called the "Principal") as Principal,
and the Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania a Corporation duly organized under the laws
of the State of Pennsylvania and duly licensed to transact business in
the State of Texas (hereinafter called the "Surety "), as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto THE CU'Y OF ROUND ROCK. TEXAS (hereinafter called
the "Obligee "), r in the sum of Five Hundred Eighty -Five Thousand
. and no/100 dollars ($ 585,000.00 ) for the
payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said Principfl and the said Surety,
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors anc. assigns, jointly and
• severally, firmly, by these presents.
Sealed with our seals and dated this 19 day of October , A.D. nisatteroPhrostirodec
>and 2001
WHEREAS, the said Principal has heretofore entered into a contract with
The City of Round Rock, Texas
Dated October 11 , 20 01 , for construction of:
Public Works Department Facilities, Street Division and
Vehicle Maintenance Additions and Renovations
WHEREAS, the said Principal is required to guarantee the construction of all improvements
:installed under said contract, against defects in materials or workmanship, which tray
deyetop during the period of one (1) . years) from the date of acceptance of the
project above described, by Owner:
The City of Round and Rock, Texas
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THE OBLIGATIONS IS SUCH, that if said
Principal shall faithfully cany out and perform the said guarantee, and shall, on due notice,
repair and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in
the said work which may develop during the period of one (1) year(s) from the date of
acceptance of the , project above described, by Owner:
The City of Round Rock, Texas
WARRANTY BOND
•
WARRANTY BOND (continued)
OR shall pay over, make good and reimburse to the said Obligee all loss and damage which
said Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Princi gal so to do, then this
obligation shall be null and void; otherwise shall remain in full force and effect.
DalMac Con truction Com • an The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania
Principal Surety
I
_di .IJ /....�.
By:
Executive Vice P Attorney -in -Fact
Title Title
J �
9015 Mountain Ridge Dr. , Ste H1 40 8144 Walnut Hill Lane, Suite 1600
Address Address
Austin, Texas 78759 Dallas, TX 75231
Resident Agent of Surety:
R. Don Hurst
Printed Name
Dodson- Bateman & Company
8350 Meadow Road, Suite 181
Address
Dallas, TX, 75231
City, S to Zip Code
Si gtuttur e
postbkimx/spoc masw
PBD -9
BY: A177..r .:. Aa.1-4-ejcci
Patricia L. Bartlett
The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania POWER OF tiTT.ORNEY
Principal Bond Office: 70 Pine Street, New York, N.Y. 10270
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania corporation, does hereby appoint
- -- Derrell C. Dodson, Sam J. Mullis, Jr., Elnora Cruthis, Karen Farmer, Patricia L. Bartlett, Darrin J. Weber,
Mike E. Mayo: of Dallas, Texas - --
its true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other
contracts of indemnity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, issued in the course of its business, and to bind the company
thereby.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania has executed these presents
STATE OF NEW YORK }
COUNTY OF NEW YORK }ss.
On this 24th day of May, 2001 before me came the above
named officer of The Insurance Company of the State of
Pennsylvania, to me personally known to be the individual and
officer described herein, and acknowledged that he executed
the foregoing instrument and affixed the seal of said
corporation thereto by authority of his office.
23238 (4/99)
CERTIFICATE
Excerpts of Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania, on May 18, 1976:
"RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, or any Vice President be, and hereby ts, authorized to appoint Attomeys -in -Fact to
represent and act for and on behalf of the Company to execute bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other contracts of indemnity and writings
obligatory in the nature thereof, and to attach thereto the corporate seal of the Company, in the transaction of its surety business;
"RESOLVED, that the signatures and attestations of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company when so affixed with respect to any bond, undertaking, recognizance or other contract of indemnity or writing
obligatory in the nature thereof;
"RESOLVED, that any such Attomey -in -Fact delivering a secretarial certification that the foregoing resolutions still be in effect may insert in such
certification the date thereof, said date to be not later than the date of delivery thereof by such Attorney -in- Fact."
1, Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretary of The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania, do hereby certify that the foregoing excerpts of Resolution
adopted by the Board of Directors of this corporatton, and the Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the
Resolution and the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of the corporation
this 24th day of May, 2001.
0
No. 09 -B -01391
MIRIAM TA
Note y of Newltlrk
Qualified In Bronx County
Commission Expires Feb. 14, 2002
this 19th day of October 2001.
Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretary
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
4.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contents
1. Definition of Terms
1.01 - Owner, Contractor and Engineer
1.02 - Contract Documents
1.03 - Subcontractor
1.04 - Sub - Subcontractor
1.05 - Written Notice
1.06 - Work
1.07 - Extra Work
1.08 - Working Day
1.09 - Calendar Day
1.10 - Substantially Completed
2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor
2.01 - Owner - Engineer Relationship
2.02 - Professional Inspection by Engineer
2.03 - Payments for Work
2.04 - Initial Determinations
2.05 - Objections
2.06 - Lines and Grades
2.07 - Contractor's Duty and Superintendence
2.08 - Contractor's Understanding
2.09 - Character of Workers
2.10 - Contractor's Buildings
2.11 - Sanitation
2.12 - Shop Drawings
2.13 - Preliminary Approval
2.14 - Defects and Their Remedies
2.15 - Changes and Alterations
2.16 - Inspectors
General Conditions of Agreement
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities
3.01 - Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible
3.02 - Ownership of Drawings
3.03 - Adequacy of Design
gencond.mstlspec master GC -
3.04 - Right of Entry
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities (cont'd)
3.05 - Collateral Contracts
3.06 - Discrepancies and Omissions
3.07 - Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant
3.08 - Damages
3.09 - Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public
3.10 - Performance and Payment Bonds
3.11 - Losses from Natural Causes
3.12 - Protection of Adjoining Property
3.13 - Protection Against Claims of Subcontractors, etc.
3.14 - Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention
3.15 - Laws and Ordinances
3.16 - Assignment and Subletting
. 3.17 - Indemnification
3.18 - Insurance
3.19 - Final Clean -Up
3.20 - Guarantee Against Defective Work
3.21 - Testing of Materials
3.22 - Wage Rates
4. Prosecution and Progress
4.01 - Time and Order of Completion
4.02 - Extension of Time
4.03 - Hindrances and Delays
5. Measurement and Payment
5.01 - Quantities and Measurements
5.02 - Estimated Quantities
5.03 - Price of Work
5.04 - Partial Payments
5.05 - Use of Completed Portions
5.06 - Final Completion and Acceptance
5.07 - Final Payment
5.08 - Payments Withheld
5.09 - Delayed Payments
gencond.mst/spec master GC -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6. Extra Work and Claims
6.01 - Change Orders
6.02 - Minor Changes
6.03 - Extra Work
6.04 - Time of Filing Claims
6.05 - Continuing Performance
7. Abandonment of Contract
7.01 - Abandonment by Contractor
7.02 - Abandonment by Owner
8. Subcontractors
8.01 - Award of Subcontracts for Portions of Work
8.02 - Subcontractual Relations
8.03 - Payments to Subcontractors
9. Separate Contracts
9.01 - Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts
9.02 - Mutual Responsibility of Contractors
9.03 - Cutting and Patching Under Separate Contracts
10. Protection of Persons and Property
1
10.01 - Safety Precautions and Programs
10.02 - Safety of Persons and Property
10.03 - Location and Protection of Utilities
11. Termination
11.01 - Termination by Owner for Cause
11.02 - Termination for Convenience
gencond.mst/spec master 1 GC -3
1. Definition of Terms
1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer
The Owner, the Contractor and the Engineer and those persons or organizations identified
as such in the Agreement are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number and masculine in gender. The term "Engineer" means the Engineer or his duly
authorized representative. The Engineer shall be understood to be the Engineer of the
Owner, and nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall crate any contractual or
agency relationship between the Engineer and the Contractor.
1.02 Contract Documents
General Conditions of Agreement
The Contract Documents shall consist of the Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders,
Proposal, Signed Agreement, Performance and Payment Bonds (when required), Special
Bonds (when required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Cons: ruction Specifications,
Plans and all modifications thereof incorporated in any such documents before the execution
of the agreement.
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called foi by any one shall be as
binding as if called for by all. In case of conflict between any of the Contract Documents,
priority of interpretation shall be in the following order: Signed Agree ment. Performance and
Payment Bonds, Special Bonds (if any), Proposal, Special Condition> of Agreement, Notice
to Contractors, Technical Specifications, Plans, and General Condi: ions of Agreement.
1.03 Subcontractor
The term "Subcontractor," as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract
with the Contractor. It includes one who furnishes material wo •ked to special design
according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not include one who merely
furnishes material not so worked.
1.04 Sub - Subcontractor
The term "Sub- Subcontractor" means one who has a direct or indirect contract with a
Subcontractor to perform any of the work at the site. It includes one who furnishes material
worked to a special design according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not
include one who merely furnishes material not so worked.
gencond.mstlspec master GC -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.05 Written Notice
1.06 Work
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if deli vered in person to the
individual or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered to or sent
by registered mail to the last business address known to him who g ves the notice.
The Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, machinery, equipment, tools,
superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation
and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of tile work covered by the
Contract Documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both
workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required,
furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work
described in words which, when so applied, have a well -known technical or trade meaning
shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.
1.07 Extra Work
The term "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Engineer or the Owner to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any
change, alteration or addition to the work shown upon the plans, or reasonably implied by
the specifications, and not covered by the Contractor's Proposal, except as provided under
"Changes and Alterations" herein.
1.08 Working Day
The term "Working Day" is defined as any day not including Saturdays, Sundays or any legal
holidays, in which weather or other conditions. not under the control of the Contractor, will
permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less than seven (7)
hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.
1.09 Calendar Day
The term "Calendar Day" is defined as any day of the week or month, no days being
excepted.
1.10 Substantially Completed
The term "Substantially Completed" shall be understood to mean that the structure has been
made suitable for use or occupancy or that the facility is in condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -5
2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor
2.01 Owner - Engineer Relationship
The Engineer will be the Owner's representative during construction. The duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Engineer as the Owner's representative
during construction are as set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended or
limited without written consent of the Owner and the Engineer. The Engineer will advise
and consult with the Owner, and all of the Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be
issued through the Engineer.
2.02 Professional Inspection by Engineer
The Engineer shall make periodic visits to the site to familiarize himself with the progress
of the executed work and to determine if such work meets the essential performance and
design features and the technical and functional engineering requirements of the Contract
Documents; provided and except, however, that the Engineer shall not be responsible for
making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspection of the
quality or quantity of the work or be responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions
or lack of same incident thereto or in connection therewith. Notwithstanding any other
provision of this agreement or any other Contract Document, the Engineer shall not be
responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the Contractor, any
Subcontractor or any of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's agents, servants or employees or
any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the work.
2.03 Payments for Work
The Engineer shall review the Contractor's applications for payment and supporting data,
determine the amount owed to the Contractor and recommend, in writing, payment to the
Contractor in such amounts; such recommendation of payment to the Contractor constitutes
a representation to the Owner of the Engineer's professional judgement that the work has
progressed to the point indicated to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, but
such recommendation of an application for payment to the Contractor shall not be deemed
as a representation by the Engineer that the Engineer has made any examination to determine
how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the contract
price.
2.04 Initial Determinations
The Engineer initially shall determine all claims, disputes and other matters in question
between the Contractor and the Owner relating to execution or progress of the work or
gencond.mst/spec master GC -6
interpretation of the Contract Documents. The Engineer's decision shall be rendered in
writing within a reasonable time, which shall not be construed to be less than ten (10) days.
2.05 Objections
In the event the Engineer renders any decision which, in the opinion of either party hereto,
is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract. either party may file with
the Engineer within thirty (30) days his written objection to the decision, and by such action
may reserve the right to submit the question so raised to litigation as hereinafter provided.
2.06 Lines and Grades
Unless otherwise specified, all lines and grades shall be furnished by the Engineer or his
representative. Whenever necessary, construction work shall be suspended to permit
performance of this work, but such suspension will be as brief as practicable and the
Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefor. The Contractor shall give the
Engineer reasonable notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All
stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by him or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced
at the Contractors expense.
2.07 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence
The Contractor shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of
this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent English- speaking
Superintendent and any necessary assistants to supervise and direct the work. The
Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him
shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
The Contractor is and at all times shall remain an independent contractor, solely responsible
for the manner and method of completing his work under this contract, with full power and
authority to select the means, method and manner of performing suclt work, so long as such
methods do not adversely affect the completed improvements, the C wner and the Engineer
being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements
to the plans, specifications and contract.
Likewise, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of nimself, his employees
and other persons, as well as for the protection and safety of the improvements being erected
and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder.
Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional information
concerning the work to be performed passing from or through the Engineer, shall not be
interpreted as requiring or allowing the Contractor to deviate from the plans and
specifications; the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such information
gencond.mstlspec master GC -
being to define with specificity the agreement of the parties as to the work the Contractor is
to perform. The Contractor shall be fully and completely liable, st his own expense, for
design, construction, installation, and use or non -use of all items a id methods incident to
performance of the contract, and for all loss, damage or injury inc ident thereto, either to
person or property, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports,
shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, and
similar items or devices used by him during construction.
Any review of work in process, or any visit or observation during construction, or any
clarification of plans and specifications, by the Engineer or the Owner, or any agent,
employee, or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the
project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for temporary construction or
construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the Contractor to be for
the purpose of observing the extent and nature of work completed or being performed. as
measured against the drawings and specifications constituting the contract, or for the purpose
of enabling the Contractor to more fully understand the plans and specifications so that the
completed construction work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the Contractor
from full and complete responsibility for the proper performance of his work on the project,
including but not limited to the propriety of means and methods of the Contractor in
performing said contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plan:: or other facilities for
accomplishing such performance. Deviation by the Contractor from plans and specifications
that may have been in evidence during any such visitation or observation by the Engineer,
or any of his representatives, whether called to the Contractor's attention or not, shall in no
way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with
said plans and specifications.
2.08 Contractor's Understanding
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself
as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character,
quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and
facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the woo k, the general and local
conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this contract.
The Contractor agrees that he will make no claim against the Owner or the Engineer if, in
the prosecution of the work, he finds that the actual site or subsurface conditions encountered
do not conform to those indicated by excavation, test excavation, test procedures, borings,
explorations or other subsurface excavations. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent or employee of the Owner or the Engineer either before or after the execution
of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
2.09 Character of Workers
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
performance of the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that
whenever the Engineer shall inform him in writing that any workers on the work are, in his
opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or refuse instructior.s from the Engineer in
the absence of the Superintendent, such worker shall be discharged f-om the work and shall
not again be employed on the work without the Engineer's written ccnsent. No illegal alien
may be employed by any Contractor for work on this project, and a penalty of $500.00 per
day will be assessed for each day and for each illegal alien who works for the Contractor at
this project.
2.10 Contractor's Buildings
The building of structures for housing workers, or the erection of tents or other forms of
protection, will be permitted only at such places as the Engineer shall direct, and the sanitary
conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all tunes be maintained in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
2.11 Sanitation
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from
public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Cor tractor in such manner
and at such points as shall be approved by the Engineer, and the it use shall be strictly
enforced.
2.12 Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, with such promptness as to cause no delay in
his own work or in that of any other Contractor, four (4) checked copies, unless otherwise
specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the
various trades, and the Engineer shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, making
desired corrections. The Contractor shall make any corrections requii ed by the Engineer, file
with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies a> may be needed. The
Engineer's review of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called
the Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him
from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop dr wings to ascertain their
effect on his ability to perform the required contract work in accordance with the plans and
specifications and within the contract time.
Such review by the Engineer shall be for the sole purpose of determining the general
conformity of said shop drawings or schedules to result in fini >hed improvements in
conformity with the plans and specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor of his duty
as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressl) understood and agreed
gencond.msdspec master GC -
that the Engineer does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such
drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, m relation to the safety
of either person or property during the Contractor's performance hereunder.
2.13 Preliminary Approval
The Engineer shall not have the power to waive the obligations of this contract for the
furnishing by the Contractor of good material, and of his performing good work as herein
described, and in full accordance with the plans and specifications. No failure or omission
of the Engineer to discover, object to or condemn any defective work or material shall
release the Contractor from the obligations to fully and properly perform the contract,
including without limitation, the obligation to at once tear out, remove and properly replace
any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance upon the discovery of
said defective work or material; provided, however, that the Engineer shall, upon request of
the Contractor, inspect and accept or reject any material furnished, and in the event the
material has been once accepted by the Engineer, such acceptance >hall be binding on the
Owner unless it can be clearly shown that such material furnislted does not meet the
specifications for this work.
Any questioned work may be ordered taken up or removed for re- examination by the
Engineer, prior to final acceptance, and if found not in accordance with the plans and /or
specifications for said work, all expense of removing, re- examination and replacement shall
be borne by the Contractor. Otherwise, the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra
Work and shall be paid for by the Owner; provided that, where inspection or approval is
specifically required by the specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the
Contractor proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval he shall
bear all expense of taking up, removing, and replacing this wort: if so directed by the
Engineer.
2.14 Defects and Their Remedies
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of
the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Engineer as
unsuitable or not in conformity with the plans, specifications, or the intent thereof, the
Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Engineer, forthwith remove
such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance
with this contract.
2.15 Changes and Alterations
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the
Owner may see fit in the line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein
contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction,
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying performance and
payment Bonds.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not
constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits o i the work that may be
dispensed with, except as provided for unit price items under Secticn 5 "Measurement and
Payment ". If the amount of work is increased, and the work can fairly be classified under
the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and
at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this contract except as provided for
unit price items under Section 5 "Measurement and Payment". Otherwise, such additional
work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In the event the Owner makes such
changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already
furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall compensate the Contractor for any
material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change. due to actual
expense incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
2.16 Inspectors
The Engineer may provide one (or more) field inspectors at the work site for the limited
purpose of observing the work in progress and reporting back to the Engineer on the extent,
nature, manner and performance of the work so that the Engineer may more effectively
perform his duties hereunder. Such inspectors may also communicate between the Engineer
and the Contractor their respective reports, opinions, questions, answers and clarifications
concerning the plans, specifications and work but shall not be deemed the agent of the
Contractor for all purposes in communicating such matters.
Such inspectors may confer with the Contractor or the Contractor's Superintendent
concerning the prosecution of the work and its conformity with the Flans and specifications
but shall never be, in whole or part, responsible for or charged with, nor shall he assume any
authority or responsibility for the means, methods or manner of completing the work or of
the superintendence of the work or of the Contractor's employees. It is expressly understood
and agreed that any such inspector is not authorized by the Engineer or the Owner to
independently act for either or answer on behalf of either, any inquiries of the Contractor
conceming the plans, specifications or work. No inspector's opinior, advice, interpretation
of the plans or specifications of this contract, apparent or express approval of the means or
methods or manner of the Contractor's performance of work in progress or completed, or
discovery or failure to discover or object to defective work of maerials shall release the
Contractor from his duty to complete all work in strict accordarce with the plans and
specifications or stop the Owner or the Engineer from requiring that all work be fully and
properly performed including, if necessary, removal of defective or otherwise unacceptable
work and the re -doing of such work.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities
3.01 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible
The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with an adequate and reasonable number of copies
of all plans and specifications without expense to him and the Contractor shall keep one (1)
copy of the same constantly accessible on the work, with the latest revisions noted thereon.
3.02 Ownership of Drawings
All drawings, specifications and copies thereof famished by the Engineer shall not be reused
on other work, and, with the exception of the signed contract sets, are to be returned to him
on request, at the completion of the work. All models are the property of the Owner.
3.03 Adequacy of Design
It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers.
It is therefore agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of the design,
sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure and the practicability of
the operations of the completed project provided that the Contractor has complied with the
requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and
additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of
such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has :omplied with the said
requirements of the Contract Documents, approved modifications th ereof, and all approved
additions and alterations thereto.
3.04 Right of Entry
The Owner reserves the right to enter the property or location at vhich the works herein
contracted for are to be constructed or installed, by such agent or agents as he may elect, for
the purpose of inspecting the work or for the purpose of constructing or installing such
collateral work as the Owner may desire.
3.05 Collateral Contracts
The Owner agrees to provide, by separate contract or otherwise, all labor and material
essential to the completion of the work specifically excluded from this contract, in such
manner so as not to unreasonably delay the progress of the work or damage the Contractor,
except where such delays are specifically mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
The Owner will attempt to coordinate the collateral work of utility companies regulated by
City franchises, but the City shall not be responsible for delays or other damages to the
Contractor which may result from their acts or omissions.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -12
3.06 Discrepancies and Omissions
The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer of any omissions or discrepancies
found in the contract. It is further agreed that it is the intent of thi; contract that all work
must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with generally accepted
practices for construction. In the event of any discrepancies between the separate Contract
Documents, the priority of interpretation defined under "Contract Documents" shall govern.
In the event that there is still any doubt as to the meaning and intent of any portion of the
contract, specifications or drawings, the Engineer shall define what is intended to apply to
the work.
3.07 Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection
of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all
means of construction, and any and all parts of the work, whether tie Contractor has been
paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the entire work is completed and
accepted.
3.08 Damages
In the event the Contractor is damaged in the course of completion of the work by the act,
negligence, omission, mistake or default of the Owner or the Engineer, thereby causing loss
to the Contractor, the Owner agrees that he will reimburse the Contractor for such loss. In
the event the Owner is damaged in the course of the work by the act. negligence, omission,
mistake or default of the Contractor, or should the Contractor unreasonably delay the
progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the Owner
becomes liable, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for t.uch loss.
3.09 Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public
The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees
and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicablc provisions of federal,
state, and municipal safety laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordan:e with the "Manual of
Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America,
except where incompatible with federal, state, or municipal laws or regulations. The
Contractor shall provide such machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges,
gangplanks, and other safety devices. The safety precautions actually taken and their
adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, acting at his discretion as an
independent contractor.
In the event there is an accident involving injury to any individual cn or near the work, the
gencond.mst>spec master - GC -13
Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Engineer of the event and shall be
responsible for recording the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding the
event through photographs. interviewing witnesses, obtaining of medical reports and other
documentation that defines the event. Copies of such documentation shall be provided to the
Owner and the Engineer for their records.
3.10 Performance and Payment Bonds
Unless otherwise specified, it is further agreed by the parties to the contract that the
Contractor will execute separate performance and payment bonds, each in the sum of one
hundred (100 %) percent of the total contract price, on standard lbrms for this purpose,
guaranteeing faithful performance of the work and the fulfillment of any guarantee required,
and further guaranteeing payment to all persons supplying labor and materials or furnishing
him any equipment in the execution of the contract. If the contract price is $25,000.00 or
less, no payment or performance bond shall be required.. It is agreed that the contract shall
not be in effect until such performance and payment bonds are furnished and approved by
the Owner.
Unless otherwise specified, the cost of the premium for the performaice and payment bonds
shall be included in the price bid by the Contractor for the work under this contract. and no
extra payment for such bonds will be made by the Owner.
Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner, the surety company underwriting the
bonds shall be licensed to write such bonds in the State of Texas.
3.11 Losses from Natural Causes
Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of
the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance
in the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be
encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and l orne by the Contractor
at his own cost and expense.
3.12 Protection of Adjoining Property
The said Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or
properties, in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any
process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury
by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for
such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjoining property. The Contractor
agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and the Eng neer against any claim
or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or
growing out of the performance of the contract regardless of whether or not it is caused in
gencond.mst/spec master GC -14
part by a party indemnified hereunder, but any such indemnity shall not apply to any claim
of any kind arising solely out of the existence or character of the work.
3.13 Protection Against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen and Furnishers
of Machinery, Equipment and Supplies
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner and the Engineer harmless
from all claims growing out the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workers,
mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power
tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the further2nce of the performance
of this contract. When so desired by the Owner, the Contractor sl furnish satisfactory
evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged
or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may either pay directly any
unpaid bills of which the Owner has written notice, or may withhold from the Contractor's
unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to liquidate any and all
such lawful claims. When satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been
fully discharged, payments to the Contractor shall be resumed in full in accordance with the
terms of this contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to
impose any obligation upon the Owner by either the Contractor or his surety.
3.14 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any
design, device, material or process covered by letter patent or copyright by suitable legal
agreement with the patentee or owner. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for
infringement of any patent or copyright rights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and
the Engineer harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall defend
all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design,
device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is
specified or required by the Owner; provided, however, if choice of s ltemate design, device,
material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall indemnify and save
the Owner harmless form any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified
or required by the Owner is known by the Contractor to be an infringement, the Contractor
shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Owner.
3.15 Laws and Ordinances
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws,
ordinance and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and shall
indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Engineer against any claim arising from the
violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations whether b y the Contractor or his
employees, except where such violations are called for by the provisions of the Contract
Documents. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance
gencond mstispec master GC -15
therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing, and any necessary changes shall
be prepared as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs
any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and
without such notice to the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. In case the
Owner is a body politic and corporate, the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under
which the Owner may enter into contract, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part
of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein.
3.16 Assignment and Subletting
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal
attention to the fulfillment of this contract and that he will not assign by Power of Attorney
or otherwise, or sublet said contract without the written consent ofthz, Engineer, and that no
part or feature of the work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the Engineer or the
Owner. The Contractor further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the
work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the
Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner as provided by this agreement.
3.17 Indemnification
The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer and
their respective officers, agents and employees, from and against all camages, claims, losses,
demands, suits, judgements and costs, including reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses,
arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such damage,
claim, loss, demand, suit, judgment, cost or expense:
1. is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person including
Contractors employees and any Subcontractor's employees and any Sub -
subcontractor's employees, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
including Contractor's property (other than the work itself) and the property of any
Subcontractor of Sub - subcontractor including the loss of use resulting therefrom;
and,
2. is caused in whole or in part by any intentional or negligen. act or omission of the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any one of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party irdemnified hereunder.
The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the
Engineer, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation cf maps, plans, reports,
surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or the approval of maps, plans, reports,
gencond.mstlspec master GC -16
surveys, change orders, designs or specifications or the issuance cf or the failure to give
directions or instructions by the Engineer, his agents or employees, pi ovided such is the sole
cause of the injury or damage.
In any and all claims against the Owner or the Engineer or any of their agents or employees
by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whos acts any of them may
be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 3.17 sha 1 not be limited in any
way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable
by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor under workers'
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
3.18 Insurance
The Contractor shall carry insurance as follows for the duration of this contract.
A. Statutory Workmen's Compensation.
Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ( "certificate ") - a copy of a certificate of insurance, a
certificate of authority to self - insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation
Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-8 1, TWCC -82, TWCC -83, or
TWCC -84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the
person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the
project until the contractor's /person's work on the project has been completed and
accepted by the governmental entity.
Persons providing services on the project (" subcontractor" i 1 § 406.0961 - includes
all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted
directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees.
This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing
companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or
employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide iervices on the project.
"Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment
or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project.
"Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project. such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification
codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, that meets the
statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44), for all employees
of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project.
This coverage shall include the following terms:
(a) Employer's Liability limits of $100,000.00 for each accident is
required.
(b) "Texas Waiver of Our Right to Recover From Others" Endorsement
WC 42 03 04 shall be included in this policy.
(c) Texas must appear in Item 3A of the w orker s Compensation
coverage or Item 3C must contain the following: "As States except
those listed in 3A and the States of NV, Nib, OH, WA, WV, and
WY." _
The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity
prior to being awarded the contract.
If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the
coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity
showing that coverage has been extended.
The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and
provide to the governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the
project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of
coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the
project; and
(b) no later than seven (7) calendar days after rec eipt by the Contractor,
a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the
coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project.
The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the
project and for one year thereafter.
The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor knew or should have known of
gencond.msdspec master GC -18
any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services
on the project.
The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice. in the text, form and manner
prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons
providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating
how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
The Contractor shall contractually require each person wit 1 whom it contracts to
provide services on the project to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts of filing of any coverage agreements, that meets
the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44),
for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the
project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being
provided for all employees of the person providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage
period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it c 3ntracts, and provide to
the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the ether person beginning
work on the project; and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,
prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period
shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of
the project and for one year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within ten (10) calendar days after the person knew or
should have known of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
and
gencond.mstlspec master GC -19
(g)
contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform
as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage
to be provided to the person for whom they Ere providing services.
By signing this contract, or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of
coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees
of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by
workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will
be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the
case of a self - insured, with the Commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, and/or other civil actions.
The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of
contract by the contractor that entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract
void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten (10) calendar days after
the receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity.
B. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with minimum Bodily Injury limits of
$300,000 for each occurrence including like coverage for acts and omissions of
Subcontractors and contractual liability coverage.
C. Property Damage Insurance with minimum limits of $50,0)0 for each occurrence
including like coverage for acts and omissions of Subcont - actors and contractual
liability coverage.
D. Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non - owned, and hired vehicles with
minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $100,000 for each person and $300,000 for each
occurrence and Property Damage minimum limits of $50,000 for each occurrence.
Contractor shall require Subcontractors to provide Automobile Liability Insurance
with same minimum limits.
The Contractor shall not commence work at the site under this contract until he has obtained
all required insurance and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner and the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractors to commence work until all
insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of the nsurance by the Owner
and the Engineer shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder.
The required insurance must be written by a company licensed to do Jusiness in Texas at the
time the policy is issued. In addition, the company must be acceptable to the Owner and all
insurance (other than workers' compensation) shall be endorsed to include the Owner as an
additional insured thereunder.
gencond.mstlspec master GC -20
The Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be cancelled nor Permit any insurance to
lapse. All insurance certificates shall include a clause to the effect that the policy shall not
be cancelled or reduced, restricted or limited until ten (10) days after the Owner has received
written notice as evidenced by return receipt of registered or certified letter. Certificates of
insurance shall contain transcripts from the proper office of the insurer, evidencing in
particular those insured, the extent of the insurance, the location and the operations to which
the insurance applies, the expiration date, and the above - mentioned notice of cancellation
clause.
3.19 Final Clean -up
Upon the completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the
Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the work all surplus and discarded
materials, temporary structures and debris of every kind. He shall leave the site of the work
in a neat and orderly condition at least equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and
waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations
satisfactory to the Engineer.
In the event the Contractor fails or refuses to clean and remove surplus materials and debris
as above provided, the Owner or the Engineer may do so, or cause same to be done, at the
Contractor's expense, and the reasonable cost thereof shall be deducted from the final
payment.
3.20 Guarantee Against Defective Work
The Contractor warrants the materials and workmanship and that the work is in conformance
with the plans and specifications included in this contract for a period of one year from the
date of acceptance of the project. Said warranty binds the Contractor to correct any work
that does not conform with such plans and specifications or any defects in workmanship or
materials furnished under this contract which may be discovered within the said one year
period. The Contractor shall at his own expense correct such defect within thirty (30) days
after receiving written notice of such defect from the Owner or the Engineer by repairing
same to the condition called for in the Contract Documents and plans and specifications.
Should the Contractor fail or refuse to repair such defect within the said thirty (30) day
period or to provide acceptable assurances that such repair work will be completed within
a reasonable time thereafter. the Owner may repair or cause to be repaired any such defect
at the Contractor's expense.
3.21 Testing of Materials
Unless otherwise specified, testing of all materials to be incorporated into the project will be
as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. All retesting for work rejected on
the basis of test results will be at the expense of the Contractor and the extent of the retesting
gencond.mst/spec master GC -21
shall be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may require addi.ional testing for failing
tests and may require two (2) passing retests before acceptance will be made by the Owner.
The testing laboratory will be designated by the Owner.
All materials to be incorporated into the project must meet the requirements of these
specifications. For manufactured materials such as reinforcing steel, expansion joint
materials, concrete pipe, cement, miscellaneous steel, cast iron mater als, etc., the Contractor
will be required to furnish a manufacturer's certificate stating that the material meets the
requirements specified for this project.
3.22 Wage Rates (Information From Chapter 2258 Texas Government Code Title 10)
2288.021. Duty of Government Entity to Pay Prevailing Wage Rates
a. The state or any political subdivision of the state shall pay a worker employed by it or
on behalf of it:
(1) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for work of
a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed; and
(2) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal
holiday and overtime work.
b. Subsection (a) does not apply to maintenance work.
c. A worker is employed on a public work for the purposes of this section if the worker
is employed by a contractor or subcontractor in the execution of a contract for the
public work with the state, a political subdivision of the state, or any officer or public
body of the state or a political subdivision of the state.
2258.023. Prevailing Wage Rates to be Paid by Contractor and Subcontractor; Penalty
a. The contractor who is awarded a contract by a public body ar a subcontractor of the
contractor shall pay not less than the rates determined under Section 2258.022 to a
worker employed by it in the execution of the contract.
b. A contractor or subcontractor who violates this section shall pay to the state or a
political subdivision of the state on whose behalf the contract is made, $60 for each
worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less
than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. A public body awarding a contract shall
specify this penalty in the contract.
c. A contractor or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding
a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates, and specify the rates in the
contract as provided by Section 2258.022.
d. The public body shall use any money collected under this section to offset the costs
incurred in the administration of this chapter.
e. A municipality is entitled to collect a penalty under this sectio -I only if the municipality
has a population of more than 10,000.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Adds ,du7, 2 1151-)
4a2Q4 rw 1 4,o1.
2258.051. Duty of Public Body to Hear Complaints and Withhold Payment
A public body awarding a contract, and an agent or officer of the public body, shall:
1. take cognizance of complaints of all violations of this chapter committed in the
execution of the contract; and •
2. withhold money forfeited or required to be withheld undo r this Chapter from the
payments to the contractor under the contract, except that, ..he public body may not
withhold money from other than the final payment without determination by the public
body that there is good cause to believe that the contractor has violated this chapter.
WR1001 July 1997
Applicable wage rates are shown in Section 06 WAGE RATES of the SPECIAL CONDITIONS.
4. Prosecution and Progress
4.01 Time and Order of Completion
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that
the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such times a td seasons, in such order
of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction;
provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall
be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans
and specifications, and within the time of completion designated iri the proposal: provided,
also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force,
the Engineer may direct the time and manner of constructing the work done under this
contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the i arious works being done
for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Engineer,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the Work,
with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates
of completion of the several parts.
4.02 Extension of Time
Should the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by any act or neglect of the
Owner or the Engineer, or of any employee of either, or by other contractors employed by the
Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strikes, lockouts, :fires, and unusual delays
by common carriers, or unavoidable cause or causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any
cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then an extension of time shall be
allowed for completing the work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, the amount of the
extension to be determined by the Engineer; provided, however, that the Contractor shall give
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
the Engineer prompt notice in writing of the cause of such delay.
. : - - . !. .
4.03 Hindrances and Delays
No claims shall be made by the Contractor for damages resulting from hindrances or delays
from any cause (except where the work is stopped by order of and for the convenience of the
Owner) during the progress of any portion of the work embraced in fiis contract. In case said
work shall be stopped by the act of the Owner, then such expense as in the judgment of the
Engineer is caused by such stoppage of said work shall be paid by the Owner to the
Contractor.
5. Measurement and Payment
5.01 Quantities and Measurements
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured
and /or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered,
unless otherwise specifically provided.
5.02 Estimated Quantities
This agreement, including the specifications, plans and estimate, is [tended to show clearly
all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities
are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this
contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable
cost of the work and for comparing the proposals offered for the work. It is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and material to be furnished under this
contract may differ somewhat from these estimates. and that where the basis for payment •
under this contract is the unit price method. payment shall be for the actual amount of such
work done and material furnished.
Where payment is based on the unit price method, the Contractor agrees that he will make no
claim for damages, anticipated profits or otherwise on account of an y differences which may
be found between the quantities of work actually done, the material actually furnished under
this contract and the estimated quantities contemplated and contained in the proposal;
provided, however, that in case the actual quantity of any major item should become as much
as twenty percent (20 %) more than, or twenty percent (20 %) less than the estimated or
contemplated quantity for such items, then either party to this agreement, upon demand, shall
be entitled to revised consideration upon the portion of the work above or below twenty
percent (20 %) of the estimated quantity.
gencond.mstlspec master GC -
A "Major Item" shall be construed to be any individual bid item incurred in the proposal that
has a total cost equal to or greater that five percent (5 %) of the total contract cost, computed
on the basis of the proposal quantities and the contract unit prices.
Any revised consideration is to be determined by agreement between the parties, otherwise by
the terms of this agreement, as provided under "Extra Work ".
5.03 Price of Work
In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material, and the
completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the completion of all work and on the
delivery of all material embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and
stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the prices set forth in the
proposal hereto attached, which has been made a part of this contract. The Contractor hereby
agrees to receive such prices in full for furnishing all material and 311 labor required for the
aforesaid work, also for all expense incurred by him, and for well and truly performing the
same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement.
5.04 Partial Payments
On or before the first day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
statement showing the total value of the work performed up to and including the 25th day of
the preceding month. The statement shall also include the value: of all sound materials
delivered on the job site and to be included in the work and all partially completed work
whether bid as a lump sum or a unit item which in the opinion of the Engineer is acceptable.
The Engineer shall examine and approve or modify and approve su:h statement.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the 20th day of the current month the
total amount of the approved statement, less five percent (5 %) of the amount thereof, which
five percent (5 %) shall be retained until final payment, and further le all previous payments
and all further sums that may by retained by the Owner under the terms of this agreement. It
is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some
unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the Contractor,
then the Owner may, upon written recommendation of the Engine r pay a reasonable and
equitable portion of the retained percentage to the Contractor; or the Contractor, at the Owner's
option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the work and, thereupon, the
Contractor shall receive payment of the balance due him under the ccntract subject only to the
conditions stated under "Final Payment ".
5.05 Use of Completed Portions
The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially
completed portions of the work, notwithstanding the time for completing the entire work or
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
such portions may not have expired. Such taking possession and us: shall not be deemed an
acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such
prior use increases the cost or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra
compensation, extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when, in the Contractor'; opinion, the contract is
"substantially completed" and when so notifying the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer in writing a detailed list of unfinished work. The Engineer will review the
Contractor's list of unfinished work and will add thereto such items as the Contractor has
failed to include. The "substantial completion" of the structure or facility shall not excuse the
Contractor from performing all of the work undertaken. whether of a minor or major nature,
and thereby completing the structure or facility in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5.06 Final Completion and Acceptance
Within ten (10) days after the Contractor has given the Engineer written notice that the work
has been completed, or substantially completed, the Engineer and the Owner shall inspect the
work and within said time, if the work is found to be completed in accordance with the
Contact Documents, the Engineer shall issue to the Owner and the Contractor his Certificate
of Completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner to issue a Certificate of
Acceptance to the Contractor or to advise the Contractor in writing of the reason for non-
acceptance.
5.07 Final Payment
Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Completion, the Engineer shall proceed to make final
measurements and prepare final statement for the value of all work performed and materials
fumished under the terms of the agreement and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay
to the Contractor on or before 35th day after the date of the Certificate of Completion, the
balance due the Contractor under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become
due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the Certificate of
Acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents, shall relieve
the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required.
5.08 Payments Withheld
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the
whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss
on account of:
a) Defective work not remedied or other obligations hereunder not done.
b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims.
gencond.mstlspec master GC -26
c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for material
or labor.
d) Damage to the Owner or another contractor's work, materia or equipment.
e) Reasonable doubt that the work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the
contract amount.
f) Reasonable indication that the work will not be completed xvithin the contract time.
g)
Other causes affecting the performance of the contract.
When the above grounds are removed or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory
to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made
for amounts withheld because of them.
5.09 Delayed Payments
Should the Owner fail to make payment to the Contractor of the sum named in any partial-or
final statement, when payment is due, then the Owner shall pay to the Contractor, in addition
to the sum shown as due by such statement, interest thereon at the rate of six percent (6 %) per
annum, unless otherwise specified, from date due as provided under "Partial Payments" and
"Final Payment," until fully paid, which shall fully liquidate any injury to the Contractor
growing out of such delay in payment. It is expressly agreed tha: delay by the Owner in
making payment to the Contractor of the sum named in any partial or final statement shall not
constitute a breach of this contract on the part of the Owner nor an t bandonment thereof nor
shall it to any extent or for any time relieve the Contractor of his obligations to fully and
completely perform hereunder.
6. Extra Work and Claims
6.01 Change Orders
Without invalidating this agreement, the Owner may at any time or from time to time order
additions, deletions or revisions to the work; such changes will be authorized by change order
to be prepared by the Engineer for execution by the Owner and the Contractor. The change
order shall set forth the basis for any change in contract price, as hereinafter set forth for extra
work, and any change in contract time which may result from the change.
In the event the Contractor shall refuse to execute a change order which has been prepared by
the Engineer and executed by the Owner, the Engineer may in writing instruct the Contractor
gencond.mst/spec master GC -27
to proceed with the work as set forth in the change order and the Contractor may make claim
against the Owner for extra work involved therein, as hereinafter provided.
6.02 Minor Changes
The Engineer may authorize minor changes in the work not inconsistent with the overall intent
of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in contract price. If the Contractor
believes that any minor change or alteration authorized by the Engineer involves extra work
and entitles him to an increase in the contract price, the Contractor shall make written request
to the Engineer for a written field order.
In such case, the Contractor by copy of his communication to the Engineer or otherwise in
writing shall advise the Owner of his request to the Engineer for a written field order and that
work involved may result in an increase in the contract price.
Any request by the Contractor for a change in contract price shall be made prior to beginning
the work covered by the proposed change.
6.03 Extra Work
It is agreed that the basis of compensation to the Contractor for work either added or deleted
by a change order or for which a claim for extra work is made shall be determined by the unit
prices upon which this contract was bid to the extent such work can be fairly classified within
the various work item descriptions and for work items that cannot he so classified by one or
more of the following methods: -
Method (A)
By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B)
By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C)
If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) is agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the ' actual field cost" of the
work, plus fifteen percent (15 %).
In the event said extra work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions
of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby de fined to include the cost
to the Contractor of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and
materials, supplies, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually
employed or used on such extra work, plus actual equipment, for the time actually employed
or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges nece;.sarily incurred, together
gencond.mstlspec master GC -28
with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expc nses, also all necessary
incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security,
Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on
performance and payment bonds and maintenance bonds, public liability and property damage
and workers' compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by any law or
ordinance, or directed or agreed to by the Owner. The Engineer may direct the form in which
accounts of the "actual field cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made
available to the Engineer. The Engineer or the Owner may also specify in writing, before the
work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and
equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equip:nent shall be determined
by using one hundred percent (100 %), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of
Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America.
Where practicable the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15 %) of the "actual field
cost" to be paid the Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead,
general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense
not embraced within the "actual field cost" as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's
camp or field office must be maintained primarily on account of such extra work; then the cost
to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Engineer.
In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve
extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction
time, he shall make written request to the Engineer for written order authorizing such extra
work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work,
or as to the payment therefor, and the Engineer insists upon its performance, the Contractor
shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep an
accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof, as provided t nder Method (C). The
Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to mediation or
litigation.
6.04 Time of Filing Claims
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented
by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Engineer within thirty (30) days after
the Engineer has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to
take exception. The Engineer shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions by
the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal
from the Engineer's decision, any demand for mediation shall be filed with the Engineer and
the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of deliv.sry to Contractor of the
Engineer's final decision. It is further agreed that final acceptance o f the work by the Owner
and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claims by either
gencond.mstispec master GC -29
party, except claims by Owner for defective work or enforcement of warranties and except as
noted otherwise in the Contract Documents.
6.05 Continuing Performance
The Contractor shall continue performance of the contract during all disputes or disagreements
with the Owner. The production or delivery of goods, the furnishing of services and the
construction of projects or facilities shall not be delayed, prejudiced or postponed pending
resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner may otherwise agree in
writing.
7. Abandonment of Contract
7.01 Abandonment by Contractor
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days
after written notification from the Owner or the Engineer, or if the Contractor fails to comply
with the orders of the Engineer when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents,
then and in that case, where performance and payment bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds
shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall
be delivered to the Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work
any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together
with any materials and equipment under contract for the work, may be held for use on the
work by the Owner or the surety on the performance bond, or another contractor in completion
of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefor (except when
used in connection with extra work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under
Section 6 herein), it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
Where there is no performance bond provided or in case the surety should fail to commence
compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for, within ten (10) days
after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either
of the following elective manners:
(1) The Owner may thereupon employ such force of men and use such machinery,
equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the Owner may deem necessary to
complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery,
equipment, tools, materials and supplies to the Contractor, and expense so
charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such monies as may
be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under
gencond.mst/spec master GC -30
and by virtue of this agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum
which would have been payable under this contra :t if the same had been
completed by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall receive the difference.
In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable
under this contract if the same had been completed b) the Contractor, then the
Contractor and/or his surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner,
or
(2) The Owner, under competitive bids taken after notice published as required by
law, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the
same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case there
is any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to
what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be
charged to the Contractor and the surety shall be and remain bound therefor.
However, should the cost to complete any such contract prove to be less than
would have been the cost to complete under this contract, the Contractor and/or
his surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his surety shall
be so notified and Certificates of Completion and Acceptance, as provided in Paragraph 5.06
hereinabove, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified
by the Engineer as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the Contractor and
his surety, whereupon the Contractor and/or his surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall
pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within fifteen (15) days after the date of
such Certificate of Completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that
which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor
under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his surety shall pay the balance
shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equip :rent, tools, materials or
supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his surety.
Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his
surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there
remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice
thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided,
however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After
mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor
and his surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordi nary care to protect such
property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice, the Owner may sell such
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such
sale to the credit of the Contractor and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or
private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
gencond.mst/spec master GC -3 I
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies, which remain on the work, and belong to
persons other than the Contractor or his surety, to their proper owners. The books on all
operations provided herein shall be opened to the Contractor and his surety.
7.02 Abandonment by Owner
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail to
comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then
the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all
machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of work that have not been
included in payments to the Contractor and have not been wrought into the work. Thereupon,
the Engineer shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which
estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor (at the prices
stated in the attached proposal where unit prices are used), the value of all partially completed
work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all extra wort. performed at the prices
agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the
cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion and
which cannot be utilized. The Engineer shall then make a final statement of the balance due
the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and
all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this agreement and shall
certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after
the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due
the Contractor, under the terms of this agreement.
8. Subcontractors
8.01 Award of Subcontracts for Portions of the Work
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents or in the Instructions to Bidders, the
Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the contract, sha;I furnish to the Engineer
in writing for acceptance by the Owner and the Engineer a list of the names of the
Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the work. The Engineer shall promptly
notify the Contractor in writing if either the Owner or the Engineer, after due investigation,
has objection to any Subcontractor on such list and does not accept him. Failure of the Owner
or the Engineer to make objection promptly to any Subcontractor on the list shall constitute
acceptance of such Subcontractor.
The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor or any person or organization
(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for portions of the work designated in the Contract Documents or in the Instructions
to Bidders or, if none is so designated, with any Subcontractor proposed for the principal
portions of the work who has been rejected by the Owner and the E igineer. The Contractor
gencond mstlspec master GC -32
will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor or person or organization against
whom he has a reasonable objection.
If the Owner or the Engineer refuses to accept any Subcontractor or person or organization on
a list submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract Documents
or the Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor shall submit an acce2table substitute and the
contract amount shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such
substitution and an appropriate change order shall be issued; however, no increase in the
contract amount shall be allowed for any such substitution unless the Contractor has acted
promptly and responsively in submitting for acceptance any list or h sts of names as required
by the Contract Documents or the Instructions to Bidders. •
If the Owner or the Engineer requires a change of any proposed Subcontractor or person or
organization previously accepted by them, the contract amount shall be increased or decreased
by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate change order shall be
issued.
The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or
organization who has been accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, unless the substitution
is acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer.
8.02 Subcontractual Relations
All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate
written agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate
between Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) which shall conta n provisions that:
(1) preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer under the
contract with respect to the work to be performed under the subcontract so that
the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights;
(2) require that such work be performed in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents:
(3)
require submission to the Contractor of the applications for payment under
each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to
enable the Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with this contract;
(4) require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for
delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted pon ions of the work shall be
submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor where
appropriate) in sufficient time so that the Contractor n ay comply in the manner
provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
Owner;
(5) obligate each subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this
section.
A copy of all such subcontract agreements shall be filed by the Contractor with the Engineer
before the Subcontractor shall be allowed to commence work.
8.03 Payments to Subcontractors
The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an
amount directly based upon the value of the work performed and allowed to the Contractor on
account of such Subcontractor's work, less the percentage retained from payments to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments
to his subcontractors.
If the Engineer fails to approve a payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor
and not the fault of a particular Subcontractor. the Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor on
demand made at any time after the Certificate for Payment should otherwise have been issued,
for his work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage.
The Engineer may, on request and at his discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if
practicable, information regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on
account of work done by such Subcontractors.
Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment
of any monies to such Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required.
9. Separate Contracts
9.01 Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts
The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the
project under these or similar conditions of the contract.
When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the project, "the Contractor" in
the contract documents in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract.
9.02 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors
The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly
gencond.mstlspec master GC -34
connect and coordinate his work with theirs.
If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of
any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer
any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper
execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an •
acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his work, except as to
defects which may develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the
Contractors work.
Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the
project, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement,
if he will so settle. If such separate contractor sues the Owner of initiates an proceeding
allowed hereunder on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner
shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense, and
if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or
satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees and court costs or other costs
which the Owner has incurred.
9.03 Cutting and Patching under Separate Contracts
The Contractor shall be responsible for any cutting, fitting and patching that may be required
to complete his work, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not endanger any work of any other contractors by cutting, excavating
or otherwise altering any work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor
except with the written consent of the Engineer.
Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be bome by the party responsible
therefor.
10. Protection of Persons and Property
10.01 Safety Precautions and Programs
The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the work.
10.02 Safety of Persons and Property
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all
reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
gencond.mst/spec master GC -35
(1) all employees on the work and all other persons who nay be affected thereby:
(2) all the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,
whether in storage or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the
Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns,
walks, pavements, fences, roadways, structures and vilifies not designated for
removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
(3)
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rues, regulations and lawful
orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to
protect them from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintai t, as required by existing
conditions and progress of the work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,
including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety
regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities.
When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary
for the execution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmot:t care and shall carry on
such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.
All blasting, including methods of storing and handling explosives and highly inflammable
materials. shall conform to federal, state, local laws and ordinances. All city ordinances shall
be complied with even though some or all of the blasting is done out:;ide the city limits unless
the applicable ordinance is in conflict with the law of the jurisdiction where the action is being
taken.
The following is a list of requirements in addition to federal, state, and local laws and
ordinances:
The Contractor shall furnish the City of Round Rcck with a Certificate of
Blasting Insurance in the amount of $300,000.00 for each contract, at least
twenty -four (24) hours prior to using explosives. A blasting permit must be
obtained from the city at least five (5) days prior to use of explosives. If
blasting is covered under the Contractor's General nsurance Certificate for
each contract, a separate blasting certificate will not be required.
The following public utility companies and city departments will be notified
by the Contractor, on every occasion, at least twenty -four (24) hours prior to
the use of explosives: Water and Wastewater, Electric, Gas, Telephone and the
City Engineering Department.
3. Explosive materials to be used shall be limited to blasting agents and dynamite,
unless prior approval of other materials is obtained in writing from the
Engineering Department.
gencond.mstlspec master GC -
4. During blasting, all reasonable precautions shal be taken to protect
pedestrians, passing vehicles, and public or private property. Blasting mats or
protective cover shall be used when required by the City Inspector, the permit,
or by safe blasting practices.
5. All explosives shall be stored in accordance with Chapter 5, Section 5.200, of
the City Code.
6. The Director of Engineering or his representative shall have the right to limit
the use of explosives and/or blasting methods wrich in his opinion are
dangerous to the public or nearby property of any kind.
7. The Contractor, at his expense, shall promptly repair or replace all items
known to be damaged as a result of blasting. All claims of damage shall be
investigated by the City of Round Rock or by consulting firms approved by the
city.
8. The Contractor shall maintain accurate records throughout the blasting
operations showing the type explosive used, number of holes, pounds per hole,
depth of hole, total pounds per shot, delays used, date and time of blast and
initials of the inspector. The Contractor is fully responsible for all claims
resulting from his blasting operation.
All damage or loss to any property referred to in this article caused i t whole or in part by the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, or anyore directly or indirectly
employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of there may be liable, shall be
remedied by the Contractor, except damage or loss attributable solely to faulty drawings or
specifications or solely to the acts or omissions of the Owner or the Engineer or anyone
employed by either of them, and not attributable in any degree to the fault or negligence of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organizat on at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent
unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Engineer.
10.03 Location and Protection of Utilities
Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, the Contractor shall be solely responsible
for the location and protection of any and all public utility lines and utility customer service
lines in the work area. The Contractor shall exercise due care to locate and to mark, uncover
or otherwise protect all such lines in the construction zone and any of the Contractor's work
or storage areas. Upon request, the Owner shall provide such information as it has about the
location and grade of water, sewer, gas, and telephone and electric lines and other utilities in
the work area but such information shall not relieve or be deemed to be in satisfaction of the
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
Contractor's obligation hereunder, which shall be primary and nondelegable. Any such lines
damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor or he
shall cause such damage to be repaired at his expense.
11. Termination
11.01 Termination by Owner for Cause
Conditions for termination are as follows:
12. Without prejudice to any other legal or equitable right or remedy which it would
otherwise possess hereunder or as a matter of law, City shall be entitled by giving
Contractor five (5) days prior written notice to terminate this contract in its entirety at
any time:
1. If the Contractor becomes insolvent, voluntarily files for bankruptcy, is the
subject of an involuntary petition for bankruptcy commenced by its creditors,
makes a general assignment for the benefit ofcreditots or becomes the subject
of any other proceeding commenced under any statu:e or law for the relief of
debtors; or
2. If a receiver trustee or liquidator of any of the property or income of Contractor
shall be appointed; or
3. If Contractor:
1. Shall fail to prosecute the work or any part thereof with diligence
necessary to insure its progress and completion as prescribed by the
time schedules; and Shall fail to take such steps to remedy such default
within ten (10) days after written notice thereof from City; or
4. If Contractor:
1. Shall fail for any reason other than the failure by City to make
payments called upon when due, and
2. Shall fail to take such steps to remedy such default within ten (10) days
after written notice thereof from City; or
5. If Contractor:
1. Shall commit a substantial default under any of the terms, provisions,
conditions, or covenants contained herein; of
2. Shall fail to take such steps to remedy such default within ten (10) days
after written notice thereof from City; or
3. In the event of such termination, Contractor shall only be paid its
reimbursable costs incurred prior to the effective date of the
termination notice and shall not be entitled to receive any further fixed
fee payments hereunder and shall be further s ubject to any claim City
may have against Contractor under other provisions of this agreement
or as a matter of law, including the refund of any overpayment of
reimbursable costs and /or fixed fee.
13. If this Contract is terminated for cause, the City shall have :he right but shall not be
obligated to complete the work itself or by others; and to this end, City shall be entitled
gencond.msdspec master
GC -38
to take possession of and use such equipment and materials as may be on the job site,
and to exercise all rights, options, and privileges of Contractor under its subcontracts.
purchase orders, or otherwise; and Contractor shall promptly assign such rights,
options and privileges to City. If City elects to complete the work itself or by others,
pursuant to the foregoing, the City will reimburse City for all costs incurred by City
(including, without limitation, applicable, general, and administrative expenses, and
field overhead, and the cost of necessary equipment, materials, and field labor) in
cofrecting work by Contractor which fails to meet contract requirements.
Nothing contained in the preceeding sections shall require City to pay for any work
which is unsatisfactory as determined by the Director or which is not submitted in compliance
with the terms of this Contract. City shall not be required to make any payments to Contractor
when Contractor is in default under this Contract, nor shall this Artic le constitute a waiver of
any right, at law and at equity, which City may have if Contractor is in default, including the
right to bring legal action for damages or to force specific performance of this Contract.
11.02 Termination for Convenience
In connection with the work outlined in the Contract, it is agreed and fully understood
by Contractor, that City may cancel or indefinitely suspend further work hereunder or
terminate this Contract either for cause as outlined above, or for the convenience of City, upon
fifteen (15) days written notice to Contractor, with the understanding that immediately upon
receipt of said notice all work and labor being performed under this Contract shall cease.
Contractor shall invoice City for all work satisfactorily completed and shall be compensated
in accordance with the terms of this Contract for work accomplished prior to the receipt of said
notice. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits.
After receipt of a notice of termination and acceptance otherwise directed by City,
Contractor shall, in good faith, and to the best of his ability, do all things necessary, in the
light of such notice and of such request and implementation thereof as City may make to
assure the efficient proper closeout of the terminated work ( including the protection of City
property). Among other things, the Contractor shall, except as otherwise directed or approved
by City:
1. Stop the work on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination.
2. Place no further orders for subcontracts for services, equipment or materials, except
as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work as is not terminated.
3. Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance
of the work terminated by the notice of termination.
4. Assign to City, in the manner and to the extent directed by it, al right title, and interest
of Contractor under the orders or subcontracts so terminated; in which case, City shall
have the right to settle or pay any or all claims arising out of such termination of such
orders and /or subcontracts.
5. With the approval of City, settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of
such termination or orders and subcontracts.
6. Deliver to City, all documents, property, plans, field surveys, maps, cross sections and
other data, designs and work related to the Project shall become the property of the
gencond mst/spec master GC -
City upon termination of this Contract, in a reasonably organized form. without
restriction on future use. Should City subsequently contract with a new contractor for
continuation of services under this Project, Contractor shall cooperate in providing
information.
7. In the event of such termination, no cost incurred after the ef'ective date of the notice
of termination shall be treated as reimbursable costs unless it relates to carrying out the
unterminated portion or taking closeout measures.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
5.0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 01- INFORMATION
01 -01 ENGINEER
The word "Engineer" in these Specifications shall be understood as referring
to the City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664,
Engineer of the Owner, or the Engineer's authorized representative to act in
any particular position for the Owner.
01 -02 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED
01 -05 LOCATION
specond mstlspccs
The Agreement will be prepared in not less than five (5) counterpart (original
signed) sets. Owner will furnish Contractor two (2) sets of conforming
Contract Documents and Specifications and four (4) sets of Plans free of
charge, and additional sets will be obtained from the Engineer at commercial
reproduction rates plus 20% for handling.
01 -03 GOVERNING CODES
All construction as provided for under these Plans and Specifications shall be
governed by any existing Resolutions, Codes and Ordinances, and any
subsequent amendments or revisions thereto as set forth by the Owner.
01 -04 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME
The Contractor agrees that time is of the essence for this Contract and that the
definite value of damages which would result from delay would be incapable
of ascertainment and uncertain, so that for each day of delay beyond the
number of days herein agreed upon for the completicn of the work herein
specified and contracted for, after due allowance for such extension of time
as is provided for under the provisions of Section 4.02 of the General
Conditions, the Owner may withhold permanently from the Contractor's total
compensation, not as penalty but as liquidated damage:;, the sum of $250.00
per calendar day.
The location of work shall be as mentioned in the Notice to Bidders and as
indicated on Plans.
SC -1
01 -06 USAGE OF WATER
All water used during construction shall be provided by the City. The City
shall specify the location from which the Contractor is to procure water. The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all apparatus necessary for
procuring, storing, transporting and using water during construction. The
Contractor shall strive to use that amount of water which is reasonable to
perform the work associated with this contract and shall endeavor to avoid
excessive waste. The Contractor will be required to pay for all water used if
it is found that unnecessary or excessive waste is occurring during
construction.
01 - 07 PAY ESTIMATES
If pay estimates from the Contractor are not received by the Engineer on or
before the time specified in Section 5.04 of the Genera: Conditions, then the
pay estimate will not be processed and will be returned to Contractor.
SECTION 02- SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
02 -01 CROSSING UTILITIES
Prior to commencing the work associated with this contract, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements with the Owners of such
utility companies to uncover their particular utility lines or otherwise confirm
their location. Certain utility companies perform such services at their own
expense, however, where such is not the case, the Conti actor will cause such
work to be done at his own expense.
02 -02 UTILITY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor will be responsible for providing his owr utility services while
performing the work associated with this contract. No ac ditional payment will
be made for this item.
02 -03 GUARANTEES
specond mg/specs
The Contractor warrants the materials and workmanship and that the work is
SC -2
specond mg/specs
in conformance with the plans and specifications includ_d in this contract for
the period that the Warranty Bond, as outlined in Section 04 of the Special
Conditions, is in effect. Upon notice from Owner, the C ontractor shall repair
defects in all construction or materials which develop during specified period
and at no cost to Owner. Neither final acceptance, Certificate of Completion,
final payment nor any provision in Contract Documen:s relieves Contractor
of above guarantee. Notice of observed defects will be given with reasonable
promptness. Failure to repair or replace defect upon no' ice entitles Owner to
repair or replace same and recover reasonable cost ther:of from Contractor.
02 -04 MINIMUM WAGE SCALE
Contractors are required to pay prevailing wage rates to hnborers, workmen and
mechanics employed on behalf of the City engaged in the construction of
public works. The wage rate for these jobs shall be the general prevailing
wage rates for work of a similar character. This applies to Contractors and
Subcontractors. The Contractors and Subcontractors shall keep and make
available records of workers and their wages. Contractors and Subcontractors
shall pay the prevailing wage rates as adopted by the Owner. There is a
statutory penalty of $60.00 per worker per day or por.ion of a day that the
prevailing wage rate is not paid by the Contractor or any Subcontractor.
02 -05 LIMIT OF FINANCIAL RESOURCES
The Owner has a limited amount of financial resources committed to this
Project; therefore, it shall be understood by all bidders tl the Owner may be
required to change and/or delete any items which he mry feel is necessary to
accomplish all or part of the scope of work within its limit of financial
resources. Contractor shall be entitled to no claim for damages or anticipated
profits on any portion of work that may be omitted. At any time during the
duration of this contract, the Owner reserves the right to omit any work from
this contract. Unit prices for all items previously approved in this contract
shall be used to delete or add work per change order.
02 -06 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
The Owner shall provide a project representative to i eview the quality of
materials and workmanship.
SC -3
02 -07 LIMITS OF WORK AND PAYMENT
specond msdspecs
It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to complete all work included in this
Contract, so authorized by the Owner, as described in the contract documents
and technical specifications. All items of work not specifically paid for in the
bid proposal shall be included in the unit price bids. Any question arising as
to the limits of work shall be left up to the interpretation of the Engineer.
02 -08 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND
Owner will not pay for materials on hand. Payment will be made for work
completed in accordance with monthly estimate procedure stipulated in the
General Conditions of the Agreement.
02 - 09 "AS BUILT" DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall mark all changes and revisions on of his copies of the
working drawings during the course of the Project as they occur. Upon
completion of the Project and prior to final acceptance and payment, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer one set of his working drawings, dated
and signed by himself and his project superintendent and labeled as "As-
Built", that shows all changes and revisions outlined above and that shows
field locations of all above ground appurtenances including but not limited to
valves, fire hydrants and manholes. These as -built drawings shall become the
property of the Owner. Each appurtenance shall be loca.ed by at least two (2)
horizontal distances measured from existing, easily identifiable, immovable
appurtenances such as fire hydrants or valves. Property pins can be used for
as- builts tie -ins provided no existing utilities as preciously described are
available. Costs for delivering as -built drawings shall be subsidiary to other
bid items.
02 - 10 LAND FOR WORK
Owner provides, as indicated on Drawings, land upon which work is to done,
right -of -way for access to same and such other lands which are designated for
use of Contractor. Contractor provides, at his expense and without liability of
Owner, any additional land and access thereto that may be required for his
SC -4
specond msUspecs
construction operations, temporary construction facilities, or for storage of
materials.
02 -11 DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY UTILITY STRUCTURES
Whenever existing utilities, not indicated on Plans, present obstructions to
grade and alignment of proposed improvements immediately notify engineer,
who without delay, will determine if existing utilities are to be relocated, or
grade and alignment of proposed improvements changed. Where necessary to
move existing services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, etc., as determined by the
Engineer, the Contractor will make arrangements with the owner of the utility
to be moved and have it moved. The costs of any utility relocations will be at
the Contractor's sole expense. Owner will not be liable for relocations costs
or damages on account of delays due to changes made by owners of privately
owned utilities which hinder progress of the work.
02 -12 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
All construction staking required to complete the wort; associated with this
contract shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be
responsible for determining the layout and extent of staking necessary to
construct the improvements to the lines and grades shown in the Plans. This
item shall not be paid for separately and shall be consider ed subsidiary to other
bid items.
SECTION 03 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Access shall be provided for residents and emergency vehicles at all times.
When it becomes necessary to restrict access, the Contractor shall notify all
applicable agencies (ie. Fire Department, E.M.S., Public Works, etc.). At the
end of each day two lanes of traffic shall be openec to the public. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all maintenance signing and safety
precautions necessary for traffic control. This item shall be considered
subsidiary to bid item "Traffic Control" and no additional compensation shall
be given for complying with this Special Condition.
SC -5
SECTION 04- WARRANTY BOND
specond mstlspecs
Per City of Round Rock Ordinances, a two (2) year Warranty Bond naming the
City of Round Rock as obligee will be required for public streets constructed
without lime stabilization of subgrade material when the Plasticity Index of the
subgrade is above 20. A one (1) year Warranty Bond naming the City of
Round Rock as obligee will be required for all other construction. Warranty
Bond shall remain in effect for one (1) year or two (2) years, as applicable,
from date of City of Round Rock acceptance of improvements. Such bonds
shall be from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of
Texas to act as surety or other surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner prior
to final payment.
SC -6
SECTION 05- INSURANCE
spccond msVspecs
Section 3.18 of the General Conditions of the Agreement is hereby amended
to include the following:
3.18 Insurance
Contractor shall carry insurance in the following types and amounts for the
duration of this Contract, which shall include items owned by Owner in care,
custody and control of Contractor prior and during cons: ruction and warranty
period, and furnish Certificates of Insurance along with copies of policy
declaration pages and all policy endorsements as evidence thereof:
a. Statutory Worker's Compensation and minimum $100,000 Employers
Liability Insurance.
b. Commercial General Liability Insurance with minimum limits of
$500,000 per occurrence and $1,000,000 Aggregate or $500,000 for
this designated project and $100,000 Fire Dama
c. Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, nonowned and hired
vehicles with minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $250,000 for each
person and $500,000 for each occurrence and Property Damage limits
of $100,000 or Combined Single Limit of $600,000.
d. On all new or remodeling building projects: All Risk Builders Risk
Insurance for insurable building projects shall be insured in the amount
of the contract price for such improvements. Cwner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other for damages c fused by fire or other
perils to the extent covered by Builders Risk Insurance required under
this section, except as to such rights as they may have in the proceeds
of such insurance. Contractor shall require similar waivers by
Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors.
e. Owner and Contractor's Protective Policy. The Contractor shall
provide and maintain during the life of this contract and until all work
under said contract has been completed and accepted by the Owner, an
Owner's and Contractor's Protective Policy which co- insures the Owner
and the Owner's agents and employees with the same Commercial
SC -7
specond msdspccs
General Liability coverage as described above, entitled "Commercial
General Liability Insurance."
When offsite storage is permitted, policy will be endorsed for transit and off
site storage in amounts sufficient to protect property being transported or
stored.
This insurance shall include, as insured, City of Round Rock, Contractor,
Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the work, as tl eir respective interest
may appear.
If insurance policies are not written for amount specified in b. and c. above,
Contractor is required to carry an Excess Liability Insurance Policy for any
difference in amounts specified.
Contractor shall be responsible for deductibles and self insured retentions, if
any, stated in policies. Any self insured retention shall not exceed ten percent
of minimum required limits. All deductibles or self insured retentions shall be
disclosed on Certificate of Insurance required above.
Contractor shall not commence work at site under this Contract until he has
obtained required insurance and until such insurance 1 been reviewed by
Owner's Contract Administration Office. Contractor shall not allow any
Subcontractors to commence work until insurance required has been obtained
and approved. Approval of insurance by Owner shall npt relieve or decrease
liability of Contractor hereunder.
Insurance to be written by a company licensed to do business in the State of
Texas at the time policy is issued and acceptable to owner.
Contractor shall produce an endorsement to each effected policy:
1. Naming City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock,
Texas 78664 as additional insured (except Workers' Compensation and
Builders Risk).
2. That obligates the insurance company to notify Joanne Land, City
Secretary, City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock,
Texas 78664 of any and all changes to policy 30 days prior to change.
SC -8
specond mst/specs
3. That the "other" insurance clause shall not apply to Owner where City
of Round Rock is an additional insured shown on policy. It is intended
that policies required in this agreement, covering both Owner and
Contractor, shall be considered primary coverage as applicable.
Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any
insurance to lapse during term of this Contract or as required in the Contract.
If Contractor is underwritten on a claim -made basis, the retroactive date shall
be prior to, or coincident with, the date of this Contract and the Certificate of
Insurance shall state that coverage is claims made and also the retroactive date.
Contractor shall maintain coverage for duration of this Contract and for two
years following completion of this Contract.
Contractor shall provide the City annually a Certificate of Insurance as
evidence of such insurance. It is further agreed that Co -tractor shall provide
Owner a 30 day notice of aggregate erosion, an advance of the retroactive date.
cancellation and/or renewal.
It is also agreed that Contractor will invoke the tail option at request of Owner
and the Extended Reporting Period (ERP) premium shall be paid by
Contractor.
Owner reserves the right to review insurance requirements of this section
during effective period of the Contract and to make reasonable adjustments to
insurance coverages and their limits when deemed necessary and prudent by
Owner based upon changes in statutory law, court decisions or the claims
history of the industry as well as Contractor.
Owner shall be entitled, upon request, and without expe Ise, to receive copies
of policies and all endorsements thereto and may riake any reasonable
requests for deletion or revision or modification of particular policy terms,
conditions, limitations or exclusions, except where policy provisions are
established by law or regulation binding upon either of the parties hereto or the
underwriter on any of such policies.
Actual losses not covered by insurance as required by the: section shall be paid
by Contractor.
SC -9
SECTION 06- WAGE RATES
General Decision Number TX000043
Superseded General Decision No. TX990043
State: TEXAS
Construction Type:
HEAVY
HIGHWAY
County(ies):
BELL CORYELL TRAVIS
BEXAR GUADALUPE WILLIAMSON
BRAZOS HAYS
COMAL MCLENNAN
Heavy (excluding tunnels and dams) and Highway Construction Projects (dc es not include building
structures in rest area projects). *NOT TO BE USED FOR WORK ON SEWAGE OR WATER
TREATMENT PLANTS OR LIFT/PUMP STATIONS IN BELL. CORYELL, McLENNAN AND
WILLIAMSON COUNTIES.
Modification Number Publication Date
0 02/11/2000
County(ies):
BELL CORYELL TRAVIS
BEXAR GUADALUPE WILLIAMSON
BRAZOS HAYS
COMAL MCLENNAN
SUTX2042A 03/26/1998
Rates
AIR TOOL OPERATOR 8.08
ASPHALT HEATER OPERATOR 11.00
ASPHALT RAKER 8.00
ASPHALT SHOVELER 7.97
BATCHING PLANT WEIGHER 11.00
CARPENTER 10.80
CONCRETE FINISHER- PAVING 9.57
CONCRETE FINISHER- STRUCTURES 8.83
CONCRETE RUBBER 8.52
ELECTRICIAN 16.25
specond msUspecs
SC -10
Fringes
Rates
FLAGGER 6.86
FORM BUILDER - STRUCTURES 8.77
FORM LINER - PAVING & CURB 8.00
FORM SETTER - PAVING & CURB 8.68
FORM SETTER - STRUCTURES 8.73
LABORER- COMMON 7.12
LABORER- UTILITY 7.99
MECHANIC 12.15
OILER 11.40
SERVICER 8.44
PAINTER - STRUCTURES 10.00
PIPE LAYER 8.27
ASPHALT DISTRIBUTOR OPERATOR 9.70
ASPHALT PAVING MACHINE 9.26
BROOM OR SWEEPER OPERATOR 7.12
BULLDOZER 9.28
CONCRETE CURING MACHINE 7.79
CONCRETE FINISHING MACHINE 11.00
CONCRETE PAVING SAW
SLIPFORM MACHINE OPERATOR 11.15
CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE,
DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL 10.12
FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR
TRUCK MOUNTED 15.00
FRONT END LOADER 8.86
HOIST - DOUBLE DRUM & LESS 10.81
MIXER 7.12
MIXER - CONCRETE PAVING 11.00
MOTOR GRADER FINE GRADE 12.37
MOTOR GRADER 11.14
PAVEMENT MARKING MACHINE 8.31
PLANER OPERATOR 15.75
ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL PLANT -MIX
PAVEMENTS 7.73
ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL OTHER
FLATWIIEEL OR TAMPING 7.33
ROLLER, PNEUMATIC, SELF PROPELLED 7.17
SCRAPERS 8.38
TRACTOR- CRAWLER TYPE 9.40
TRAVELING MIXER 7.92
TRENCHING MACHINE, HEAVY 9.92
WAGON - DRILL /BORING MACHINE 8.00
specond msUspecs
S C -11
9.79
Fringes
Rates
REINFORCING STEEL SE' 1 ER PAVING 14.50
REINFORCING STEEL SETTER
STRUCTURES 10.61
STEEL WORKER - STRUCTURAL 11.73
SPREADER BOX OPERATOR 8.55
WORK ZONE BARRICADE 8.29
SIGN INSTALLER 7.97
TRUCK DRIVER - SINGLE AXLE LIGHT 8.32
TRUCK DRIVER - SINGLE AXLE HEAVY 7.954
TRUCK DRIVER - TANDEM AXLE SEMI
TRAILER 8.02
TRUCK DRIVER- LOWBOY/FLOAT 10.12
WELDER 11.02
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
I.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be:
Fringes
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed
may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 15.5(a)
1 (ii))
• an existing published wage determination
• a survey underlying a wage determination
• a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination
matter
• a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact. including requests for summaries of surveys, should be
with the Wage and Hour Regional office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the
response from this initial contact is not satisfactory. then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should
be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact
should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to
specond mstispecs
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
Wage and Hour Division
U. S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N. W.
Washington, D. C. 20210
SC -12
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action)
can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part
1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
specond mst/specs
Wage and Hour Administrator
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N. W.
Washington, D. C. 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any
information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor
considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to
the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board
U. S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N. W.
Washington, D. C. 20210
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
END OF GENERAL DECISION
SC -13
CLASSIFICATION
Rate
Health
Pension
Vacation
Total Wage
ASBESTOS WORKER
$8.78
$0.00
$0.00
30.00
$8.78
CARPENTER
$15.52
$ 1.57
$0.97
:30.00
$18.06
CARPET LAYER/FLOORING INSTALLER
$8.00
$0.00
$0.00
50.00
$8.00
CONCRETE FINISHER
$10.27
$0.00
$0.00
'30.00
SI0.27
DATA COMMUNICATION/TELECOM INSTALLER
512.08
$0.76
$0.50
50.05
$13.39
DRYWALL INSTALLER/CEILING INSTALLER
$10.91
$0.00
$0.00
:10.00
$10.91
ELECTRICIAN
$17.44
$2.16
$1.05
51.05
521.70
ELEVATOR MECHANIC
$16.75
$3.85
$2.19
31.50
524.29
FIRE PROOFING INSTALLER
$8.00
$0.00
. 50.00
:30.00
$8.00
GLAZIER
$13.60
$2.24
$1.15
50.54
$17.53
HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$10.56
$0.00
$0.00
30.00
$10.56
INSULATOR
513.75
51.16
50.92
50.03
515.86
IRON WORKER
512.18
S0.00
S0.00
:30.00
512.18
LABORER/HELPER
$7.48
$0.02
$0.00
:30.00
$7.50
LATHER/PLASTERER
$12.50
$0.00
$0.00
50.00
$12.50
LIGHT EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$7.75
50.00
50.00
:30.00
$7.75
MASON
S16.00
50.00
50.00
30.00
$16.00
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER
$11.00
$0.62
$0.00
'10.34'
$11.96
MILLWRIGHT
$15.91
S1.63
$1.00
50.00
518.54
PAINTER/WALL COVERING INSTALLER
$8.00
50 00
50.00
'30.00
58.00
PIPEFITTER
$18.10
51.42
$1.80
50.00
$21.32
PLUMBER
$12.68
$0.00
$0.00
50.00
$12.68
ROOFER
$10.00
$0.00
$0.00
30.00
$10.00
SHEET METAL WORKER
$18 40
52.39
$2.55
30.33
$23.67
SPRINKLER FITTER
$18.25
$3 40
$2.20
10.00
523.85
TERRAZZO WORKER
$0.00*
$0.00
$0.00
:10.00
$0.00*
TILE SETTER
$15.00
$0.32
$0.00
'
515.32
WATERPROOFER/CAULKER
510.64
$0.00
50.00
'30.00
510.64
COUNTY NAME: WILLIAMSON
*$0.00 in the rate field indicated insufficient data was received to determine a prevailing wage rate for this
classification. Government Code Title 10, Sec. 2258.023, paragraph C state: "A cjntractor or subcontractor does
not violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates and
specify the rates in the contract as provided in Section 2258.022.
(Property of General Services Commission, Based on 1996 Survey results)
specond mst/spccs
PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TRADES
SC -14
Date Printed: April 15, 1997
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 .
1
1
6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK,
techspec mst/spec master
The work covered by these Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations in connection
with the inspection and testing, complete in accordance with the Plans, and
subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
1.02 GOVERNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: The item number designation shown in parentheses adjacent to
captions herein is a reference to City of Austin Standard Specifications.
STREET. WATER. SEWER AND DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS
The current City of Austin Standard Specifications as z.dopted and amended
by the City of Round Rock and the current City of Austin Erosion and
Sedimentation Control Manual are hereby referred to and included in this
contract as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein and they
shall be applied to this project except as modified in these Specifications and
on the Plans.
Wherever the term "City of Austin" is used in the Austin Specifications, it
shall be construed to mean the City of Round Rock.
Wherever the term "Engineer" is used in the Austin Specifications, it shall be
construed to mean the City of Round Rock.
TS-1
ITEM 2 CONTROL OF WORK
2.01 CLEAN -UP
2.01.1 CONSTRUCTION SITE
2.01.2 BACKWORK
2.02 GRADING
techspec mst/spcc master
During construction the Contractor shall keep the site free and clean from all
rubbish and debris and shall clean-up the site promptly when notified to do so
by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, maintain the streets and roads free
from dust, mud, excess earth or debris which constitutes a nuisance or danger
to the public using the thoroughfare, or the occupants of adjacent properties.
Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets and roads over which hauling
is done, and any such spillage or debris deposited on streets, due to the
Contractor's operations, shall be immediately removed.
The Contractor shall coordinate his operations in such a manner as to prevent
the amount of clean -up and completion of back works from becoming
excessive. Should such a condition exist, the Engineer may order all or
portions of the work to cease and refuse to allow any work to commence until
the back work is done to the Engineer's satisfaction.
The Contractor shall do such grading in and adjacent to the construction area
associated with this contract as may be necessary to leave such areas in a neat
and satisfactory condition approved by the Engineer.
TS -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM 3 EXAMINATION AND REVIEW
3.01 EXAMINATION OF WORK
3.02 NOTIFICATION
3.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
3.04 PROTECTION OF STAKES, MARKS, ETC.
techspec mst/spec master
The work covered under this Contract shall be examined and reviewed by the
Engineer, representatives of all governmental entities which have jurisdiction,
and the Owner's authorized representative. The quality of material and the
quality of installation of the improvements shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility for the construction
methods and safety precautions in the undertaking of this Contract.
The Engineer and Owner must be notified a minimum o:'24 -hours in advance
of beginning construction, testing, or requiring presence of the Engineer,
project representative, or Owner's representative.
The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor reference points and benchmarks
that, in the Engineer's opinion, provide sufficient information for the
Contractor to perform construction staking.
All engineering and surveyor's stakes, marks, property corners, etc., shall be
carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of destruction or removal
during the course of this project, such stakes, marks, property corners, etc.,
shall be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's sole expense.
TS -3
ITEM 4 PROTECTION AND PRECAUTION
4.01 WORK IN FREEZING WEATHER
Portions of the work may continue as directed by the Engineer.
4.02 PROTECTION OF TREES. PLANTS AND SHRUBS
techspec mst/spec master
The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to preserve all existing trees,
plants and shrubs but where it is justifiable and necessary the Contractor may
remove trees and plants for construction right -of -way but only with approval
of the Engineer.
4.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES AND BARRICADES
Traffic control measures and barricades shall be installed in accordance with
the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and in other
locations deemed necessary by the Engineer, for the protection life and
property. Under no circumstances will any existing road be permitted to
remain closed over a weekend. No separate pay will be made for this item.
Costs for this item shall be subsidiary to other items of work.
4.04 PROPERTY LINES AND MONUMENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection, reference and resetting
of property corner monuments if disturbed.
4.05 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall at his own expense, make arrangement for the disposal
of surplus material. such as rock, trees, brush and other unwanted backfill
materials.
4.06 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide additional space as
necessary for his operations and storage of materials.
TS -4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM 5 MATERIALS
5.01 TRADE NAMES
Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the specifications an article or class
of material is designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog number of
any maker, patentee, manufacturer, or dealer, such designations shall be taken
as intending to mean and specify the articles described or another equal thereto
in quality, finish, and serviceability for the purpose intended, as may be
determined and judged by the Engineer in his sole discretion.
5.02 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
techspec.mst/spec master
No material which has been used by the Contractor for any temporary purpose
whatever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without the' written
consent of the Engineer. Where materials or equipment are specified by a
trade or brand name, it is not the intention of the owner to discriminate against
an equal product of another manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard
of quality for performance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation
of bids. Where the words "equivalent ", "proper" or "equal to" are used, they
shall be understood to mean that the item referred to :,hall be "proper", the
"equivalent" of, or "equal to" some other item, in the opinion or judgement of
the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best of
their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully equal to approved samples.
Notwithstanding that the words "or equal to" or other such expressions may be
used in the specifications in connection with a material, manufactured article
or process, the material, article or process specifically designated shall be used,
unless a substitute is approved in writing by the Engineer, and the Engineer
will have the right to require the use of such specificall} designated material,
article or process.
TS -5
7.0 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
AAA95- 055 -00
June 14, 1995
Mr. Tom Phillips
Round Rock ISD
1311 Round Rock Avenue
Round Rock, Texas 78681
Mr. Robert L. Bennett
The City of Round Rock
2008 Enterprise
Round Rock, Texas 78664
RE: Geotechnical Study
Oakmont Center South
Round Rock, Texas
Enclosed is our report of the Geotechnical Study at the site proposed for the Oakmont
Center South in Round Rock, Texas.
This engineering report has been prepared for the use of Round Rock ISD, The City of
Round Rock, and their consultants for foundation design purposes in accordance with
accepted Geotechnical Engineering practices. This report may not contain sufficient
information for purposes of other parties or other uses.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project and are looking
forward to providing quality assurance /quality control services during construction.
Please give us a call if you have any questions or if we can be of further assistance.
Very truly yours,
RABA - KISTNER - BRYTEST CONSULTANTS, INC.
MQS /GWR:c(i
Engineers. Geologists, Chemists, Water Planners.
Hygienists and Environmental Scientists
Raba - Kistner - Brytest
Consultants. Inc.
8200 Cameron Road, Suite C - 154 Austin, TX 78753
(512) 339-1745 FAX (512) 339-6174
M.Q. Stapp, Jr., P.E Gary . a , D.Eng., P.E.
Senior Consultant Presiden
GE0- 1995 {.0 V;AA95 -055.RPr
Austin • Temple • EI Paso • San Antonio
1
1
1.
1
11
is
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PAG E
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTS 1
GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 2
FOUNDATION ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 2
FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION 4
EXPANSIVE SOILS 5
PAVEMENT RECOMMENDAITONS 5
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 6
LIMITATIONS 8
AAA95- 055 -00
June 14, 1995
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Figure 1 Site Location Map
Figure 2 Plan of Borings
Figures 3 through 18 Logs of Borings
Figure 19 Legend
Figure 20 Soil Design Values
Rebe- K3rtner- Hrytest cmwhant Uic
GEOTECHNICAL STUDY
OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
RKBCI Project No. AAA95- 055 -00
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTS
The location of the project is shown on the attached Site Location Map, Figure 1.
Subsurface materials and conditions at the site were evaluated by sixteen core borings
drilled at the locations shown on the attached Plan of Borings, Figure 2. These
borings were drilled in general accordance with =ASTM D -420 procedures. Seven
borings were drilled to depths of 15 to 25 feet below grade within the planned
building areas. Nine borings were drilled to a depth of 5 feet below grade in the
proposed pavement area.
Soil samples were obtained by Shelby tube samplers and rock cores were obtained by
a double -tube core barrel.
Each sample was classified in the laboratory. The geotechnical engineering properties
of the strata were evaluated by the following tests:
Type of Test Number Conducted
Moisture Content 31
Atterberg Limits 16
Minus 200 Sieve 14
Unconfined Compression 20
Unit Dry Weight 20
Hydrometer Analysis 2
The results of the laboratory tests are presented in numerical form on the Logs of
Borings as illustrated on Figures 3 through 18. A key to classification terms and
symbols used on the logs is presented on Figure 19.
Samples will be retained in our laboratory for thirty days after submittal of this report.
Please notify us in writing prior to this date if longer storage is required.
Raba- Kismer- Brytest Consultants. Inc
J
AAA95- 055 -00 Page 2
GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
In general, the subsurface materials encountered from the ground surface down
in the building borings B -1 through B -7 consist of: 0.4 to 3.3 feet of dark brown clay;
9.0 to 12.0 feet of Tight tan and light gray limestone (bottom of B -1); and, gray
limestone down to at least the bottom of Borings B -2 through B -7. The primary
limestone is known geologically as the Georgetown Formation and is of Lower
Cretaceous Age.
The building borings B-1 through B -7 were advanced dry to depths ranging from 0.5
to 3.3 feet and groundwater was not detected above these depths. The pavement
borings P -1 through P -9 were advanced dry and groundwater was not detected above
the 5.0 -foot depth. Groundwater is likely present in the upper limestone during wet
seasons.
FOUNDATION ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Available information indicates that the structures will be one story tall with low to
moderate loads. Based on the results of the Atterberg limits tests the shrink /swell
potential of the clays generally falls in the high range. With a moisture increase the
clays will undergo volume increases, if free to expand, or they will generate excessive
upward forces, if restrained by vertical Toads. With a moisture decrease the clay will
shrink.
The final selection of the foundation types should be based on considerations of
several factors such as:
1) Strength properties, expansive qualities, and uniformity of subsurface
materials;
2) Magnitude of structural loads;
3) Flexibility of the structures with respect to withstanding differential
vertical movements without damage; and
4) Foundation construction costs.
Subsurface materials have been evaluated with respect to:
1) Near - surface, grid -type beam and slab foundations; and
2) Pier foundations on the gray limestone.
Raba- xistner- Brytest Cauuhants.lnc
AAA95- 055 -00
Details and results of these evaluations are discussed in the following paragraphs for
consideration along with the other factors in the final selection of the foundation
types.
Near - Surface Grid -Type Beam and Slab Foundations: The foundations may be
designed using the criteria in Report No. 33 to the Federal Housing Administration
entitled "Criteria for Selection and Design of Residential Slabs -on- Ground" prepared
by a Special Advisory Committee of the Building Research Advisory Board. A climatic
rating (Cw) of 18 can be used for the project site in Round Rock, Texas. The effective
plasticity index, support index, and unconfined strengths for the individual borings are
summarized on attached Figure 20. The soil design values for the core borings in each
building area should be used in designing the foundations.
The potential upward movements of the gird -type beam and slab foundations have
been estimated by a method devised by Mr. Chester McDowell, based on the
Atterberg limits of the soils. Results of the potential vertical rise studies are shown
by the PVR values on attached Figure 20.
The stratum of expansive soil is generally thin enough (less than 2 feet except in B -1)
so that it can be economically replaced with a compacted non - expansive select fill.
The following soil design values may be used in connection with the design of the
foundations according to B.R.A.B. Report No. 33 if the existing clays are replaced with
a properly compacted non - expansive select fill.
Design Values B.R.A.B. Report No. 33
Climatic Rating (Cw) = 18
Effective PI = <15
Support Index, C = 1.00
Unconfined Compressive
Strength = 3,200 psf
Raba- KLUnet- Srytest Consultants In
Page 38
Page 66
Page 53
Page 3
Foundations on the Gray Limestone: Based on considerations of strength properties,
expansive qualities and uniformity of subsurface materials, the gray limestone is the
most desirable material for supporting heavy structural loads. The surface of the gray
limestone was encountered at depths ranging from 10.6 to 12.9 feet below the
existing ground surface except in B -1 where the gray limestone was not encountered.
auger excavated straight shaft piers will provide a desirable means of transmitting
structural Toads to the gray limestone.
AAA95- 055 -00 Page 4
Stress - strain curves for strength tests on the gray limestone indicate that it will act as
an elastic material within the range of proposed loads. Based on the typical minimum
strength and the Elastic Theory equation, an allowable unit Toad of 25 tons per square
foot can be used for piers on the gray limestone with a safety factor of 3 against a
perimeter shear failure. The piers should be at least 18 inches in diameter and should
penetrate the gray limestone at least 24 inches.
FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION
Near - Surface - Grid -Tvpe Beam and Slab Foundation: After the vegetation has been
removed from the sites and the soils have been excavated above the light tan and light
gray limestone, the non - expansive select fill should be constructed as follows.
Materials used as select structural fill preferably should be a crushed stone or gravel
aggregate. It is recommended that materials specified for use as select structural fill
meet the Texas Department of Transportation 1993 Standard Specification for
Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 248, Type A, Grade 2 (crushed
stone) or Type B, Grade 2 (gravel aggregate). Fine grained sands or clayey sands
should not be considered as a substitution without written approval of the
Geotechnical Engineer. Select structural fill should be placed in loose lifts not
exceeding 8 inches in thickness and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum
density as determined by TxDOT, Tex -113 -E Compaction Test. The water content of
the fill should be maintained within 3 percent (above or below) of the optimum water
content until permanently covered.
A vapor barrier consisting of 6 to 8 mil polyethylene sheeting should be placed directly
on the prepared subgrade or fill soils. At least 4 inches of clean, washed, free -
draining, natural sand should be placed on top of the polyethylene sheeting. The sand
'should conform to the American Society for Testing and Materials "Standard
Specifications for Concrete Aggregates" ASTM C33 -92a ", (fine aggregate for
concrete). The concrete slab is then placed directly on top of the moistened concrete
sand which will also aid in promoting even curing of the plastic concrete.
Foundations on the Gray Limestone: Variations in the depth to the desired gray
limestone will require variations in the pier depths during construction. In the event
that groundwater is encountered during the pier drilling operations, temporary steel
casings should be installed from the ground surface down into a continuous limestone
layer below the water- bearing zone. Therefore, the bid schedule should include pay
items for constructing the piers with, and without, the use of temporary steel casings
on a unit price basis.
Rabe- Klstner- Brytest Consuhants Inc
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT SECTIONS
Area /Material
Minimum Recommended
Thickness in Inches
Heavy Duty Pavement
Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete
2
(TxDOT Item 340, Type D)
Crushed Limestone Base Material
15
(TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 2)
I
Standard Duty Pavement
I
Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete
1 -1/2
( TxDOT Item 340, Type D)
Crushed Limestone Base Material
10
(TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 2)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
.1
.
1
AAA95- 055 -00 Page 5
Pier excavations should be checked for size and to see that all loose material has been
removed and that they penetrate the desired limestone at (east 24 inches. Foundation
concrete should be placed as soon as practical after completion of the drilling
operations.
EXPANSIVE SOILS
The expansive soils should be removed from the building area and replaced with
compacted non - expansive fill in order to use a soil- supported floor slab for the
buildings supported by piers on the limestone. Construction of the compacted select
fill should be in accordance with the foregoing paragraphs regarding the construction
of the near - surface grid -type beam and slab foundation.
PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS
These recommendations are based on the assumption that the final pavement grades
will provide adequate drainage for the pavement areas and that water will not be
allowed to enter the pavement system by either edge penetration adjacent to
landscape areas or penetration from the surface due to surfacing ponding, or
inadequate maintenance of pavement joints, or surface cracks that may develop.
Recommended minimum pavement sections are shown below for both the standard
duty pavement areas and heavy duty pavement areas. These recommendations are
based on our previous experience with similar soil conditions. Traffic loading data was
not available for a detailed pavement design study.
Raba- Klsiner- Bcytest Cmwhants, Inc
AAA95- 055 -00 Page 6
RIGID PAVEMENT SECTIONS
Rigid pavement should be considered for use in areas that typically receive larger
delivery truck and bus traffic and at entrances where traffic is channelized. Concrete
used for rigid concrete construction should have a minimum 28 -day flexural strength
of 600 psi. This is approximately equivalent to a minimum 28 -day compressive
strength of 4,000 psi. Other rigid pavement design recommendations are provided
below.
Reinforced Concrete Pavement Thickness
Maximum Individual Slab Dimensions
Reinforcement Size
Reinforcement Spacing
Load Transfer at Joints, Dowel Size
Load Transfer at Joints, Dowel Length
Load Transfer at Joints, Dowel Spacing
Crushed Limestone Base Material
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES
Cebu- Klsmer- Brytest Consultants Inc
= 5.0 inches
= 25 feet x 25 feet
= No. 3 Deformed Bars
= 18 inches on centers each way
= 3/4 inch diameter smooth bars
= 18 inches (one end treated to slip)
= 12 inches on centers along each
joint
= 4 inches
Drainage Considerations: As with any soil- supported structure, the satisfactory
performance of a pavement system is contingent on the provision of adequate surface
and subsurface drainage. Insufficient drainage which allows saturation of the
pavement subgrade will greatly reduce the performance and service life of the
pavement systems, even when the system is constructed using either typical cross
section guidelines or design recommendations based on site - specific soil testing.
Surface and subsurface drainage considerations crucial to the performance of
pavements at this site include (but are not limited to) the following:
1) Any known natural or man -made subsurface seepage at the site which
may occur at sufficiently shallow depths as to influence moisture
contents within the subgrade should be intercepted by drainage ditches
or below grade french drains.
2) All surface drainage should be directed away from the pavement and
curbs. Final site grading should eliminate isolated depressions adjacent
to curbs which may allow surface water to pond and thus to increase
infiltration into the underlying soils. Curbs should be installed to
sufficient depth to reduce infiltration of water beneath the curbs.
AAA95- 055 -00 Page 7
3) Pavement surfaces should be maintained to minimize surface ponding
and to provide rapid sealing of any developing cracks. These measures
will help reduce infiltration of subsurface water downward through the
pavement section.
Subgrade Preparation: Subgrades to support pavements should be stripped of all
existing vegetation. The exposed subgrades should be constructed, shaped and
compacted in accordance with the TxDOT Item 110. The subgrade should be scarified
to a minimum depth of 6 inches and recompacted to 95% to 100% of the maximum
dry density and at optimum moisture ± 3% as determined by TxDOT Tex -113 -E
Compaction Tests.
Fill Material: Fill material should be free of organic and other deleterious materials.
The fill should be placed in maximum loose lifts of 8 inches and compacted to a
minimum of 95% and not more than 100% of the maximum dry density at optimum
moisture ± 3% as determined by TxDOT Tex -113 -E Compaction Tests.
Flexible Base Course: Materials used for flexible base should be crushed limestone
conforming to TxDOT, Standard Specifications, Item 247, Type A, Grade 2. The base
course should be placed in maximum loose lifts of 8 inches and compacted to a
minimum of 100% of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture ± 2% as
determined by TxDOT Tex -113 -E Compaction Tests.
Asphaltic Concrete: The hot mix, hot -laid asphaltic concrete used for the surface
course should conform to TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 340, Type D, and
should be compacted to a minimum of 92% of the maximum theoretical density as
determined by TxDOT Tex -227 -F laboratory test procedures.
Portland Cement Concrete: The Portland cement concrete should meet the TxDOT
Item 360 specifications. The concrete should be air - entrained to result in a 4 percent
± 1 percent air content, should have a maximum slump of 2 inches (before the
addition of a plasticizer), should be consolidated with mechanical vibrators, and should
have a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. A liquid membrane -
forming curing compound should be applied as soon as practical after broom finishing
the concrete surface. The curing compound will reduce the loss of water from the
concrete. The reduction in the rapid loss in water will reduce shrinkage cracking of
the concrete.
Concrete Jointing: Joints are typically provided in concrete pavements to aid in
construction and control the location and magnitude of cracks. Where practical,
construction, expansion, control, and sawed joints should be designed to form square
panels not exceeding ACI 302.1 R and 316R Code Recommendations. However, this
is not to imply that rectangular panels cannot be used. All control joints should be
Raba- Klstner- Brytest Cc ssuhann. Inc
AAA95- 055 -00 Page 8
formed or sawed to a depth of at least 1/4 the thickness of the concrete slab and with
a maximum width of 1/4 inches. Sawing of control joints should begin as soon as the
concrete will not ravel, generally no later than the day after placement. Control joints
may be hand formed or formed by using a remolded filler. We recommend that all
longitudinal and transverse construction joints be keyed.
Expansion joints are needed to separate the concrete slab from fixed rigid objects such
as drop inlets, light standards, and buildings. Expansion joint spacing should not
exceed 120 feet, and no expansion or construction joints should be located in a swale
or drainage collection location.
We recommend that the concrete pavement be reinforced with steel reinforcing bars
to bond any cracks together. The reinforcing steel should be positioned approximately
1/3 the slab thickness below the surface, but not Tess than 2 inches and should NOT
continue across construction joints. If possible, the pavement should develop a
minimum slope of 1.5% to provide surface drainage. Reinforced concrete pavement
should cure a minimum of 3 and 7 days before allowing automobile and truck traffic,
respectively.
LIMITATIONS
The analyses and recommendations submitted in this report are based on: a) the data
obtained from sixteen exploratory borings drilled at this site; b) the assumption that
the site grading will result in only minor changes in the existing topography; and c)
project information provided by the structural engineer.
This report may not reflect the exact variations of the subsurface conditions across
the site. The nature and extent of variations across the site may not become evident
until construction begins. If variations then appear evident, it may be necessary to
reevaluate our recommendations after performing on -site observations and tests to
establish the engineering significance of the variations.
If the final grade elevations are substantially different from the existing grades, our
office should be informed about these changes. Significant changes may require re-
examination and analyses to evaluate the effects of the changes on the foundation
recommendations provided herein.
Raba- Klsiner- BrYtett Cansulanis.lnc
June 14, 1995
Geotechnical Study
Oakmont Center South
Round Rock, Texas
Prepared For:
Round Rock ISD
1311 Round Rock Avenue
Round Rock, Texas 78681
Attn: Mr. Tom Phillips
and
The City of Round Rock
2008 Enterprise
Round Rock, Texas 78664
Attn: Mr. Robert L. Bennett
Prepared By:
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
8200 Cameron Road, Suite C -154
Austin, Texas 78754 -3822
RKBCI Project No. AAA95- 055 -00
Distribution: Round Rock ISD (1)
City of Round Rock (1)
Baker - Aicklen & Associates (1)
Raba Klstner Brytut Consultants. Inc
M.Q. Stapp, Jr., P.E.
L Raba- Klstner -B rytest
1 Consultants, Inc.
JOB NO. AAA95- 055 -00
JUNE 1995
OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
ROUND ROCK. TEXAS
SITE LOCATION MAP
FIGURE 1
Not to Scale
Boring Location
9 P -8
8 P -9.
Raba- Kistner- Brytest l
Consultants, Inc.
JOB NO. AAA95- 055-00
JUNE 1995
OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS ,
PLAN OF BORINGS
FIGURE 2
MO MO UM MO • • MN M -- NM MI MN MI MN M — IN INN
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DO
pcf
MC
%
Ea
Ou
tal
1
& a
...
—
— 10
-
-
—
—12.5
— 15
—17.5
T
TO
—
—
—2.5
-
-
-
-
_
—7.5
:ram
CLAY, dark brown to brown with trace
calcareous particles
. ,
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some alternating severely
weathered limestone, clay layers and
fossils
-Cored from 3.3' to 5.8 and
recovered 32%
-Cored from 5.8' to 8.6' and
recovered 36%
-Cored from 8.6' to 10.2' and
recovered 100%
-Cored from 10.2' to 15.0' and
recovered 88%
88
130
131
33
33
10
11
71
33
38
1.1
7
82
•
0
0
32
70
3.2
3.5
1°°1
d
_
ErN=MII
IMI=1
IV AM
•....•
MT=
......
...m.
..........
21W=
......
.....
....-
...-•
.........m
maw=
........
.M=
MIMI.
MM.
:SSA
:LW:a
...m.
......
......,
Ell
5231
=In
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05-23-95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 1
Elevation:
Station:
Cavin :
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 3.3 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth. (*)Indicates slickensided failure.
IL1
Raba-Kistner-Brytest
Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95-055-00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05-23-95
Figure 3
Raba-Kistner-Brytest Consultants, Inc.
ELEVATION /
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD
pc(
MC
%
��
��
a�
•200
%
Du
tat
ROD
%
PP
tsl
—D
%
_
CLAY, dark brown with trace
22
64
28
36
87
4.0
–
: calcareous particles and limestone
•
0
–
:fragments
_
–
—2.5
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some alternating severely
weathered limestone, clay layers and
fossils
r4r4rM
-
-
Wall
-Cored from 0.5' to 5.0' and
recovered 22%
–
— 5
-Cored from 5.0' to 7.5' and
recovered 72%
o
We=
— 7.5
—
-Cored from 7.5' to 10.6' and
recovered 97%
10
festworp
—10
–
BM
M.
-Cored from 10.6' to 15.0' and
recovered 93%
t
IIMMIMIl
_
144
6
45
72
gill
_
— 12.5
LIMESTONE, gray with trace shale
;��
–
layers and fossils
144
6
80
fmorfo
—15
'--�
—17.5
•
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -23 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 2
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Raba -Kist n er -B ryt est
Consultants, Inc.
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -23 -95
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 0.4 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
•
Figure 4
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
L/
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
5011 SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
OD
pal
MC
%
LL
%
e_
Ou
141
ROD
%
—10
_
_
—
—12.5
—15
-
_
—17.5
_ 0
—
_
— 2.5
_
_
— 5
_
-
—7.5
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous particles and limestone
•. fragments
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some alternating severely
weathered limestone, clay layers and
fossils
-Cored from 1.1' to 2.7' and
recovered 100%
-Cored from 2.7' to 4.3' and
recovered 81%
-Cored from 4.3' to 5.7' and
recovered 86%
-Cored from 5.7' to 10.4' and
recovered 89%
LIMESTONE, gray with some shale
l aye rs an trace fossils
-Cored from 10.4' to 15.4' and
recovered 100%
-Cored from 15.4' to 20.0' and
recovered 100%
91
142
120
30
B
13
71
34
37 97
0.7
41
11
2s
0
2B
41
94
03
4.4
, ,
—
— —
;::■
.
:T
FEE
amain
.....•
'-.. i.
.
:. ■:■
p
iii.
ios
.'
rola Et
I AVM
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 ,
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -22 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 3
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Raba- Kistner -B rytest
Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -22 -95
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 0.9 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
Figure 5
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD
/ad
MC
%
LL
%
��
PI -200
% %
au
1st
ROD
%
PP
ttl
—
miva
—20
- --°
—22.5
_25
—27.5
—30
—32.5
—35
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -22 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 3
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 0.9 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
c
Raba -Kistn er -B ryt es t
Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale 2.5
Wate Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -22 -95
Figure 5
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD 00
pcf
MC
%
I d*
�
s,
-200
%
Ou
t.f
ROD
%
ra
D
CLAY, dark brown with trace
95
20
72
32
40
82
1.7
4 5+
_
'
calcareous particles
–
—2.5
:��
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some alternating severely
weathered limestone, clay layers and
o
.:�
ra
:■ ��
_
fossils
_
-Cored from 1.9' to 3.6' and
o
–
recovered 71 %
— 5
MIONIIM
-Cored from 3.6' to 5.7' and
recovered 90%
-Cored from 5.7' to 10.7' and
140
8
.
51
62
�.'.'■
— 7.5
:::n..
recovered 100%
....
1m ml
—10
–
LIMESTONE, gray with some shale
layers and trace fossils
3
—
ref.
7
53
eo
Irma
•
—12.5
= •
–
-Cored from 10.7' to 15.7' and
recovered 100%
—15
wan
–
-Cored from 15.7' to 20.0' and
recovered 95%
58
■
—17.5
,
-
Fla
1
1
1
1
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -22 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
Ltiu kir DUfl111L3
BORING 4
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Raba-Kistner-Brytest
Consultants, Inc.
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 =22 -95
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.6 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth. 20% loss of drilling fluid at 4.1 feet.
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc
Figure 6
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD
peg
w
U.
%
, _ _ _1=
PI -200
% %
0,
Is
500
%
PP
ts1
-
in=
sii=
—20
we=
•
—22.5
—25
—27.5
—30
—32.5
—35
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -22 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 4
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.6 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth. 20% loss of drilling fluid at 4.1 feet.
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc
Figure 6
Li,
Raba - Kistner- Brytest '
Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: -No
Date Checked: 05 -22 -95
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
ANO FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
p
DO
pef
MC
%
LL
%
PL
%
a�
-200
%
Du
eaf
HOD
%
PP
t.l
—10
–
— 12.5
–
— 15
—17.5
—
"'
-
-
— 2.5
–
-
–
— 5
_
— 7.s
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous particles
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some severely weathered
limestone and clay layers
-Cored from 1.5' to 2.2' and
recovered 86%
-Cored from 2.2' to 2.8' and
recovered 67%
-Cored from 2.8' to 4.1' and
recovered 92%
-Cored from 4.1' to 5.7' and
recovered 100%
-Cored from 5.7' to 10.7' and
recovered 100%
-Cored from 10.7' to 15.0' and
100%
LIMESTONE. gray with trace shale
layers and fossils
so
120
142
ze
11
7
77
33
40
3.1
30
70
0
o
0
o
32
Oz
4 5
4041
. . •
.".:.•
71-3
ffft::
•W2
-
:..
r.
:
or21.4
.
�����
FS recovered
i .1
WO
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 .
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 5
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: - NO
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
LA
Raba - Kistner- Brytesi
Consultants, Inc
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.2 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
Figure 7
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD
pal
MC
95
1 de
"
PI -200
% %
oi
`Qe
pp
P1 taf
CLAY, dark brown with trace
89
31
87
30
37 95
1.8
3.8
—
-
'
/
calcareous particles
-
'
I
-
-
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some alternating severely
o
III
—2.5
weathered limestone, clay layers and
o
_
fossils
-
-Cored from 1.9' to 2.5' and
-
recovered 83%
— 5
-Cored from 2.5' to 5.0' and
o
....
-
recovered 80%
— 7.5
-Cored from 5.0' to 10.0' and
-
:::■ .
recovered 94%
iii a
— 10
-Cored from 10.0' to 15.0' and
AVM
-
° .m, •
recovered 100%
LIMESTONE, gray with some shale
i
- 12.5
layers and trace fossils
147
5
60
48
:S'�
—ts
mom
-Cored from 15.0' to 20.0' and
-
recovered 100%
WAS
-
151
5
117
80
—17.5
iii
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 6
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Li
Raba -Kist n e r -B ryt est
Consultants, Inc ,
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.6 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc
Figure 8
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
00
p f
MC
%
I
�
PI .200
% %
Du
1.I
ROD
%
is
—
– --
— 20
-Cored from 20.0' to 25.0' and
92
-
recovered 100%
—22.5
— 25
--
—27.5
—30
—32.5
—35
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
_ i
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 6
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.6 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
IL e
Raba - Kistner- Brptes
Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: -No
Date Checked: 05 - 16 - 95
Figure 8
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
son. SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DO
pct
MC
%
I d'
PI •200
% %
Cu
t :f
—
ROD
%
gs
-
—10
—
—12.5
-
--
—15
—17.5
—
-
-
-
= —2. 5
-
-
-
—5
-
— 7.5
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous particles
LIMESTONE, light tan and light gray
with some - severely weathered
limestone and clay layers
-Cored from 1.4' to 2.2' and
recovered 50%
-Cored from 2.2' to 3.4' and
recovered 58%
-Cored from 3.4' to 5.8' and
recovered 42%
-Cored from 5.8' to 8.8' and
recovered 87%
- Cored from 8.8' to 13.8' and
recovered 100%
LIMESTONE, gray with some shale
layers and trace fossils
-Cored from 13.8' to 18.8' and
recovered 100%
88
122
138
32
14
9
84
27
37 96
1.3
13
28
0
o
o
o
28
58
2.7
.AI
_
:::�'
.....
•
rA
=
ITJ
raw
Immms
Imem
9999m9
F1
ria
ream
ream
E 6
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 7
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.4 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
IL
Raba - Kistner- Bryt
Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Figure 9
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DO
pcf
MC
%
LL
%
ux
l
•200
%
Du
tsf
ROD
%
&�
-
r.....-a. •
-
r.....-.
Z
-Cored from 18.8' to 23.8' and
recovered 100%
70
_
—20
r::'
'47.1 21
— 22.5
. W
MA
–
usf:
-
-Cored from 23.8' to 25.0' and
ee
recovered 100%
–
—25
- - -=
—27.5
—30
—32.5
= —35
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING 7
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry to 1.4 feet and groundwater was not
detected above that depth.
Raba - Kistner- Brytest Consultants, Inc
Raba -K ist n e r -B ryt est
Consultants, Inc.
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Figure 9
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
OD
lad
MC
%
LL
%
PL
%
PI .200
% %
Cu
t•f
600
%
PP
tal
0
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous panicles and limestone
fragments
24
69
33
36 86
4.5,
—.
�i i ri i i i i'i iii ii:i i:i:i iii i�i�i�i iii �i iiii
'i i i:iiii �
:i ii:iii�',:q,:h:iiiiii
SEVERELY WEATHERED LIMESTONE, tan
with some calcium deposits, limestone
fragments and clay layers
2.5
5
—■
LIMESTONE, tan
r
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Dr 05-23-95
Drill Me Continuous
De th t water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P-1
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Job No.: AAA95-055-00
Scale 2.5
Wate Detected: No
Date Checked: 05-23-95
Figure 10
Raba-Kistner-Brytest Consultants, Inc.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
00
00
ocf
MC
%
de
PI .200
% %
Ou
u/
ROD
.%
= 0
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous particles and limestone
33
78
33
43 96
3.0
'I
_
. fragments
—
_
LIMESTONE, tan with some severely
weathered limestone and clay layers
= I
— 2.5
— 5
_
—7.5
—10
— 12.5
—15
—17.5
1
1
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P -2
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Figure 11
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD DD
pc/
MC
%
LL
%
PI .200
% %
Du
ul
ROD
%
&s
0
CLAY, dark brown to brown with trace
calcareous particles
za
ae
•
30
38 87
4.5+
j
SILTY CLAY, brown and tan with some
//
calcium and severely weathered
4.5+
,5
limestone deposits
SEVERELY WEATHERED LIMESTONE, tan
with some limestone fragments and
trace iron stains
a.5+
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P -3
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Figure 12
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
I ox
MC
%
LL
%
l
-200
%
Du
ssl
1 �x
—10
— 12.5
— 15
—17.5
— D
-
—2.5
-
-
—5
—7.5
CLAY, dark brown to brown with trace
calcareous particles and limestone
fragments
SILTY CLAY, brown and tan with some
calcium and severely weathered
limestone deposits
CLAY, yellow -tan and light gray with
trace calcium, severely weathered
limestone deposits, iron stains and
limestone fragments
25
50
25
25
91
4.2
.
3.9
4.5+
r
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 - 16 - 95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
BORING P -4
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Figure 13
ELEVATION/
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description ,
00
ocf
M
I y�
ez
•200
0
ROD
PP
DEPTH
TD
CLAY, dark brown to brown with trace
calcareous particles and limestone
34
64
31
33
95
2.4
_
0°I
fragments
+
/
2.0
— 2.5
-
Agig
—
LIMESTONE, tan
—5
—7.5
_10
—1215
—15
—17.5
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P -5
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Raba - Kistner- Brytest Consultants, Inc
Figure 14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER S
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
p
DD
pcl
MC
%
LL
%
�n
PI .200
% %
GU
1,1
ROD
%
gn
—0
—
SILTY CLAY, brown and tan with some
4.5*
–
—
. calcium and severely weathered
limestone deposits
_
/
CLAY, yellow -tan and light gray with
trace calcium, severely weathered
limestone deposits, iron stains and
12
34
18
18 88
4,5.
-2.5
-
limestone fragments
LIMESTONE, tan
—5
'7
—7.5
—10
— 12.5
—15
—17.5
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P -6
Elevation:
Station:
Cavino:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
Figure 15
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DD
p41
MC
%
LL
%
1 e.
PI •200
% %
Du
tal
,Qs
PP
n/
—7.5
—10
—12.5
—15
—17.5
TO
-
-
-
—2.5
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous particles and limestone
fragments
LIMESTONE, tan with some severely
weathered limestone and clay layers
33
71
31
40 96
3.7
;I
—
.
__
WA ra
mom
Wan
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -16 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P -7
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not defected.
Raba- Kistner- Brytest Consultants, Inc
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -16 -95
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 16 1
1
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
DO
Pet
MC
%
.
Ie
PI •200
% %
Ou
tat
ROD
%
1 g'
'
_p
............................
CLAY, dark brown with trace
calcareous particles
35
76
35
41 95
3.1
CS.
— 2.5
_
CLAY, yellow -tan and light gray with
_
trace calcium, severely weathered
limestone deposits, iron stains and
limestone fragments
3.7
—5
—7.5
—10
—12.5
—15
—17.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -23 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
Lvv yr ovnl,IV J
BORING P - 8
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -23 -95
Figure 17
Raba - Kistner - Brytest Consultants, Inc.
ELEVATION/
DEPTH
SOIL SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
AND FIELD TEST DATA
Material Description
Gd
I
%
% '%
to
ROD
RS
D
SILTY CLAY, brown and tan with some
lies and severely weathered
limestone deposits
12
29
16
13 90
d5.
•
/
•
2.5
a .
LIMESTONE, tan with some severely
weathered limestone and clay layers
...m.
7.5
•
10
12.5
15
17.5
•
Project: OAKMONT CENTER SOUTH
Location: Round Rock, Texas
Date Drilled: 05 -23 -95
Drill Methods: Continuous
Depth to water:
LOG OF BORING
BORING P -9
Elevation:
Station:
Caving:
Note: Boring was advanced dry and groundwater was not detected.
Job No.: AAA95- 055 -00
Scale: 2.5
Water Detected: No
Date Checked: 05 -23 -95
Figure 18
Raba- Kistner- Brytest Consultants, Inc
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I I Symbol Description
1 Strata symbols
CLAY
11
- II WWU2SM LIMESTONE
WAITO
B
1 11
11
,
II Misc. Symbols
,II _A Boring continues
11 11
Soil Samplers
811 0 Undisturbed thin wall
Shelby tube
1 11
11 1 1
1 11
1
11
SEVERELY WEATHERED LIMESTONE
SILTY CLAY
DD = natural dry density (pcf)
LL = Liquid Limit
-200 = percent passing #200 sieve
PR = Percent Recovered ( %)
PP = pocket penetrometer
KEY I JTIVItSULJ
Symbol Description
Rock core
Bulk /Grab sample
Auger
11 11 Notes:
I 1. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and
recommendations in this report.
2. Results of tests conducted on samples recovered are reported
, II on the logs. Abbreviations used are:
MC = natural moisture content
PI = Plasticity Index
Qu = unconfined strength (tsf)
RQD = Rock Quality Designation
TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY, CONDITION, OR TEXTURE
Terms used in this report to describe soils with regard to their
consistency or condition are in general accordance with the discussion
II presented in Article 45 of SOIL MECHANICS IN ENGINEERING PRACTICE,
Terzaghi and Peck, using the most reliable information available from
the field and laboratory observations. Terms used to describe soils
1111 according to their texture and grain size are in accordance with the
UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (USCS).
Figure 19
Figure 20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
SOIL DESIGN VALUES
Oakmont Center South
Round Rock, Texas
RKBCI Project No. AAA95- 055 -00
�
Boring
No.
Effective
P.I.'
Support
Index 2 (C)
Unconfined
Strength 3 psf
P.V.R.
Inches
B -1
38
0.76
4,800
I
1%
B -2
36
0.78
6,000
''4
B -3
37
0.77
6,600
''A
B -4
40
0.74
6,700
y, j
B -5
40
0.74
6,700
y, '
B -6
37
0.77
5,400
y,
B -7
37
0.77
4,000
y
2
3
Reference B.R.A.B. Report No. 33, Page 66
Reference B.R.A.B. Report No. 33, Page 53
Values adjusted for strength reductions due to future moisture increases.
Potential Vertical Rise
Figure 20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1�
1
1
1
1
1
1
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Contract Description:
Work shall include new building, renovations and additions to existing
buildings, and miscellaneous site improvements on Lots 2 and 8, Luther
Peterson Place, Round Rock, Texas.
B. Contractor use of site and premises.
C. Work Sequence.
D. Owner occupancy.
E. Utilities.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of state, city, and Federal laws, codes and
regulations.
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limit activity to areas noted on Drawings. The site is
within the City of Round Rock.
B. Protection: Assume full responsibility for protection of the site within the limits
shown. Protect all adjacent surfaces from damage during construction.
C. Cleaning: Do not unreasonably encumber the site or structure with materials or
equipment. Clean -up site daily. Remove all hazardous materials as soon as
possible, no less than daily. If the contractor wishes to be paid for any materials
off -site, they must be insured to the satisfaction of the Owner.
D. Coordination: Coordinate with Owner and Architect working hours requiring
obstruction of exits; staging, storage and parking areas; protection of occupants
and adjacent materials; and sanitation and utilities use.
1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
01010 - 1
A. Construct work in phases as listed on the drawings to accommodate Owner's
occupancy requirements.
1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The Owner will occupy the existing buildings and site through the construction
period. Schedule the work to accommodate this requirement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01010 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
l
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
SECTION 01020
ALLOWANCES
9(5z,
A. An allowance is an amount proposed by the Owner th will be added to or
deducted from the BASE BID amount for items, material:;, systems, or services
described in the Schedule of Allowances.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate related work as required to ensure work
affected by the Allowance is complete and fully integrated into the Project.
C. Schedule: Coordinate schedule of required services. No:ify owner 36 hours in
advance of providing services.
Include as part of the Allowance any items incidental to or required for a
complete service whether or not mentioned as part of the Allowance.
A. Allow $125,000 under Alternate No. 4 for purchas: and installation of
miscellaneous shop equipment. Work is to be performed by vendor as selected
by the Owner under separate contract.
B. This allowance plus any markup or incidental costs shall he included in the
alternate, not in the base bid. Any adjustments to this amount will be by
authorized change order. Base bid shall include coordinating with this work
same as for other work which would be by the owner under separate contract.
Operations & Maintenance Manual for shop equipment and one year warranty
will be by that vendor, not the responsibility of General Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01020 - 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
SECTION 01030
ALTERNATIVE BIDS
A. An Alternate is an amount proposed by the Bidders and stated on the BID
FORM that will be added to or deducted from the BASE BID amount if the
Owner decides to accept a change in either scope of work or products,
materials, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract
Documents.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate related work and modify the adjacent work as
required to ensure work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and
fully integrated into the Project.
1.2 NOTIFICATION
A. Schedule: Specification sections referenced contain requirements necessary to
achieve the work described.
B. Include as part of each Alternate any items incidental to or required for a
complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit information as applies in the specification section referenced for each
Alternate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
A. The following are not shown in any order of priority or cost.
ALTERNATE NO. 1: ADD HMAC paving in back area of Lot 8, VMF Addition.
Base Bid: Prepare base for paving by others.
01030 - 1
ALTERNATE NO. 2: Provide Pre - Engineered metal building open bay at Small
Engine Repair Building, move expandable frame from column line 4 to 5.
Base Bid: Terminate building at end wall along column line 4 with expandable frame.
ALTERNATE NO. 3: Provide epoxy floor finish in existing Maintenance Shop 116,
including necessary floor preparation. Furnishings, tools and equipment will be
removed and replaced by others.
Base Bid: No work required.
ALTERNATE NO. 4: Provide $125,000 allowance for purchase and installation by
others of miscellaneous shop equipment.
Base Bid: No work required. Coordinate with installation of miscellaneous shop
equipment by others.
END OF SECTION
01030 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
t
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1�
1
1
1
SECTION 01039
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coordination.
B. Submittals.
C. Preconstruction meeting.
D. Site mobilization meeting.
E. Progress meetings.
F. Preinstallation meetings.
G. Equipment electrical characteristics and components.
H. Examination.
I. Preparation
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Project
Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of electrical work indicated on Drawings.
Follow routing shown for conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line
01039 - 1
of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,
for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas, conceal wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of
fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit insurance certificate within 7 days of award.
B. Submit 4 copies of project schedule, major products list, major subcontractors within 7
days of Notice to Proceed.
C. Submit manufacturer's instructions, installation procedures and certificates.
D. Submit record drawings within 21 days of final completion.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Architect/Engineer and Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and contractor's
superintendent.
C. Agenda:
1. Distribution of Contract Documents.
2. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
3. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the
Architect /Engineer.
4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications
for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
5. Scheduling.
6. Scheduling of weekly progress meetings.
7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
8. Owner's requirements.
9. Construction facilities and controls provided to Owner.
10. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
11. Survey and building layout.
12. Security and housekeeping procedures.
13. Requirements for start -up and demonstration of equipment.
14. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
01039-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1.6 SCHEDULES
A. Work shall not begin until all equipment, items, and necessary coordination has been
delivered to site.
1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly
intervals.
B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside
at meetings.
C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with
one copy to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions
made.
1.8 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at
work site prior to commencing work of the section.
13. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific
section.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.
01039 - 3
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with
one copy to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions
made.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01039 - 4
1
1
1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Occupancy by the Owner.
B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Submittals.
C. Individual Product Specification Sections:
1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section.
2. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those
sections.
3. Limitations on cutting structural members.
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities or integrity of sight exposed elements, particularly granite
surfaces.
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
B. Include in request:
1. Identification of Building.
2. Location and description of affected Work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used.
5. Protection of adjacent surfaces anticipated.
6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
7. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.
8. Written permission of affected separate contractor.
9. Date and time work will be executed.
10. Utility disruptions anticipated.
01045 -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.
B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request substitution.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to
damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions and
acknowledgment of adequate protection measures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices
and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.
C. Provide protection adequate for existing surfaces to keep from damage.
3.3 CUTTING
A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.
B. Do not over cut any exposed surfaces to remain. Limit cutting of exposed surfaces to
areas to be covered by new equipment or accessories.
C. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.
D. Remove and replace defective or non - conforming work.
E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
01045 -2
1
1
F. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.
G. Employ competent tradesmen or original installer to perform cutting sight- exposed
surfaces.
H. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed
without prior approval.
3.4 PATCHING
A. Execute patching to complement and match adjacent Work.
B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.
C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
D. Employ competent tradesmen or original installer to perform patching for sight - exposed
surfaces.
E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces.
G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely
seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with code, to full thickness of the
penetrated element.
H. Refinish and or replace surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces,
refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish or replace
entire unit.
END OF SECTION
01045 -
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures.
B. Construction progress schedules.
C. Proposed Products list.
D. Shop Drawings.
E. Product Data.
F. Samples.
G. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
H. Manufacturers' certificates.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports.
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranties, bonds, manufacturers'
certificates, and closeout submittals.
C. All technical sections Divisions 2 through Division 16 for products.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with Owner's standard form or other as approved by Architect.
B. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail
number, and specification section number, as appropriate.
C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
01300 - 1
information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract
Documents.
D. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer at business
address. Coordinate submission of related items.
E. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the
contractor.
F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which
may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
H. Revise and resubmit, identify all changes made since previous submission.
I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly
report any inability to comply with provisions.
J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to
Proceed.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since
previous version.
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying
first work day of each week.
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages
and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late
finish, float dates, and duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product
delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and required by Allowances.
01300 - 2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed
for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name,
model or catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and the number of opaque
reproductions which Contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained by
Architect/Engineer.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for review. After review, produce copies and distribute in
accordance with the SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record
documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
1.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus three copies which will
be retained by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
C. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
D. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and
provide copies for record documents described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
1.8 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing
work.
B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,
textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer selection.
01300 - 3
C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
D. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which
will be retained by Architect/Engineer.
E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual
specification sections.
1.9 MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start -up, adjusting, and finishing, to
Architect/Engineer in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special
environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.10 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer
to Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01300 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance - control of installation.
B. Tolerances
C. References.
D. Mockup.
E. Inspecting and testing laboratory services.
F. Manufacturers' field services and reports.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates.
B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
01400 - 1
1.4 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor tolerance control of installed Products to produce acceptable Work. Do not
permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus
standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid
requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor
those of the Architect/Engineer shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by
mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.6 INSPECTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to
perform inspecting and testing.
B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in
individual specification sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner.
C. Inspecting, testing, and source quality control may occur on or off the project site.
Perform off -site inspecting or testing as required by the Architect/Engineer or the
Owner.
D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect /Engineer, in
duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or
non - compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,
tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.
1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time
for operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests
01400 - 2
required for Contractor's use.
F. Testing or inspecting does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract
requirements.
G. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be
performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer.
Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspecting or testing
charges from the Contract Sum/Price.
1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers
or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,
conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment,
test, adjust and balance of equipment and as applicable, and to initiate instructions when
necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 7 days in advance of required
observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect /Engineer.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers
that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect /Engineer for
information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01400 - 3
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and
sanitary facilities.
B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and
water control.
C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and
temporary buildings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Cost: By Owner; connect to Owner's existing power service. Do not disrupt Owner's
need for continuous service. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to
conserve energy.
B. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing building electrical service. Do not
disrupt Owner's need for continuous service.
C. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required.
D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution
boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required.
E. Provide feeder switch at source distribution equipment.
F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.
1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations.
B. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
01500 - 1
1.5 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for
construction operations.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is
in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project
mobilization.
1.8 FACSIMILE SERVICE
A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service to field office at time of project
mobilization.
1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations.
B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water.
1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures.
1.11 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's
use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from
construction operations and demolition.
B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.12 FENCING
01500 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. Maintain existing fence around construction site.
1.13 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to
protect site from soil erosion.
1.14 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner
occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas,
and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and
sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces:
1.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in
immediate work area to prevent damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.16 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities, and Owner's
operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
1.17 PARKING
01500 - 3
A. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking.
1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and
orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other
closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue
cleaning to eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and
dispose off -site.
1.19 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Office: Weather tight, with Lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating
equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture.
B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
1.20 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial
Completion inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01500 - 4
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Transportation and handling.
C. Storage and protection.
D. Product options.
E. Substitutions.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.
1.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and Products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
B. Store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures.
C. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
D. Provide bonded or insured off -site storage and protection when site does not permit
on -site storage or protection.
01600 - 1
E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product.
F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product
meeting those standards or description as approved by Architect.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers
named and meeting specifications, options or substitutions allowed only as approved by
Architect.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for
Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in
accordance with the following article.
D. Product as selected: Architect to select from manufacturers full range of standard colors
or materials, unless noted otherwise.
E. Equal or Approved Equal: Approval is at the sole discretion of the Architect.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed. Approval of any substitution is at the sole discretion
of the Architect.
B. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault
of the Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
Substitution with Contract Documents.
D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified Product.
01600 - 2
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently
become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with
re- approval by authorities.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing
or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will
require revision to the Contract Documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each
request to one proposed Substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the
proposed Product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or
reject request.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01600 - 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other
authorities.
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Testing and Warranties.
G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning.
1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready
for Architect /Engineer's review.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
1.4 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
B. Clean equipment and adjacent surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
01700 - 1
surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate
to the surface and material being cleaned.
D. Clean site; sweep areas.
E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
F. Replace all air filters and light picture lamps utilized during construction.
1.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; in clean undamaged
condition, record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Do not use permit drawings for Record Documents. Return permit drawings to Owner.
Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark with red erasable pencil and record at each Product section
description of actual Products installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark with red erasable pencil each item
to record actual construction including:
1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
2. Field changes of dimension and detail.
01700 - 2
3. Details not on original Contract drawings.
G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data bound in 8 -1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion
binders with durable plastic covers.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS ", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders
are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically
organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated
plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system
description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and
subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a) Significant design criteria.
b) List of equipment.
c) Parts list for each component.
d) Operating instructions.
e) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended
cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying
detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a) Shop drawings and product data.
b) Air and water balance reports.
c) Certificates.
d) Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy
will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments.
Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection.
01700 - 3
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic
cover.
D. Submit prior to fmal Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated
submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty
period.
1.9 TESTING
A. Provide copies of test results for system.
1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01700 - 4
1
1
1
DIVISION 02:
1 SITE WORK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 PREPARATION
SECTION 02055
DEMOLITION
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Demolish designated construction; disconnect utilities.
B. Remove designated building equipment and fixtures; remove designated
partitions and components.
1..2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structure, safety of adjacent
structures, dust control, service utilities, discovered hazards.
A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
B. Notify adjacent owners of work which may affect their property, potential noise,
utility outage, or disruption. Coordinate with owner.
C. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
D. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors and
noise to permit continued Owner occupancy.
E. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be removed.
3..2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
02055 - 1
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures and
building areas.
B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses.
C. Maintain egress and access at all times. Do not close or obstruct roadways
without permits.
D. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
Notify Architect /Engineer.
3..3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove components in an orderly and careful manner, in sequence
as indicated on Drawings.
B. Protect existing supporting structural members and occupied areas.
3..4 CLEAN UP
A. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses.
B. Leave areas of work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
02055 - 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Site excavation.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control
B. Section 02223 - Backfilling.
1.03 PROTECTION
SECTION 02222
EXCAVATION FOR BUILDINGS
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a
portion of final landscaping
B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from
equipment and vehicular traffic.
C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods
required to prevent cave -in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
E. Excavations greater than 90" deep shall be designed by an Engineer registered in the
State of Texas and meet all requirement of state statutes for trench safety.
F. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including
service utilities and pipe chases
G. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue
affected work in area until notified to resume work.
H. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
I. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run -off into excavation
02222 -1
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for retention systems under provisions of
Section 01300 and prepared under the direction of an Engineer registered in the State
of Texas. No excavations deeper than 5' -0" will be permitted prior to approval of the
retention system drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger
than 3 inches, and debris.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum. Coordinate with Section 01400.
B. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities.
D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required for building foundations, to a minimum of 12" below existing
grade, or to top of the tan limestone whichever is deeper.
B. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation.
C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter.
D. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock
E. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
02222 -2
F Fill over - excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces by filling with concrete in
accordance with direction by Architect/Engineer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave -in or loose soil from falling
into excavation.
B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from
freezing
3.05 SCHEDULE
A. Remove all existing fill material from the site area beneath the building and to 5' 0"
outside the building line, to a minimum depth of 12" below existing grade or to top of
limestone whichever is deeper.
END OF SECTION
02222 -3
SECTION 02223
BACKFILLING FOR BUILDINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building perimeter backfilling to subgrade elevations
B. Fill under slabs -on- grade.
C. Compaction requirements.
D. Site filling to subgrade elevation for parking and landscaping areas.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services: Compaction requirements ofbackfill.
B. Section 02222 - Excavation.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSUASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
B TSDHPT TEX -113 -E Compaction Test.
1.04 TESTS
A Tests and analysis of fill materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D -698
or TEX 113 -E and under provisions of Section 01400.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. Fill to testing laboratory, in air-
tight containers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECT FILL MATERIALS
A. Type A - Structural Fill: Crushed natural stone; with a maximum particle size of 2
inches in nominal diameter.
02223 -1
Sieve Si7P Perrent Passing
3 inch 0
1 3/4 inch 0 - 10%
No. 4 45 - 75%
No. 40 60 - 85%
Maximum Liquid Limit of 40 and Maximum Plasticity Index of 15.
2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Imported or reused from site; free of rocks larger than 3 inch size, and debris,
P.I. < 15.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify stockpiled fill to be reused is approved.
B. Verify foundation or basement walls are braced to support surcharge forces imposed
by backfilling operations
C. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and ground surfaces
are not frozen
3.02 PREPARATION
A. When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density requirements for backfill
material.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in -situ compaction. Backfill with
subsoil and compact to density equal to requirements forsubsequent backfill material.
3.03 BACKFILLING
A Backfill areas to contours and elevations. Use unfrozen materials
B Backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural
settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches
loose depth.
02223 -2
D. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches
loose depth
E. Employ a placement method so not to disturb or damage foundation dampproofing.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials, within 2% to attain required
compaction density.
G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Backfill simultaneously on each side of
unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.
H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet unless noted otherwise.
I. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
J. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
K. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials
3.04 TOLERANCES
A Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698 and under
provisions of Section 01400.
B. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and
retest at no cost to Owner
3.06 SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS
A. The paragraphs below identify location, fill material to be used (identified from lower
to upper fill type), compacted thickness of each level, and compaction expressed as a
percentage of maximum density and optimum moisture in comparison with
ANSI/ASTM D698.
B. Interior Slab -On- Grade.
1) Common fill up to 24 inches below the bottom of the slab, compacted to 95 percent.
02223 -3
2) Type A Structural fill, 12 inches thick minimum compacted to 95 percent.
END OF SECTION
02223 -4
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 02250
COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING
A. Materials, labor, and equipment necessary to provide compaction of existing or
imported soils.
B. Areas included: building foundations and slabs.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation (TSDHPT) Test
Method TEX -113 -E
B. TSDHPT Test Method TEX -I 14 -E
C. ANSI/ASTM D698
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Laboratory shall submit 3 copies of Moisture/Density Curves for each soil
type.
B. Testing Laboratory shall submit 3 copies of Field Density Reports for each test
performed.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A Testing Laboratory shall be allowed to secure necessary samples of proposed soil
types for testing to insure conformance to specification requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for
each area classification indicated below Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as
directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction.
02250 - 1
3.02 Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with applicable procedures.
A Building pad subgrade; compact upper 6 inches to 95% maximum dry density at
±2% optimum moisture as defined by ASTM D698.
B. Select fill under building slab and foundation: compact to 95% maximum density at
±2% optimum moisture as defined by ASTM D698.
3.03 Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned
before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material.
Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on
surface during or subsequent to compaction operations
3.04 Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density
3.05 Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is
reduced to a satisfactory value.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction. Allow testing service to inspect and
approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is
performed.
B. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D698 and TDH TEX- 113 -E,
as applicable.
C. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both
density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material
encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect.
D. Paved Areas and Building Slab Fill: Perform at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer
than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for
every 2,000 sq ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer
than three tests.
E. Foundation Wall Backtill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and
elevations as directed.
02250 - 2
3.07 If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills
that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and test-
ing until specified density is obtained.
END OF SECTION
02250 - 3
DIVISION 03:
CONCRETE
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
B. Openings for other affected work.
C Form accessories.
D. Stripping forms
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication: Metal fabrications attached to formwork.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
B. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
C PS 1 - Constructon and Industrial Plywood.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to meet design and
code requirements, so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines, and
dimensions
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301.
03100 -1
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for Round Rock,Texas.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, and arrangement ofjoints and ties.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Deliver form materials in manufacturer's packaging with installation instructions.
C. Store off ground in ventilated and protected area to prevent deterioration from
moisture or damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one exterior side grade; sound, undamaged sheets
with straight edges.
B. Lumber: SYP species; #2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
C. Pan Type Steel type• removable; of size and profile required.
2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap -off metal of fixed length; cone type; 1 inch break back dimension; free
of defects that will leave holes no larger than one inch diameter in concrete surface.
B Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture,
or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on
concrete
C. Fillets for Chamfered Comers: Wood strips type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum
possible lengths.
03100 -2
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages' Sized as required; of strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with formwork.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Hand -trim sides and bottoms of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing
concrete.
B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling, stripping, so that concrete is
not damaged during its removal.
C. Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores, where required
to remain in place.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork Strengthen formwork liable to be
overstressed by construction loads.
B. Camber slabs and beams to achieve ACI 301 tolerances
C. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate
openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain Close ports with tight
fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be ap-
parent in exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of all exposed concrete.
E. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances in accordance with ACI 301.
3.04 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT
A Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturers instructions
Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive
special finishes or applied coverings which may be affected by agent. Soak contact
03100 -3
surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing con-
crete.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through
concrete.
B. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses,
chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
C. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb.
Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.06 FORM REMOVAL
A. Notify Architect/Engineer prior to removing formwork.
B. Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal.
C. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete
surface coloration.
D. Do not remove forms and shoring until concrete has sufficient strength to support its
own weight, and construction and design loads which may be imposed upon it.
Remove load supporting forms when concrete has attained 75 percent of required 28
day compressive strength, provided construction is reshored
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds.
B. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean - outports.
C. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from forms. Do not use de -icing salts. Do
not use water to clean out completed forms, unless formwork and construction
proceed within heated enclosure Use compressed air to remove foreign matter.
END OF SECTION
03100 -4
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Reinforcing steel bars, for cast -in -place concrete.
B. Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, and spacers, for supporting reinforcement.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete placement and vapor barrier.
1.03 REFERENCES
A ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
B. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
D. ANSI/AWS D1 4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel.
E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
F. CRSI - Manual of Practice
G CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars
H. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and
Nomenclature.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice, and Documents 63 and 65.
B. Conform to ACI 301
03200 -1
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A Provide reinforcement for field sample specified in Sections 03100 and 03300.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and
cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices.
1.07 CERTIFICATES
A. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and
chemical analysis.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A Reinforcing Steel. ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billet -steel deformed bars, uncoated
finish.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type, or acceptable patented system.
B. Metal Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and
support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete including load
bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. Supports to be spaced a
maximum of 4' -0" on center each way. All supports shall be metal with sand plates.
2.03 FABRICATION
A Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315, providing concrete cover specified in Section
03300.
B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress.
Indicate location of splices on shop drawings.
03200 -2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings.
B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from
alignment or measurement.
C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03300.
END OF SECTION
03200 -3
PARTI GENERAL
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Cast -in -place concrete foundation footings
B. Floors and slabs on fill on vapor barrier.
C. Concrete fill in Reinforced Unit Masonry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
C. Section 03346 - Concrete Curing
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
C ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete
D. ASTM C I50 - Portland Cement.
E. ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
F. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perfonn work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work.
03300 -1
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for RoundRock, Texas.
1.06 FIELD SAMPLES
A Cast field sample in formwork specified in Section 03100 under provisions of Section
01300.
B. Use specified concrete.
C. Obtain acceptance of surface finish.
D. Maintain sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work. Remove when
directed.
• 1.07 TESTS
A Testing and analysis of concrete will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review
prior to commencement of work.
C. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in
accordance with ACI 301.
D. Tests of cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with
requirements stated herein
E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu. yds of each class of
concrete placed each day.
F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under
same conditions as concrete it represents.
G One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
1.08 PRODUCT DATA
A Submit product data under provisions Section 01300.
B. Provide product data for specified products.
03300 -2
C Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement. ASTM C150, normal - Type I Portland type; grey color.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C Water. Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02 ADMIXTURES
A Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
B. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A - water reducing.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
2.04 CONCRETE 11ILX
C.
D
Non -shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement,
water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive
strength of 5000 psi in 28 days
A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Provide concrete of the following characteristics:
1. Comprehensive Strength (28 days) -
2 Slump
Provide a minimum
water cement ratio
concrete.
Use accelerating
Architect/Engineer.
requirements
3000 psi
Slabs 5"
All others 4"
of 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete, with a maximum
of 0.58 for non- air- entrained concrete and 0 46 for air - entrained
admixtures in cold weather only when approved by
Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement
03300 -3
E. Use set - retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by
Architect/Engineer.
F. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work subject to freeze -thaw
cycling
G. No water shall be added to concrete at the site without consent of the testing lab.
H. The use of Fly Ash is not permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding
agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. At locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing
concrete, insert steel dowels, and set with Hilti C100 Adhesive or approved equal.
C. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on fill. Lap joints minimum 6 inches tape and
seal. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete. Repair damaged
vapor barrier
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 36 hours prior to commencement of concreting
operations.
B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
C Hot Weather Placement: AC1 305.
D. Cold Weather Placement. ACI 306.
E Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
03300 -4
F. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows -
Walls (Exposed to.Weather or Backfill)
Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth
Slabs on Fill
2 inch
3 inch
1 1/2 inch
G. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints.
Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
H. Place floor slabs on fill in checkerboard pattem.
1 Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify
Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
3.04 FINISHING
A. Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed %with smooth rubbed finish
B Provide Class A tolerances to floor slabs according to ACI 301.
C. Pitch to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal, or as shown on plans.
3.05 PATCHING
A Notify Architect/Engineer immediately upon removal of forms.
B. Patch imperfections.
3.06 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A Modi or replace concrete not conforming to required levels and lines, details, and
elevations.
B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed or not of the specified type and/or
compressive strength, at no expense to owner.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken
03300 -5
3.08 PROTECTION
A Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot
or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for
period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
END OF SECTION
03300 -6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
'1
SECTION 03346
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Finish separate floor toppings slabs on fill Under provisions of Section monolithic floor slab
B. Concrete hardener. Sealer. Slip resistant coating
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Prepared concrete surfaces ready for finishing.
B. Section 03370 - Concrete Curing
1.03 REFERENCES
A ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
13. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Applicator. Company specializing in concrete floor surface finishing with 3 years experience
and approved by compound hardener coating manufacturer.
B. Furnish concrete hardener sealer slip- resistant coating and curing compound in manufacturer's
packaging with application instructions.
C. Ensure that products are compatible with epoxy floor coatings or other finishes as scheduled
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A Provide field sample under provisions of Section 01300.
B Prepare trial finish in area designated by Architect/Engineer.
03396 -1
1.06 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide product data for specified products.
C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Master Builders.
B. Gifford -Hill.
C. Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309; clear.
B. Bonding Agent Two component modified epoxy resin
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable for application of this work.
B. Ensure floor surfaces are depressed to accommodate finish materials.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent prior to application of finish in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
03346 -2
�
�
K�z�~
DIVISION -~^~`~^ ` ~ ^^
MASONRY
SECTION 04100
MORTAR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Mortar for unit masonry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing laboratory services.
B. Section 04340 - Reinforced Masonry System.
1.03 REFERENCES
A ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes
B. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement
C. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete.
D ASTM C 144 - Aegre for Masonry Mortar.
E ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
F ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
G ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete.
I ASTM C476 - Grout for Reinforced and Non - reinforced Masonry.
J ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and •
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
K. International Masonry Industry All - Weather Council (IbIIAC) - Recommended
Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction
1.04 MLY TESTS
09100 -1
A. Test mortar mix cubes under provisions of Section 01400.
B Test grout mix cylinders under provisions of Section 01400.
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include design mix, environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F (10
degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B Cold Weather Requirements. aUAC - Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.02 MATERIALS
A Portland Cement: ASTM C150, normal -Type I; gray color
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C9S, for general use.
C Mortar Aggregate: ASTM CI44, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against
dampness, freezing, and foreicn matter.
D. Grout Course Aggregate Maximum 3/8 inch size.
E Grout Fine Aggregate: sand,
F. Hydrated Lime ASTM C207, Type S.
G Quicklime: ASTM C5, non - hydraulic type.
H Premix Mortar. ASTM C387, using gray cement
1. Water Clean and potable.
04100 -2
1
1
�1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.03 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete Do not use grate tampers or mesh rollers. Do
not spread concrete by vibration.
C. Steel trowel surfaces to receive carpeting resilient flooring.
D. Steel trowel surfaces which will be left exposed.
3.04 TOLERANCES.
A. Maintain surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet
B. In areas of floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and slope surface uniformly to drains at 1/8
inch per foot or as indicated.
3.05 CURING
A Cure finish floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Apply curing compound on finished floor surfaces. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions
3.06 TREATMENT
A. Apply sealer on floor surfaces where concrete will be left exposed Apply in accordance with
manufacturer's instruction
END OF SECTION
03346 -3
1
1
11
1
1
1
1
2.05 MIXES
A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M.
B. Mortar for Non -load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S.
C. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C476, Type PM
D. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate
or calcium stearate per cement weight.
E. Mortar shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi under field conditions and as
installed in the Work.
2.06 GROUT FILL
A. Bond Beams and Lintels: Type and strength specified in Section 03300 with a slump of'
6 inches
B. Engineered Masonry. 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 6 inches slump; premixed type in
accordance with ASTM C94 as specified in Section 03300.
2.07 MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in
accordance with ASTM C270
B. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout.
C. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper within two hours of mixing. Do not retemper
mortar after two hours of mixing
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LNSTALLATION
A. After inspection of concrete grout spaces by Architect/Engineer, plug cleanout holes
with masonry units Brace against wet grout pressure.
B. Install mortar and grout in accordance with 04340.
C. Work grout into cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
09100 -3
D. Do not displace reinforcing steel when placing grout.
E. Clean concrete grout spaces of excess mortar and debris.
END OF SECTION
04100 -4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
04300 - 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing laboratory services.
B. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and grout.
C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking: Wood plates anchored to CMU walls.
D. Section 07200 - Insulation.
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing of CMU.
1.3 REFERENCES
ANSI /ASTM AS2 - Cold -Drawn Steel.Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
D. ASTM E447, Method B - Prism test for Masonry Walls.
E. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
F. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
Ad11,„d.r,,,1,
B. Submit product data for concrete masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum
five years experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL Assembly No. U905 requirements for fire rated masonry construction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to.
during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. When ambient temperature falls below 50 degrees F, conform to IMIAC - Recommended
Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
4t A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM€99, &rade -? . Type'+- Moisture Controlled;) „, le
.n I w e i ht
B. Masonry Units: Nominal modular face size of 8” x 16 ". Provide special units for 90
degree corners, bond beams. and lintels.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Featherlite; Jewel Concrete.
C. Accessories: Duro -Wall; Hohmann & Barnard. Inc.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; hot dip galvanized after fabrication
cold -drawn steel conforming to ANSI /ASTM A82, No. 9 gauge side rods with No. 9
gauge cross ties spaced 16 inches on center.
04300 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 to 60 75 ksi, deformed billet bars, unprotected finish.
C. Strap Anchors: Adjustable Dw- 10X, steel shape, size as indicated, galvanized to ASTM
Al23 G90.
D. Wall Ties: Galvanized box wall type with cavity drip.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Provide with corner and tee accessories,
cement fused joints.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell foam rubber oversized 50 percent to joint width: self - expanding.
C. Building Paper: 30 lb asphalt saturated felt.
D. Weep Holes: Preformed plastic tubes at 32" o.c. maximum.
E. Cleaning Solutions: Non - acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
F. Loose Fill Insulation: Molded expanded perlite; fiill cavities to full height of wall at
units wider than 6" nom. at exterior walls or between conditioned and non - conditioned
spaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built -in items are in proper location. and ready for roughing into masonry
work.
D. Verify masonry units shown on the drawings as insulated with foam inserts have been
properly installed.
E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
04300. - 3
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.3 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of
uniform thickness.
C. Lay concrete masonry units in bond shown or if not shown in running bond. Course one
unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form joints as detailed or if not detailed,
form concave joints.
3.4 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay hollow masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells, and all webs.
B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.
D. Lock intersections and external corners.
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools•to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint
as indicated.
3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first joint below top of walls.
04300 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side
of openings.
3.6 LINTELS
A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings.
B. Use single piece reinforcing bars only.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch
of dimensioned position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
E. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
F. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
� 3.7 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam as indicated.
B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within ' inch
of dimensioned position. _
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 8 inches either side
of opening.
F. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement.
G. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting
techniques. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with coarse grout using high or
low lift grouting techniques.
i
H. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1 - 1/2 inch below top
of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement.
I. Low Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of 16 inches and rod for grout
consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
1
04300 - 5
1
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
D. Provide control joints above all doors and below all windows. Align with jambs unless
otherwise drawn.
3.9 BUILT -IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build in metal door frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other items
furnished by other Sections.
B. Build in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with
grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 8 inches from framed openings.
D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for pipes conduit, sleeves, grounds and other items. Coordinate with other
Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to cutting or fining masonry work not
indicated, or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.12 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
04300 - 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external
corners which may be damaged by construction activities.
C. Refer to Section 09900 for schedule for finishing concrete masonry units.
END OF SECTION
04300 - 7
SECTION 04340
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Concrete Masonry units.
B. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories.
C. Parged masonry surfaces
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Steel anchors for concrete roof planks.
B Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.
C Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Fabricated steel items.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400 - Testing and Laboratory Services Testing laboratory services.
B. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and grout.
C Section 07900 - Caulking: Rod and sealant at control joints.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
C ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick.
• 15. A TM,C`90 - Hollow Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
E. ASTM C145 - Solid Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
F. ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick
04340 -1
1
1
G. AWS D12.1 - Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. 1
H. International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council (IMIAC) - Recommended
Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel bending and
cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.
C. Plan of control joint placing. ,
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300
1.06 CERTIFICATES 1
A. Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of Section 01300. ,
B. Submit manufacturers certificate that materials meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Specifications for 1
Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
PART2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 ACCEPTABLE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT MANUFACTURERS
A. Featherlite.
B Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 1
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -t� Mon to l 1 17
.,U Mon i lt),s l o 4,16 C. Vq j .
A. Hollow Load Bearing Units ASTM C90, Grade N, Type4I- stander€1- weight.
B. Masonry Units. Modular sized to 8 x 8 x 16 inch; provide special units for 90 degree '
comers, bond beams, lintels
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES 1
1
04340 -2
A. Composite Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type, 2 wire, plain steel construction; No. 9
side rods as manufactured by Dur -O -Wall.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; plain
finish
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Preformed rubber or neoprene material.
B. Joint Filler. Closed cell polyurethane oversized 50 percent; self expanding
C. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt.
D. Nailing Strips' Western softwood, preservative treated, sized to masonry joints.
2.05 LINTELS
' A As Scheduled,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A Supply metal anchors to Section 05500 for placement Direct correct placement.
B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance
D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of' masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing
3.02 COURSL\G
A Place masonry to lines and levels indicated.
B Maintain masonry courses to uniform width Make vertical and horizontal joints equal
and of uniform thickness
C Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one block unit and one mortar
joint to equal 8 inches Form raked motarjoints
• 04340 -3
3.03 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering comers
ofjoints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners.
C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace
Remove excess mortar.
E. Perform jobsite cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take
care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges.
3.04 RErNFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend 24 inches minimum each side of opening.
C Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
D Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend 24 inches minimum each side
of opening
3.05 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315
B Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress. Review location of splices with
.Architect/Engineer
C. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D12.1.
D. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement Maintain position
within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of true dimension
E Verify reinforcement is clean, free of scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings which would
reduce bond to grout
F All load bearing and exterior CAN Walls to be reinforced with (1) #4 Vertical at 48"
04340 -4
o /c.
G All CMU Walls to be reinforced with (3) vertical bars at corners, (4) vertical bars at
intersections, (2) vertical bars at wall ends, and (2) vertical bars at each side of each
opening, control joint or expansion joint.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch (1.5 mm) maximum.
B Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/8 inch in 10 feet and 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
C Variation from Plumb. 1/8 inch per story non - cumulative; 1/4 inch two stories or more
D. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 1/2 inch
maximum
E. Variation ofJoint Thickness. 1/8 inch in 3 feet
F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
3.10 CONTROL JOLNTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across control joints .
B Install resilient control joint in continuous lengths Heat weld butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions
C. Size joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
D Control joints shall be constructed 10' -0" from all corners, spaced at a maximum of 25'-
0" o c , at one end of lintels over openings less than 4' -0" wide, at both ends of lintels
over openings greater than 4' -0" wide, at changes in wall thickness, at all chases and
built in piping, and at locations noted on the plans and approved by the Architect.
3.11 BUILT - IN WORK
A As work progresses, build -in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, window
frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the work supplied by other
Sections
04340 -5
B. Build -in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and Blazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with mortar. Fill masonry cores with erout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D Do not build -in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.12 CUTTING AND Fi l 11NG
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds Cooperate with other
Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance
or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.14 CLEANING
A Remove excess mortar and smears
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work
C Clean soiled surfaces with a non - acidic solution which will not harm masonry or
adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
D. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
B Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by
construction activities
C. Provide protection without damaging completed work.
D At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration
END OF SECTION
04340 -6
DIVISION 05:
METALS
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A Furnish metal fabrications to be cast in concrete to Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place
Concrete.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural anchor bolts
B. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 - Hot - Dipped, Zinc- coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
C. ASTM A307 - Low- Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.
D. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
E ASTM A386 - Zinc - Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
F ASTM A500 - Cold- formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes
G. ASTM A501 - Hot - formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
H. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A Submit shop draw•ins under provisions of Section 01300.
05500 -I
B. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type
of fasteners, and accessories.
C. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36
B. Steel Tubing. ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers. ASTM A307.
D. Welding Materials AWS DI 1; type required for materials being welded.
E. Primer: Tnemec 10 -99
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured
C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
D Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed
edges to small uniform radius.
E Exposed Mechanical Fasteninv,s. Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located, consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise.
F. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline.
G. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage
and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
05500 -2
2.03 FINISH
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing in accordance
with SSPC -SP2 Cleaning Requirements
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is
required.
C. Prime paint items scheduled with two coats, minimum of 4 mil. wet thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not
scheduled.
B Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled.
C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
D. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates, to appropriate
Sections
3.02 INSTALLATION
A Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects
B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C. After installation, touch - up field welds, scratched or damaged surfaces with primer.
END OF SECTION
05500 -;
DIVISION 06:
WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06112
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Structural floor, wall and roof framing.
B. Built -up structural beams and columns.
C. Wall and roof sheathing.
D. Subfloor sheathing and overlay.
E. Preservative treatment of wood.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Setting anchors in concrete.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrictions: Prefabricated steel structural supports.
C Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards
B. ANSI A135 4 - Basic Hardwood
C. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard
D APA - American Plywood Association.
E AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association: Book of Standards.
F. FS - TT -W -571 - Wood Preservation. Treating Practices.
G, NFPA - National Forest Products Association
06112 -1
H NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
I. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
J. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant size and type of fasteners requirements.
B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01620.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules. SPIB, NLGA, NFPA.
B. Beam Framing SYP species, #1 grade, 15 percent maximum moisture content.
C Joist Framing. SYP species, #2 grade, 15 percent maximum moisture content.
D. Rafter Framing. SYP species, #2 grade, 15 percent maximum moisture content.
E. Studding SPF species, #2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content
2.02 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A. Roof Sheathing APA Structural I, Grade C -D; Exterior, sanded.
B. Wall Sheathing. APA Structural I, Grade C -D; Exterior, sanded.
06112 -2
C. Floor Sheathing: APA Structural I, Grade C -D; Exterior; sanded, T R G.
2.03 PARTICLEBOARD MATERIALS
A. Roof Sheathing. ANSI A208 1; wood chips shavings flakes set with
binder, APA Structural I, Exterior grade; sanded faces
B. Wall Sheathing: ANSI A208.1; wood chips shavings flakes set with
binder, APA Structural I, Exterior grade; sanded faces, T & G.
C Floor Sheathing: ANSI A208 l; wood chips shavings flakes set with
binder; APA Structural I, Exterior grade; sanded faces. •
2.07 ACCESSORIES
waterproof resin
waterproof resin
waterproof resin
A Fasteners: ElectroHot- dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated
wood locations; plain finish elsewhere; size and type to suit condition.
B. Joist Hangers: Galvanized steel, sized to suit joists and framing conditions; manufactured
by Simpson Strong Tie Co
C. Sill Gasket 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell polyethylene foam from continuous
rolls.
D. Sill Flashing 6 mil thick, clear polyethylene sheet
E. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed.
F Building Paper. No. 15 asphalt felt Plain untreated cellulosic building paper.
2.08 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative Pressure Treatment: FS TT -W -571 AWPA Treatment
waterborne preservative with 0 30 percent retainage.
B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application) Clear Type
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.0] SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
06112 - 3
C2 using
A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials roofing and related metal flashings
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Treat site -sawn ends.
D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.02 FRAMING
A Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
B. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side -up.
C. Construct framing members full length without splices.
D. Double members at openings over one so ft. Space short studs over and under opening
to stud spacing.
E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Frame rigidly into joists.
F Construct double joists under wall studding
G Bridge joists framing in cecess of 8 feet span an mid -span members or at 8' -0" o.c.
whichever is shorter Fit solid blocking bridge at ends of members.
I-I. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations.
Lap flashing joint 6 inches .
I Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing & cementitious foundation. Puncture gasket clean
and fit tight to protruding foundation anchor bolts.
J Coordinate installation of wood decking wood chord metal joists glue laminated structural
units prefabricated wood trusses plywood web joists.
3.03 SHEATHING
A Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered. Secure
sheet edges over firm bearing Provide solid edge blocking between sheets.
06112 -4
C. Transport and store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.
D. Protect trusses from moisture, warpage, and distortion during transit and when
stored.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Trussway Central, Inc., Georgetown, Texas
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, SPIB, NLGA WCLIB, WWPA.
B. Steel Connectors: ANSI/ASTM A446 steel, Grade A; galvanized; die stamped
with integral teeth; minimum of 15 square inches in size. Sized for 125% of
member forces.
D. Steel Connectors: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel.
E Fasteners: Galvanized for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations;
plain finish elsewhere, size and type to suit condition.
F. Bearing Plate Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to
concrete Bolts or ballistic fasteners for anchorages to steel and concrete.
G Wood Blocking: Plating: Framing for Openings: Li accordance with Section
06114.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication
B. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight joint connections.
C. Jig trusses during fabrication to assure accurate configuration. Press connectors
into lumber, both sides of joint simultaneously with opening between wood and
plate less than 1/32 ".
D. Build camber into tniss
06193 - 3
E. Joints shall be acceptable if the average opening between ends of members
immediately after fabrication is Tess than 1/16 inch, except the truss compression
chord joints at splices and ridges shall have full contact between members.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing support items.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at a spacing
indicated on plans.
B. Place trusses true to line and level.
C Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured.
D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in
correct position before inducing loads
E. Do not field cut trusses.
F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required.
G Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06114.
H. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members 1/4 inch maximum from true position
END OF SECTION
06193 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION 06410
FINISH CARPENTRY
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated cabinet units
B. Countertops.
C. Cabinet hardware.
D. Preparation for site finishing
E. Preparation for installing utilities.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing.
B. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior.
C. Division 15 - Plumbing: Utilities and fixtures.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI /BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
B. AWI - Quality Standards.
C. FS MM -L -736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
D. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact.
E. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative
Laminates.
F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
06410 - 1
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly
methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and
schedule of finishes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Custom quality.
B. Submit samples of plastic laminates and veneer plywood.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough -in.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer
lumber; species and thickness cut as follows:
ITEM
Backs and items
concealed from view.
B. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer;
face veneer and thickness as follows:
ITEM
Door and Drawer Fronts
Drawer Construction
Shelving
All exposed faces to be rotary-cut red oak.
FACE SPECIES
Fir
THICKNESS
1/4 inch
FACE SPECIES THICKNESS
Stain Grade Red Oak 3/4 inch
Stain Grade Red Oak 3/4 inch
Paint Grade Red Oak 3/4 inch
06410 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.2 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. WilsonArt.
B. Formica.
C. Nevamar.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.3 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: AWI, 0.050 inch General Purpose quality; color, pattern, and
surface texture as selected.
B. Laminate Backing Sheet: LD3 BK20 backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; dull
chrome (US26D) finish in exposed Locations.
D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.7 HARDWARE
A. Shelf Standards: KV #233 metal standards.
B. Shelf Supports: KV #256R, for adjustable shelves inside cabinets.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: US26D finish bent wire, or selected by the Architect. (Satin
Chrome - OK)
D. Drawer Slides: Grant #335, roller type.
E. Hinges: Stanley #335.
F. Locks: Best Model #1E7E4; key to owner's standard system.
2.8 FABRICATION
06410 - 3
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use
one piece for full length only.
C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish.
D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; reveal overlay style.
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
F. Apply plastic laminate finish to countertops in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
Slightly bevel arises. Provide 4" rolled back splash unless otherwise drawn.
G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and
fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of
cut edges.
2.9 FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. Seal internal surfaces, edges and backs of cabinets with two coats shellac. Brush apply
only.
D. Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level.
06410 - 4
B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops.
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch.
Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of
species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
G. Caulk all joints where laminate backsplashes meet adjacent surfaces.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures, leaving exposed
cabinet wood ready for finish.
END OF SECTION
06410 - 5
DIVISION 07:
THERMAL AND
MOISTURE PROTECTION
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Spray -on cellulose insulation at underside of existing metal roof.
B. Board thermal insulation and adhesive vapor barrier at interior and exterior wall
behind wall finish.
C. See Section 13121 Pre - Engineered Buildings for insulation of metal wall
and roof systems.
1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
A. System performance to provide continuity of thermal and vapor barrier at
building enclosure.
1..3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2..1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Spray -On Cellulose Insulation: K -13 manufactured by international Cellulose
Corp., conforming to the following:
Thermal Resistance R of 7
Thickness +/- 2 inch
B. Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C578, extruded cellular type, conforming to the
following:
Thermal Resistance R of 11
Thicicness 2 inch
C. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, preformed glass fiber batt and roll, friction fit;
07210 - 1
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 EXAMINATION
conforming to the following:
Thermal Resistance R values as indicated on drawings
Batt or Roll Size To fit between studs or ceiling tiles as applicable
Facing
Faced on one side with asphalt treated Kraft paper where
concealed in wall construction. Unfaced side up where
exposed on suspended ceilings. FSK faced on walls
where not concealed in construction.
2..2 ADHESIVES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
2..3 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Polyethylene self - adhering type, mesh reinforced.
B. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip of galvanized steel, mechanically fastened.
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready
to receive insulation.
3..2 INSTALLATION - SPRAY -ON CELLULOSE INSULATION
A. Ensure that metal surface to be sprayed will accept adhesion of insulation.
B. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's specifications by licensed applicator.
3..3 INSTALLATION - BOARD INSULATION
A. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads per board length, 1/8 inch thick.
B. Install boards on wall surface progressively with metal Zee furring. Place skin
surface of insulation against adhesive.
C. Butt edges and ends tight to metal zee and adjacent board and to protrusions.
D. Place strip of polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive
07210 - 2
3..4 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids.
C. Fit insulation tight in spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.
D. Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces.
Attach flanges of facing to framing members.
E. Retain insulation in place with spindle fasteners where not firmly sandwiched
within cavity wall space.
3..6 SCHEDULES
•
vapor and air barrier bed.to window and door frame., Tape seal in place to
ensure continuity'of'vapor and air barrier.
A. Board Insulation on CMU: Extruded polystyrene, bead adhesive and zee furring
application, 2 inch thick.
B. Attic Insulation: R19 batt, unfaced side exposed.
C. Stud Wall Insulation: R13 roll, faced.
END OF SECTION
07210 - 3
I - r8.n I
AAA Sho— Rocki,;5
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Placement of joint fillers, backing, and sealants.
1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System performance to achieve moisture and air tight joint seals.
1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute - Sealant
and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Perform Work in accordance with sealant manufacturers requirements for
preparation of surfaces and materials installation instructions.
C. Provide warranties for all sealants used.
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics,
performance criteria, limitations, color availability, and backer rod sample, and
surface preparation instructions.
1..4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer
during and after installation.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2..1 MANUFACTURERS
A. A specific product or material manufactured by any of the following
07900 - 1
2..2 SEALANTS
manufacturers is "acceptable" (or "approved "), only if the specific product or
material can evidence exact compliance with the contract documents.
1. Dow Corning
2. GE
3. Pecora
4. Sonneborn
5. Tremco
6. 3M
7. US Gypsum.
A. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non - staining, non - bleeding,
non - sagging, capable of continuous water immersion; color as selected by
Architect manufactured.
Elongation Capability 7.5 to 12 percent
Service Temperature Range -13 to 180 degrees F
Shore A Hardness Range 25 to 50
Tensile Strength 60 psi
Curing Time 14 to 21 days
B. Butyl Sealant: Single component, solvent release, non - skinning, non - sagging;
black color.
Elongation Capability 7 to 10 percent
Service Temperature Range -13 to 180 degrees F
Shore A Hardness Range 10 to 15
Tensile Strength 20 psi
C. Polysulphide Sealant: Two components homogeneous mix, chemical curing,
non - staining, non - bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion,
non - sagging self - levelling type; color as selected by Architect.
Elongation Capability 25 percent
Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F
Shore A Hardness Range 40 to 55
Tensile Strength 500 psi
Curing Time 3 to 6 days
D. Polyurethane Sealant: Multi- component, chemical curing, non - staining,
non - bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non - sagging self - levelling
type; color as selected by Architect.
Elongation Capability 25 percent
07900 - 2
Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F
Shore A Hardness Range 40 to 50
Maximum Joint Width 1 1/2"
Tensile Strength 400 psi
E. Silicone Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non - sagging, non - staining,
fungus resistant non - bleeding; color as selected by Architect.
Elongation Capability 25 percent
Service Temperature Range -65 to 180 degrees F
Shore A Hardness Range 40 to 50
Maximum Joint Width 1"
F. Silicone Construction Sealant: ASTM C -920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
nono - staining, nono - bleeding, custyom color as selected by Architect. Sealant
shall be capable of experiencing extreme movement from +100 to -50 percent
of original joint width.
2..2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non- corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod;
oversized 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
to suit application.
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work, and that joint
measurements and surface conditions are as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which may impair adhesion of
sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
07900 -3
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and
C790 for latex base sealants.
3..2 INSTALLATION
A. Clean and prime seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and
C790 for latex base sealants.
C. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth
ratios.
E. Install joint backing to achieve a neck thickness dimension no greater than 1/3
the joint width.
F. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H. Tool joints concave.
3..3 SCHEDULE
LOCATION TYPE COLOR
A. Window perimeter Polysulphide, as selected
single component
B. Building Exterior Polyurethane, as selected
multi- component
C. Door Frame /Walls Acrylic (UNO), as selected
Solvent Cure
D. Under Thresholds Butyl Black
E. Bathtub /Ceramic Silicone, Fungus White
Tile (other wet areas) Resistant
END OF SECTION
07900 - 4
DIVISION 08:
DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non - rated, fire rated, and thermally insulated steel doors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames.
B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames.
C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.
D. Section 08700 - Door Hardware.
E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and
Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
B. ANSI /SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
D. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel
Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and
08111 - 1
cut -outs for glazing, and finish.
C. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut -outs for hardware
reinforcement.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI -100 and ANSI A117.1.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B.
B. Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Accept doors on site only in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation.
08111 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
,
1
,1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR MANUFACTURERS
A. Ceco Corporation, Product: Imperial Series, or approved equal.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 DOORS
A. Exterior Doors (Non - thermally Broken): SDI -100 Grade II 3.
B. Interior Doors (Non- rated): SDI -100 Grade II Model 3.
C. Interior Doors (Fire Rated): SDI -100 Grade II Model 3.
2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI /SDI -100:
1. Exterior Doors: 18 gauge.
2. Interior Doors: 20 gauge.
'k' B. Core: folyurethafie foam. max.
,adds j,,,z, 9 1 5 1 0 1
4.17
C. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R factor of `SC, measured in accordance with
ASTM C236.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink
style tamper proof screws.
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, Z shaped, specifically for double doors.
B. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
C. Attach fire rated label to each door unit so rated.
08111 - 3
D. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel closure. Seal
joints watertight.
2.6 FINISH
A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60.
B. Primer: Air dried.
C. Factory Finish: Baked enamel Thermosetting epoxy of color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI /SDI -100 and DHI.
B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
C. Install door louvers, plumb and level.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112,
and hardware specified in Section 08710.
E. Touch -up factory finished doors.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
08111 - 4
SECTION 08112
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non - rated, fire rated, and thermally insulated steel frames
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames.
B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors.
C. Section 08211 - Wood Doors.
D. Section 08700 - Door Hardware.
E. Section 08800 - Glazing.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and
Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
B. ANSI /SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
D. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel
Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, and finish.
08112 - 1
C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of
cut -outs for hardware, reinforcement.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI - 100 and ANSI A117.1.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to UL 10B.
B. Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as fire door.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAME MANUFACTURERS
A. Ceco Corporation Product Series S, or approved equal.
08112 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
r
1
1
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 FRAMES
A. Exterior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness.
B. Interior Frames: 18 gage thick material, base metal thickness.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole.
B. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink
style tamper proof screws.
C. Anchors for drywall partitions: Provide 4 Z anchors per 7' -0" height.
D. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion.
E. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames of welded construction.
B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar
guard boxes.
C. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into
frame head, flush with top.
D. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike
side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.
E. Configure exterior frames with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping.
2.5 FINISH
A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60.
B. Primer: Air dried.
C. Factory Finish: Baked enamel of thermosetting enamel color as selected.
08112 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI /SDI -100 and DHI.
B. Coordinate with masonry and /or wallboard wall construction for anchor placement.
C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing
D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08700
and doors in Section 08111.
E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor
to structure and floor.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner
to corner.
END OF SECTION
08112 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non - rated.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Steel door frames.
B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware.
C. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI /HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
B. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
C. AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
E. UL 1OB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F. Warnock- Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Custom Grade.
08211 - 1
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Door and Panel Construction: Conform to ASTM E152.
B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as
scheduled.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Accept doors on site only in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term:
1. Life of Installation: Interior doors.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation
tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction.
08211 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Buell
B. Mohawk
C. Weyerhaeuser, Commercial Door Division.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 DOOR TYPES
A. Flush Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches thick; solid core construction , fire rated and non fire
rated, as indicated.
2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Core (Solid, Non - Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC -7 Particleboard. (Non -off
gassing type.)
B. Core (Solid, Fire Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type FD 1 -1/2 and FD 1, as scheduled.
C. Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Custom quality red oak, rotary cut, for
pigmented stain finish.
2.4 ADHESIVE
A. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.
B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL
requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.
C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.
D. Bond edge banding to cores.
E. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements
and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for
through bolted hardware.
08211 - 3
F. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of- tolerance for size
or alignment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire rated and non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard , NFPA
80 and to Warnock Hersey or UL requirements.
B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door
height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements.
D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.
E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders.
F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112 and
hardware specified in Section 08700.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Conform to AWI Section 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
08211 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
B. Coiling Door: Surface mounted.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead coiling door, operating hardware, manual operation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 13121 - Pre - Engineered Buildings: Support framing.
B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A480/A480M -
B. ASTM A526/A526M
Commercial Quality.
C. ASTM B221/A221M
Shapes, and Tubes.
Flat Rolled Stainless Heat Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
- Steel Sheet, Zinc - coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -dip Process,
- Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
A. Manual hand chain lift unit with overhead counter balance device, requiring 35 lb
nominal force to operate.
A. Design door assembly to withstand wind /suction load of 20 psf, without undue deflection
or damage to door or assembly components.
1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware
08331 - 1
locations, and installation details.
1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ceco, Model NFSW.
2. Overhead Door, Model JFN 616.
3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Curtain: conforming to the following:
1. Slats: Interlocking, minimum 24 gage of ASTM A526 steel, galvanized to
minimum 1.25 oz /sq ft coating in accordance with ASTM A525; single thickness
slat.
2. Nominal Slat Size: 2 5/8 inches wide x required length.
3. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides
and to prevent lateral movement.
4. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles and bulb -type weatherseal to provide
reinforcement and positive contact with floor in closed position.
B. Guides: 3/16 inch thick; galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A526, galvanized to
minimum 1.25 oz /sq ft coating in accordance with ASTM A525 of continuous angles,
of profile to retain door in place, mounting brackets of same metal.
C. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of
producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and
capable of holding position at mid - travel; with adjustable spring tension.
D. Hood Enclosure: 24 gage galvanized steel; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and
shape.
E. Hardware:
1. Chain keeper suitable for padlock by others.
2. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges,
bottom of curtain, and baffle around hood enclosure.
F. Fire Alarm Release Mechanism: Electric operated from fire alarm system.
08331 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.3 FINISHES
A. Curtain Slats and Hood: Precoated paint fmish, baked on primer and polyester top coat,
color as selected.
B. Steel Guides: Prepare for site painted fmish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building
framing without distortion or stress.
C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to
structural members only.
D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth
operation.
E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified
in Section 07900.
F. Install perimeter trim and closures.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Tolerances.
B. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.
D. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.
08331 - 3
E. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work.
B. Adjust door, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.
B. Clean door and components.
C. Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
08331 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum window frames for fixed glass.
B. Vision glass.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back -up materials.
B. Section 08800 - Glazing.
C. Section 13121 - Pre - Engineered Building.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
B. AAMA SFM -1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual.
C. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped.
D. ANSI /ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire. Shape, and Tube.
E. ANSI /ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors.
F. ANSI /ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Aluminum fixed window system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated,
factory pre - finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
08410 - 1
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly.
anchorage and fasteners, and internal drainage details.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing
systems with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Protect pre- finished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive
papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer.
1.15 WARRANTY
A. Provide year 1 warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Storefront and framing system: Kawneer Company, Inc., Product: Trifab II 400/451;
or approved equal. Class 1, #14 clear anodized finish, to match existing finish.
B. Equal Products by Vistawall.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI /ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.
08410 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
'1
1
1
1
B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C. Glazing gaskets: Elastomeric extrusions.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Frame: 2 x 4 or 4 1 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes;
internal weep drainage system.
2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Insulating glass as specified in Section 08800.
2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joint:; flush, hairline, and
weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 607.1.
B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Exterior anodized to clear (#14) color, to 0.0007 inch
thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site opening conditions.
08410 - 3
B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work
of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction
tolerances and other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building
structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
F. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
G. Set subsill in bed of mastic and secure.
H. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800.
I. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with
Section 07900.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Remove protective material from pre - finished aluminum surfaces.
C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
08410 - 4
B. Protect finished Work from damage.
END OF SECTION
08410 - 5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. AAMA 101 - Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.
1 B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic
Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extruded aluminum windows with operating sash: glass shop glazed.
B. Operating hardware and insect screens.
C. Perimeter sealant.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Framed openings.
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood perimeter shims.
C. Section 08800 - Glazing.
1.3 REFERENCES
08520 - 1
C. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
D. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod. Wire, Shape. and Tube.
E. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows. Curtain Walls, and
Doors.
F. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows. Curtain Walls, and Doors
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
G. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows. Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
A. Windows: Tubular aluminum sections. shop fabricated, factory pre - finished, vision
glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
B. Configuration: outward projecting bottom, outward openings top hinged sash.
C. Glazing: Factory.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and
negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall to a design pressure of 9.75 Ib /sq
ft as measured in accordance with ASTM E330.
B. Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass; with full recovery of glazing materials.
C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.
D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test
pressure difference of 2.86 lbf)sq ft.
E. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly primarily in line with
pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
F. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing :hannels, or migrating
moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
13. Product Data: Provide component dimensions. anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal
drainage details and manufacturer's specifications.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial
aluminum windows with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver. store, protect and handle products to site.
B. Protect pre - finished aluminum surfaces with stripable coating. Do not use adhesive
papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
08520 - 2
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Alenco Product Series 950 P0.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.
B. Fasteners: Stainless. Hot dip Galvanized steel, or Aluminum.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Frames: non - thermally broken; applied glass stops of snap -on type.
B. Sills: extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 1/4 inch
beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening.
C. Receptor channel: Head and jamb continuous two piece extruded channel receiver for
frame.
D. Insect Screens: woven aluminum mesh.
E. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Compression bulb: permanently resilient, profiled to
effect weather seal.
F. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials:
I. Glass in Exterior Lights: Type 1" insulating, clear.
2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900.
08520 - 3
2.6 HARDWARE
A. Operator: Geared rotary handle fitted to projecting sash arms a ith limit stops.
B. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium or Zinc plated steel. friction pivot joints with nylon
bearings, removable pivot clips for cleaning.
C. Pulls: Aluminum.
D. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joint:; flush. hairline, and
weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.
F. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior.
Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
G. Assemble insect screens of rolled aluminum rectangular sections Miter and reinforced
frame corners. Fit mesh taught in frame into frame and secured.. Fit frame with
aluminum retainers.
H. Weatherstrip operable units.
I. Shop glaze window units.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 603 8.
B. Exterior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Organic coating to color as selected.
C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz /sq ft.
D. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
08520.- 4
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site opening conditions.
B. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials ar ready to receive work
of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install window frames, glass and glazing and hardware in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction
tolerances and other irregularities.
C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances.
D. Install sill and sill end angles.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly tc maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
G. Install operating hardware.
H. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800. to glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
I. Install perimeter sealant backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with
Section 07900.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 f non - cumulative or 0.5
inches per 100 ft., whichever is less.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
08520 - 5
B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Remove protective material from pre - finished aluminum surfaces.
C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water. applied with soft.
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. W ipe surfaces clean.
D. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or othe r solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
08520 - 6
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWDARE
A. Hardware for doors. See Schedule following this Section.
B. Thresholds.
C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Furnish templates for frame preparation.
B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Furnish templates for door preparation.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06410 - Finish Carpentry: Cabinet hardware.
B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors.
C. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames.
D. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Texas Vernon Civil Statutes Article 9102 and ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making
Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute - Quality Standards.
D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
E. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
08710 - 1
G. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of eac i type of hardware.
C. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, and templates.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. and perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Texas Vernon Civil Statutes. Article 9201. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for
Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically
Handicapped People.
2. NFPA 101.
3. NFPA 80.
4. NFPA 252.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with
two years experience.
C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ a qualified person to assist in the work of this
section.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for referenced requirements applicable to fire rated doors
and frames.
08710 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.10 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each pact age with door opening
code to match hardware schedule.
C. Provide secure lockup. Any hardware items lost, damaged or stolen after delivery to site
shall be replaced at Contractor's cost.
D. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving. manufacture or
fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty for each type of hardware under provisions of Section 01700.
1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700.
B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component
manufacturer.
1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Provide three extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group.
08710 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. J. May, Best Locking Systems, Dorma Door Controls, Glynn Johnson, Falcon, Hager
Hinge, H. B. Ives, LCN Closures, National Guard Products, Quality Hardware, Stanley
Hardware, Von Duprin, Trimco Mfg.
2.2 KEYING
A. Door Locks: Keyed differently as directed by Owner. Grand master keyed. Include
construction keying. Key to existing keying system as directed by Owner.
B. Supply keys in the following quantities:
1. 10 master keys.
2. 5 grand master keys.
3. 3 change keys for each bitting.
4. 12 construction master keys.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Finishes: 26D unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
2.4 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, prepared
for machine screw installaltion. Do not provide hardware whicF has been prepared for
self - tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
B. Screws: Furnish screws required with each hardware items. Provide flat -head phillips
screws, except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed screws to match hardware finish.
including "prepared to paint" in surfaces to receive paint finish.
C. Concealed Fasteners: Do not use thru-bolts for installations where bolt head or nut on
opposite face is exposed except where detailed as such. In such cases, provide sleeves
for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
D. Hinges: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as fcllows:
1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins.
2. Nonferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins.
3. Number of Hinges: Provide not Less than 3 hinges for each door leaf for doors
under 90" in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height.
Exterior doors: Non - removeable pins
08710 - 4
Interior doors: Non - rising pins
Tips: Flat button and matching plugs; finish to match leaves.
E. Locks: Lock throw minimum 1" deadbolt throw @ exterior doors. Comply with UL
rating for throw on fire -rated doors.
F. Identification: Do not use product which have manufacturer's name or trade name
displayed in a visible location (omit removeable nameplates) except those required UL
labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. Manufacturer's identification acceptable
on rim of lock cylinders only.
G. Door Stops: Provide number in locations as directed by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated
on shop drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item shall
be coordinated with Architect if not shown on drawings. Mounting heights shall not
exceed reach tolerances referenced in Texas Vernon Civil Statutes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and ce •tify that hardware and
installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
08710 - 5
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
C. Replace any unit which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
NOTES: Key to established Key System (1998).
HW1
Door 100B, 107A, 121C; to have:
Note: Reuse existing hardware on relocated door.
HW2
Door 109. 111: to have:
4 pr butts BB1279 -NRP - 4 '/ x 4 '/
2 flushbolt 1358 -
1 lockset F521DL -DG - ICC /7
2 OH holder GJ7OH - TB
1 threshold 425
2 sweep 102V
1 seal 5050 - BN
1 astragal By Door Supplier
HW3
Door 101, 103, 113: to have:
1 '/ pr butts 1279 - 4 '/ x 4 '/
1 lockset F521DL -DG 1- ICC /7
1 stop W302T
3 silencer 0J64
HW4
Door 100C. 100D. 121D, 121E. 121F. 121G. 121H, 121J, S100. S101: to have:
Note: All hardware by door supplier.
HW5
Door 118, 122, 123: to have:
1 '/ pr butts
1 push plate
. 1 pull plate
BB1279 -41/2 x4 Y
40 - 4 x 16
1610A - 4 x 16
08710 - 6
1 closer P7601 - TB
1 kickplate 10 X 2" LDW - 16GA
1 stop W302T
3 silencer GJ64
HW6
Door 100A, 121A, 121B; to have:
1 1 /2 pr butts BB1279 - NRP - 4 ' x 4 /2
1 deadlock D841 - ICC /7
1 push plate 40 - 4 x 16
1 pull plate 1610A - 4 x 16
1 closer P7601DS - TB
1 kickplate 10 x 2" LDW - 16GA
1 stop 439ES
1 threshold 425
1 sweep 102V
1 seal 5050 - BN
HW7
Door 102; to have:
1 ' pr butts BB1279 - 4 '/ x 4 '/
1 privacy F301 - DG
1 closer P7601 - TB
1 stop W302T
3 silencer GJ64
END OF SECTION
,k AAA. y IzD1 , I'02 41ZZ
sweep I o2.V
1• Se\ 5050 -wit
08710 - 7
4:11,4,,, 1, It, 4
1..3 SUBMITTALS
1..4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1..5 WARRANTY
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass and glazing for Sections referencing this Section for Products and
installation.
1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building
enclosure vapor and air barrier.
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting
normal to plane of glass.
A. Product Data on Types Specified: Provide full schedule of glazing types and
their locations. Provide physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, and special installation requirements.
B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical characteristics,
limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant
Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual
for glazing installation methods.
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01001 including
coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting,
and replacement of same.
08800 - 1
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2..1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers:
1. PPG.
2. Spectrum.
3. Guardian.
4. Ford Glass.
5. Equal to the above.
B. Float or Plate Glass (Type FG -A): Clear, 1/4 inch thick, if not otherwise
indicated, and tinted as indicated.
C. Safety Glass (Type FG -B): Clear and tinted as indicated; heat strengthened
fully tempered 1/4" and 1" insulated as indicated on drawings or as required by
code.
D. Tinted Glass Single Glazing (Type FG -C): Float type, heat strengthened
tempered, as required by code and when indicated on drawings, light reducing
in gray color to be selected; shading coefficient of .70 approximately 1/4"
inch thick.
E. Mirror Glass (Type FG -H): Clear float type with copper and silver coating,
organic overcoating, square and lapped edges, 1/4 inch thick, sized as shown
on the drawings.
2..2 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS
A. Insulated Glass Units (Type SG -A): Double pane; outer pane of tinted gray
glass. inner pane of clear glass, interpane space purged dry air; total unit
thickness of 1 inch.
2..3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning.
2. GE.
3. Ohio Sealants.
4. Tremco.
5. Pecoa.
B. Glazing Compound (FSTT -G -410): Modified oil, grey color.
08800 - 2
C. Butyl Sealant (FSTT -S- 001657): Single Component; Shore A hardness of
10 -20; non - skinning.
D. Acrylic Sealant: Refer to Section 07900.
E. Polysulphide Sealant (FSTT -S -227): Class A, Type 2, two component,
chemical curing, non - sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 -25.
F. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non - staining,
non - bleeding, non - sagging type, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35.
G. Silicone Sealant: Refer to Section 07900.
2..4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Tremco Glazing Systems or Sonneborn.
B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 80 - 90 Shore A Durometer hardness.
C. Spacer Shims Neoprene; 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, self adhesive
on one face.
D. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing
device; 10 -15 shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper.
E. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride 'extruded shape to suit glazing
channel retaining slot; color by Architect.
F. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
G. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized, within tolerance, and
glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive
glazing.
B. Seal porous glazing channels' or recesses with substrate compatible primer or
sealer.
08800 - 3
3..2 EXTERIOR - WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)
A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops_ Seal corners with
butyl sealant.
B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame
ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity
of the air and vapor seal.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant to
attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.
E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied
stops, 1/4 inch below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with
tape flush with 1/4 inch sight line.
F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with type sealant referenced in Section 07900,
to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below
sight line.
G. Apply cap bead of compatible type sealant along void between the stop and the
glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface
smooth.
3..3 LNTERIOR - WET /DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) '
A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16
inch (1.6 min) above sight line.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from
corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at
perimeter of pane or unit.
D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops
at 24 inch (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mrn) below sight line.
E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with type sealant as referenced in
Section 07900. to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line.
08800 - 4
F. Trim protruding tape edge.
3..4 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS
A. Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction.
B. Place plumb and level.
3..5 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and mirrors.
3..6 SCHEDULE
Refer to drawings.
END OF SECTION
08800 - 5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DIVISION 09:
FINISHES
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal stud wall framing.
B. Metal channel ceiling framing.
C. Gypsum board.
D. Taped and sanded joint treatment, in designated areas.
E. Texture finish, in designated areas.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories: Frames for recessed washroom accessories.
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of wall
mounted accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07200 - Insulation: Thermal insulation.
B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames.
C. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames.
D. Section 09300 - Tile.
E. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish.
F. Section 13120 - Pre - Engineered Buildings: Batt insulation in exterior walls and ceilings.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
09250 - 1
C. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
D. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid
Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
E. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
F. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
G. ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.
H. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
I. GA -201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
J. GA -216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board.
K. GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape; and textured
finish.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of textured gypsum board, 18 x 24 inch in size,
illustrating finish color and texture.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, GA - 201, GA - 216, and GA - 600.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, with minimum
5 years experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Section 05400
as follows:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. U425.
09250 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2. Fire Rated Ceiling: UL listed assembly No. U432.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
A. United States Gypsum Co, (USA), Product: Sheetrock Firecode brand type X gypsum
panels.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1. Georgia Pacific Corporation, Product: Fire - Shield type X gypsum panels.
2. Gold Bond Building Products, Product: G -P Firestop type X gypsum panels.
3. Temple - Inland Forest Products, Corporation, Product: Temple - Inland type X
gypsum panels.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; GA -216 and GA -600; galvanized sheet steel; shape.
1. Typical Partitions: 25 gage.
2. Fire -Rated Partitions: 20 gage.
B. Horizontal framing to Support Suspended Ceiling Systems: ASTM C645; GA -216, and
GA -600, galvanized sheet steel.
1. Typical Condition: 18 gage.
C. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. GA -216, and GA -600.
D. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 and GA -216.
E. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails. screws and other metal supports, of type and
size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
F. Adhesive: ASTM C557 and GA -216.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges.
B. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length;
ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges.
09250 - 3
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads: Metal.
B. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type LC L LK U exposed reveal bead.
C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.
D. Textured Finish Materials: Latex based texturing material, containing fine aggregate,
manufactured by USG, or approved equal.
E. Control Joints: Dal -Incor Industries, Model No. 15 expansion joints.
F. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12.
PART 3 EXECUTION
.3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings.
C. Verify that batt insulation and vapor barrier have been installed on exterior walls before
beginning installation of gypsum board system.
3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754.
B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless otherwise noted.
C. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only, and for
partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under
structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg
ceiling runners.
D. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on
each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.
E. Blocking: Bolt or screw wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of
plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wood cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware.
3.3 FURRING FOR FIRE RATINGS
09250 - 4
A. Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA -600
requirements.
3.4 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
' C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.
D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels
or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches
past each end of openings.
E. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
1 3.5 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
1 A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA -201, GA -216, and GA -600 and
manufacturer's instructions. Set gypsum board minimum of 1/2" above fmish floor.
B. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends
occurring over firm bearing.
1 C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
11 Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with fasteners, adhesive and
sufficient support to hold in place. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first
layer.
F. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit
board with sealant.
G. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated. Provide unless
otherwise noted at all windows at upper corners to ceiling and at lower corners to the
floor. Provide at all doors at upper corner to ceiling.
H. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim
where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.6 JOINT TREATMENT
1
09250 - 5
1
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready
to receive finishes.
B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic
tile.
3.7 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Orange peel texture as selected by Architect unless otherwise noted.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch
in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
09250.- 6
A. Manufacturers:
1. Chicago Metallic.
2. Donn.
3. Armstrong.
2..2 ACOUSTIC UNITS
SECTION 09510
SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILINGS
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical tile.'
1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360
maximum.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2..1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
B. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate non -fire rated. exposed T configuration;
components die cut and interlocking.
C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips. splices, edge moldings, hold down clips
required for suspended grid system.
D. Grid Materials: Commercial quality coiled rolled steel with galvanized coating.
E. Grid Finish: White color.
F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel, size and type to suit
application.
A. Acoustic Tiles: Conforming the following:
1. Armstrong Minaboard (ACI):
a. Size: 24 x 48 inches.
b. Thickness: 5/8 inches.
09510 - 1
c. Surface Finish: fissured.
d. Edge: Square.
2. Armstrong Dune (AC2):
a. Size: 24 x 48 inches.
d. Thickness: 5/8 inches.
e. Surface Finish: fissured.
d. Edge: Square.
e. Surface: humidity resistant.
3. Approved equals
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3..2 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. Where components prevent
the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the system to span the extra distance.
C. Hang system independent of walls. columns, ducts. pips and conduit.
D. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units or according to reflected
plan if otherwise shown.
E. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest
practical Lengths.
3..3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC UNITS
A. Install acoustic units level. free from damage. twist. warp or dents.
B. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest room
axis.
C. Trim tegular edges where cut to walls and surfaces to match factory edge.
1.4 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
09510 - 2
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2..1 TILE MATERIALS
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient tile flooring and base.
1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Floor Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke rating
requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Standard Excelon.
2. Azrook
B. Vinyl Composition Tile: 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick.
2..2 BASE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Roppe.
B. Base: rubber: 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved. Continuous lengths.
C. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops and external corners, of same material,
size, and color as base.
2..3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub -floor Filler: Type recommended by floor material manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, type recommended by floor material
manufacturer.
09650 - 1
C. Edge Strips: Vinyl.
D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by floor material manufacturer.
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of
3/16 inch in 10 ft.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and
exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, and dusting.
C. Fill low spots and other defects with sub -floor filler.
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
3..2 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Spread adhesive and set flooring in place. Press with heavy roller to attain full
adhesion.
C. Install tile flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines. Allow
minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
D. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is
dissimilar. Install edge strips where flooring terminates.
E. Scribe flooring to appurtenances to produce tight joints.
F. Install floor pattern where indicated. Fit joints tightly.
3..3 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A. Adhere base tight to wall and floor surfaces.
B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use
premolded units. •
3..4 CLEANING
09650 - 2 '
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. Remove excess adhesive from surfaces without damage.
B. Clean, seal, and wax surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
09650 - 3
1..3 SUBMITTALS
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2..1 MATERIALS
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1..1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and finishing.
1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Finish Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke rating
requirements.
A. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.
B. Samples: Submit two samples, in size illustrating range of colors and textures
available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
C. Furnish a "Detailed Painting /Staining Schedule" including brand designation,
for approval by the Architect. Indicate type of surface, type of paint material,
and number of coats required, as set forth in the schedule hereinafter specified.
Approval of this by the Architect must be received by the Contractor before
delivering material to the site.
D. Provide color mockups on proper surface treatments for approval by Architect
prior to proceeding with project paint applications.
1..4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store and apply materials in environmental conditions required by
manufacturer's instructions. Temperature ranges for paint /stain application is
45 to 90 degrees F.
B. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating to maintain
temperature range for 24 hours before, and 48 hours after application of finish.
09900 - 1
A. Manufacturers:
1. Devoe.
2. Pittsburg Paints.
3. Sherwin Williams.
4. Glidden.
5. Benjamin Moore.
6. Pratt & Lambert.
7. Tnemec.
8. Olympic.
B. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings, of good flow and
brushing properties, capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other
materials required to achieve the finishes specified.
2..2 FINISHES
A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. Color schedule
will be provided by Architect after submittals received.
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive Work.
B. Measure moisture content of porous surfaces using an electronic moisture meter.
Do not apply finishes unless moisture content is less than 12 percent.
C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect Work of this Section.
D. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after
repair.
E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish:
Remove foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri- sodium
phosphate, rinse well and allow to dry.
G. Uncoated Ferrous Surfaces: Remove scale by wire brushing or sandblasting;
wash clean with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution. Prime
09900 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
paint after repairs.
H. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
feather edges; clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
I. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: \Vipe surface clean; seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks
after primer has dried; sand between coats.
J. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign matter:
seal knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior
calking compound after prime coat has been applied.
K. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination. acid etch or light sandblast. and rinse
with clear water. Verify required acid - alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
C rdu d 5.,� w eo.s
3..2 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Sand transparent finishes Lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
C. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood.
D. Back prime interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to receive paint finish
with primer paint.
E. Back prime interior woodwork scheduled to receive stairs or varnish finish with
gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
3..3 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Color code items in accordance with requirements indicated.
B. Paint shop primed equipment.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles. covers, and access panels and paint
separately. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers. grilles. convector and
baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports. except where items are prefinished.
E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convectors, and baseboard heating cabinets
that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to
09900 - 3
.4 o, 2, 916s 01
limit of sight line.
F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas,
except prefinished surfaces.
G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards.
H. Replace electrical plates, hardware. light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior
to finishing.
3..4 CLEANING
A. As work proceeds, promptly remove spilled. splashed. or spattered finishes.
3..5 SHOP PRLMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Exposed surfaces of lintels and other
exposed -to- weather fabrications listed under that section.
* 3..6 GENERAL SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
Refer to drawings for type used for more specific locations /extent.
A. Wood - Painted
1. One coat primer sealer.
2. Two coats acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss.
B. Concrete, Concrete Masonry, Cement Plaster
1. One coat block primer.
2. One coat primer sealer latex.
3. Two coats acrylic latex enamel. semi - gloss.
C. Steel - Shop Primed
1. Touch -up with zinc chromate primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel, high gloss.
D. Steel - Galvanized
1. One coat zinc chromate primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel, high gloss.
E. Pavement Markings:
1. One coat of traffic paint, yellow.
3..7 SCHEDULE - I,NTERIOR SURFACES
09900 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to drawings for type used for more specific locations /extent.
A. Wood - Painted
1. One coat alkyd primer sealer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi - gloss.
B. Wood - Transparent
1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only).
2. Two coats stain.
3. One coat sealer.
4. Two coats varnish or lacquer, satin.
C. Cabinet Interior:
1. One coat of latex prime sealer.
2. One coat of latex enamel, semi - gloss.
D. Steel - Unprimed
1. One coat zinc chromate primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi - gloss.
E. Steel - Primed
1. Touch -up with original primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel. semi - gloss.
F. Steel - Galvanized
1. One coat zinc chromate primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel. semi - gloss.
G. Plaster, Gypsum Board
1. One coat alkyd primer sealer.
2. Two coats acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss.
H. Concrete, Concrete Masonry, Cement Plaster
1. One coat block primer.
2. One coat primer sealer latex.
3. Two coats acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss.
I. Concrete Floors (Epoxy):
1. One coat of catalyzed epoxy primer.
2. Two coats of catalyzed epoxy enamel, non -slip.
END OF SECTION
09900 - 5
1
•
1
1
1
.
,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1�
1
1
DIVISION 13:
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 13121
PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Pre - engineered and shop fabricated structural steel building frame.
B. Wall and sloped roof system including soffits, insulated.
C Enclosure accessories.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: anchor bolts.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete Concrete footings grade beams and floor slab.
B Section 08110 - Standard Steel Frames Metal doors and frames
C. Section 09900 - Painting Finish painting of exposed primed steel surfaces, accessories and
special trim.
1.04 REFERENCES
A AISC - Specification for the Desitn, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
B. ASThI A36 - Structural Steel.
C ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners,
D ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
E. ASTM A386 - Zinc - coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
F. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural
13121 -1
(Physical) Quality.
G. ASTM A490 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
H. ASTM A500 - Cold - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes.
I ASTM A501 - Hot - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
J. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, General
Requirements.
K. ASTM A529 - Structural Steel with 42,000 psi (290 MPa) Minimum Yield Point.
L. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
M FS HH -I -521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, Mineral Fiber.
N FS TT -P -31 - Paint, Oil: Iron - Oxide, Ready Mixed, Red and Brown.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Modular rigid frame supported with intermediate columns.
B. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, canopy "beams, intermediate
columns, braced end frames, end wall columns and wind bracing.
C. Secondary Framing. Purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, sill supports, clips, and other
items detailed
D. Roof System: Preformed metal panels of vertical profile, with sub -girt framing/anchorage
assembly, insulation, and accessory components
1.06 DESIGN CRITERLA
A Members to withstand dead load, applicable snow load, and design loads due to pressure and
suction of wind calculated in accordance with applicable standard code SBCCI 1991 Ed.and
design load schedule.
13121 -2
B. Exterior wall and roof system to withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection
of span: 1/270.
C. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within cladding
system.
D. Thermal Resistance of Wall and Roof System: As shown on drawings.
E. Assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 100
degrees F.
F. Size and fabricate roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.
G.Attachment of roof panels to meet UL90 requirements for fastener spacing and sizing
H.Pre - engineered building frame shall be designed to resist all lateral and wind loads.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments,
openings, fasteners, cambers and loads.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.
D. Indicate framing anchor bolt settings, sizes, and locations from datum.
E. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a professional structural engineer registered in State of
Texas
F. Indicate wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages
and method of anchorage and method of installation
G Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
H.Submit color and material samples for architects selection.
13121 -3
1.08 WARRANTY
A.Provide twenty year manufacturer's warranty for exterior galvalume wall and roof panel against
rupture, structural failure, or perforation due to normal atmosphere corrosion surfaces under
provisions of Section 01700.
B.Provide twenty year manufacturer's warranty for exterior prefinished flourocarbon resin color
coat against chipping, cracking, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading.
C.Roofing shall be wan for materials and workmanship for a period of 2 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Varco- Pruden Buildings.
B. Other manufactures offering equivalent systems:
1 Regal Framing Co.
2. Armco Building Systems, Inc.
3 Butler Manufacturing Co
4 Ceco.
5. Delta Steel Buildings Co.
6. Star Manufacturing Co.
7. Mid -west Steel Building Co
C. Substitutions. Under provisions of Section 01630
2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36.
B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A529.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A325.
13121 -4
1
1
1
E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325.
F. Welding Materials: AWS DI 1; type required for materials being welded.
G. Primer: Tnemec 10 -99.
H. Non - shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water
reducing and plasticizing agents, developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in two
days and 7000 psi in 28 days.
2.03 WALL AND ROOF SYSTEM
A. Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A446, Grade A; zinc - coated (galvanized) to ASTM A792
"Galvalume" designation, normal coating weight of 0 50 oz/SF both sides.
B. Insulation FS HH -I -521 fiber type, faced with foil scrim, UL flame - spread classification of 25
or less where exposed.
C. Joint Seal Gaskets. Manufacturer's standard type.
D. Fasteners: Manufacturers standard type equal to Varco Pruden VP 300 Series, self drilling hex
head stainless steel, with sealing washers .
E. Bituminous Paint Asphaltic type.
F. Sealant: Manufacturers standard type, as specified in Section 07900, non - staining, elastomeric,
skinning.
G.Tape Mastic: For panel laps, performed butyl rubber based compound
2.07 FRAMING FABRICATION
A. Fabricate members in accordance with AISC Specification for plate, bar, tube, or rolled
structural shapes.
B. Bay spacing as noted on plans.
C. Roof Slope: As Noted on Plans
13121 -5
D. Anchor Bolts: Formed with bent straight shank, unprimed, zinc coated to ASTM A386, Class
B, assembled with template for casting into concrete.
E. Overhead Door Frame: As Noted on Plans.
2.08 WALL AND ROOF SYSTEMS FABRICATION
A. Roofing: Minimum 24 ga. metal thickness 50 KSI steel; standing seam profile as indicated, 3
inches deep; lapped male/female edges. fitted with continuous gaskets. Furnish up to 40 foot
lengths to minimize end laps.
B. Soffit Panels: Minimum 26 ga. metal thickness; Panel profile as indicated.
C. Purlins: Roll formed structural shape to receive siding, roofing and liner sheet, zinc coated in
accordance with ASTM A386, Class B.
D. Internal and External Corners: Same material thickness and finish as adjacent material; profile
brake formed shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. Back brace mitered internal
comers with 18 ga. sheet.
E. Expansion Joints: Same material and finish as adjacent material where exposed; manufacturer's
standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. formed as detailed.
F. Flashings, Closure Pieces, Facia, Infills, Caps, and miscellaneous trim Same material and finish
as adjacent material; profile to suit system formed as detailed. Foam filled base tube with
anchors, galvanized. See drawings for special trim/accesories to receive fluorocarbon resin
finish.
G. Fasteners: Non- corrosive type, finish, to maintain load requirements, and weathertight
installation; same finish as cladding.
H. Ventilator: See mechanical.
I. Wall Louvers See mechanical
J. Note walls are R- panel, roof is structural standing seam.
2.09 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
13121 -6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. Fabricate from 24 GA steel with Kynar finish on G -90 galvanized coating on downspouts,
galvalume on gutters.
B. Form gutters and downspouts and scuppers of profile and size indicated to collect and remove
water. Fabricate with connection pieces.
C. Form sections in maximum possible lengths. Hem exposed edges. Allow for expansion at
joints.
D. Fabricate support straps of same material and finish as gutter and downspout, color as selected.
2.10 FRAMING FINISH
A. Framing Members Clean, prepare, and shop prime with 2 coats of primer
B. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.
C.Finish expose exterior framing with 2 coat high gloss Tnemec industrial enamel.
2.11 FINISH
A. Exterior Surfaces: Galvalume finish except as indicated.
B. Special trim, jamb covers and downspouts. Precoated 50% fluorocarbon resin: Precoated oven
baked over primer, min. I mil dry film thickness, - Kynar, color as selected.
C Wall panels at Material Storage Building and endwalls of Small Engine Repair and Vehicle
Maintenance Facility are manufacturer's standard siliconized polyester paint finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FRAMING ERECTION
A Erect framing in accordance with AISC Specification.
B. Provide for erection and wind loads Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb
and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate
braced bays as indicated.
13121 -7
C. Set column base plates with non -shrink grout to full plate bearing.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed. galvanized. Use a primer
consistent with shop coat. Use primer recommended for galvanized surfaces.
3.02 WALL AND ROOFING SYSTEMS
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish
surface Handle galvalume finished panels carefully so as to not stain or mar surface.
Discolored panels which cannot be thoroughly cleaned shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.
D. Locate end laps over supports. Lap panels in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations Place sidelaps over bearing
E. Provide expansion joints where indicated.
F.Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Install otape mastic at all panel edge
laps
G. System: Free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement, and wind whistles.
H.Roof panels to be mechanically seamed, interlocking system Seamed clips to allow for + or - 1
inch thermal movement.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb
B. Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch from true position.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A Seal wall and roof accessories watertight and weather -tight with sealant and in accordance with
13121 -8
�
1
1
1
1
Section 07900.
3.05 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT ERECTION
A. Rigidly support and secure components. Joint lengths with formed seams sealed watertight.
Flash and seal gutters to downspouts
B. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
C. Slope gutters minimum 1/8 inch per foot.
END OF SECTION
13121 -9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DIVISION 15:
MECHANICAL
ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS
Mechanical Specifications
Division 15
Myers & Associates
455 Highway 195, Suite B
Georgetown, Texas 78628
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work of Division 15 consists of providing labor. materials. products. and all operations required
for the complete operating installation of all mechanical systems as shown and specified, in strict
compliance with applicable drawings, specification. terms and conditions of the contract and all
applicable codes and ordinances governing the installation of the various mechanical systems.
Contractor shall provide all equipment and materials necessary and usually fumished in connection
with such work and systems whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications or on the
drawings. All work shall be fully correlated with the w ork of other crafts. This section of Division
15 is a part of all other sections of Division 15.
B. Each Contractor shall study the Contract Documents included under this contract to detemtine exactly
the extent of work provided under this contract, as well as to ascertain the difficulty to be encountered
in performing the work on the drawings and outline hereinafter and in making new connections to
existing utilities. installing new equipment and systems and coordinating the work with the other
Trades.
C. Notwithstanding any approvals or instructions which must be obtained by the Contractor from the
Architect in connection with use of premises, the responsibility for the safe working conditions at the
site shall remain that of the Contractor's and the Architect or Ow ner shall not be deemed to have any
responsibility or liability in connection therewith.
1.02 SITE INSPECTION
The Agreement Forms. Uniform General Conditions. Supplementary Conditions. Division 00 and
Division 01 of the specifications shall apply to the work specified in Division 15.
E. Additional Site Visit Costs: Contractor shall be charged with any cost resulting from uncompleted
items that require additional site trips by the Architect'Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees associated with his work.
A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site verifying all existing items and familiarize himself with
existing work conditions and understand the conditions which affect performance of the work of this
Division before submitting bids for this work. The submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence
of such visits and examinations.
B. All bids shall take the existing conditions into consideration and the lack of specific information on
the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility. No subsequent allowance for time
or money will be allowed for work or change related to failure to examine site conditions.
103 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY
A. Streamlining: In many instances. the products. reference standards. and other itemized specifications
have been listed without verbiage. In these cases. it is implied that the Contractor shall provide the
products and perform in accordance with the references listed.
B. 'Furnish" means to purchase and deliver material as shown and specified. including mark - ups. and cart
the material to an approved location at the site or elsewhere. as noted or agreed.
C. "Pros ide'Install ", as used in these specifications, means furnish all material, labor, sub - contracts, and
appurtenances, including mark -up required for a complete. operating, finished system.
15010- I
D. "Rough -in and Connect Only" means provide an appropriate system connection, such as supplies with
stops, continuous wastes with traps. shut -off valves required. and all piping connections. testing. etc..
for proper operation, and to install equipment furnished. Equipment famished is received. uncrated.
assembled and set in place by supporting crafts unless they make prior arrangements to hire the
mechanical installer for this work.
E. "Accessible" means arranged so that an appropriately dressed maintenance man may approach the area
in question with tools and products necessary for the work intended. and may then position himself
to properly perform the task to be accomplished, without disassembly or damage to the surrounding
installation.
F. "Serviceable" means arranged so that the component or product in question may be properly removed.
and replaced without disassembly, destruction, or damage to the surrounding installation.
G. "Product" is a generic term which includes materials. equipment. fixtures. and any physical item used
on the project.
H. Wherever the term "shown on drawings" is used in the specifications. it shall mean "noted ".
"indicated ", "scheduled ". "detailed", or any other diagrammatic or written reference made on the
drawings.
I. "Conduit' includes. in addition to conduit, all fittings, hangers and other accessories relative to such
conduit "Piping" includes. in addition to piping. all fittings. valves. hangers and other accessories
relative to such piping.
J. "Concealed" means hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces. shafts, hung ceilings. embedded in
construction. crawl spaces. etc.
1.04 DIAGRAMMATIC DRAWINGS
A. Drawings and specifications encompass a system that will integrate with the structural, electrical. and
Architectural design of the building.
Drawings and specifications are complementary, each to the other; what is shown on one is
a binding as if called for in both.
2. Where drawing details. plans. andfor specification requirements are in conflict, and where
conduit. duct and piping sizes of the same run are shown to be different between plans and
specifications or details. the most stringent requirement will be included in the Contract.
Systems and equipment called for in the specification andior shots n on the drawings shall be
provided under the contract of each Trade as if it were required by both the drawings and the
specifications. However. prior to ordering or installation of any portion of work which
appears to be in conflict. such v.ork shall be brought to the Architect's attention for direction
as to tt hat is to be provided
B. The drawings are partly diagrammatic in character and do not show exact locations, all offsets or give
exact elevation in piping. fittings. duct. conduits. etc. Also. the drawings do not necessarily show in
minute detail all features of the installation. Contractor shall phv sically arrange the systems to fit in
the space available and shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions, arrange work
accordingly and provide a complete and satisfactorily working installation. Provide all work shown
on the drawings and specified. unless otherwise stated. No subsequent allowance will be made due
to failure to coordinate work prior to installation.
C The Architectural. Structural. Civil and Electrical plans and Specifications and other pertinent
documents issued b■ the Architect are a part of these Specifications and the accompanying Mechanical
Drau ings and shall be complied and coordinated with in every respect. All drawings and
specifications mentioned above shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to examine all drawings for
coordination and quantities shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and no subsequent
allowance for time or money will be allowed
15010 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.05 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Each Contractor shall compare his Drawings and Specifications with those of other Trades and report
any discrepancies between them to the Architect and obtain from the Architect written instructions to
make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shall be installed in cooperation
with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation. all trades shall make proper
provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect.
B. Each Contractor shall coordinate the location of his systems so that all outside air intakes. plumbing
vents and exhaust fans are located in such a way as to prevent cross - contamination. Such a distance
shall be not less than 10 feet.
C. Locations of conduit, ducts, piping. sprinkler heads and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate
the work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Exact routing a location of system shall be
determined prior to fabrication or installation. Coordinate routing of major electrical conduits w ith
Electrical Contractor prior to fabrication of duct work and piping.
D. Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit. ducts and piping systems shall be made as required to
maintain proper headroom and pitch of slopin lines whether or not indicated on the drawings.
E Where discrepancies in scope of work as to what Trade provides items. such as starters. disconnects,
flow switches and the like exist, such conflicts shall be reported to the Architect prior to signing of the
Contract. If such action is not taken. the various Trades shall furnish such items as part of their work
for complete and operable systems and equipment. as determined by the Architect.
F. The Electrical Subcontractor shall verify with the HVAC. Plumbing and Fire Protection
Subcontractors available electrical characteristics for all motors and equipment before ordering and
submitting of electrical gear. Verify actual connection points prior to installation and roughing-in.
G The Contractors are to avoid routing conduit through fire rated assemblies where practical. Each trade
is responsible for proper coordination of required sleeves or block -outs with rated assembly installers.
Each trade is responsible for providing sleeves. as required. for his work. Each trade shall verify
acceptable tolerances around penetrating item in fire assembly before beginning fire sealing.
1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and other Subcontractors in ample time of the
location of all chases. sleeves and openings required in the construction for the proper installation of
his work. The Contractor shall do all core drilling of individual holes and all cutting for his work
except square or rectangular openings in the structural slabs which shall be cut by the Contractor at
locations shown on the drawings. In no case. however. shall a beam or column be cut without the
approval of the Project Structural Engineer.
B. On completion of this work or as work progresses the Contractor shall make all repairs and do all
patching required as a result of the work under this contract. All patching shall be performed in a
manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original conditions and to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
C. Any cutting and patching necessary as a result of the Contractor's failure to notify the General
Contractor of all the required openings shall be at the expense of the Contractor's.
107 OBLIGATIONS.'RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor binds himself. his partner's. successors. assigns and legal representatives to the Owner
in respect to all cotenants. agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents The
Contractor shall not assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the
Architect'Owner. nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him hereunder,
without the previous written consent of the Owner /Architect.
15010 - 3
B. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using his best skill and attention. He shall be
solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, safety. sequences and procedures.
and for coordinating all portions of the work under his Contract.
C. The Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of the work.
even though not particularly specified or indicated. and if he.has good reason for objecting to the use
of a material, appliance, or type of construction shown or specified, he shall register his objections
with the Architect/Engineer, in writing: otherwise, he shall proceed with the work under the stipulation
that a satisfactory job is required.
1.08 REVIEW OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 15 and shown on
the drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment
submittals in the manner described elsewhere in these specifications. In addition. include data for
review. and organize data. as noted below.
B. Substitutions:
1. Equipment listed as equal is indicated to be equal in quality to equipment designed around.
It does not mean equal in dimension or fit. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm
dimensional differences and space requirements:
2. Request for proposed substitution of materials. methods. or processes shall be made to the
Architect and if found acceptable. will be confirmed by an addendum to the Construction
Documents. Where proposed substitutions are not incorporated into the Construction
Documents by addendum PRIOR to time of the General Contract bid opening. all bids shall
be held to have been made on the basis of the materials. methods and processes required by
the Construction Documents
3. Equal Materials: It is not the Intent of the Specifications to limit materials to the product of
any particular manufacturer. Where definite materials. equipment and/or fixtures have been
specified by name. manufacturer or catalog number. it has been done so as to set a definite
standard and a reference for comparison as to quality. application, physical conformity. and
other characteristics.
4. Acceptance of substitution by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for proper operation of the systems. compliance n ith specifications, necessary changes due
to dimensional differences or space requirements. and of work on schedule.
5 Where equipment of the acceptable manufacturers' requires different arrangement or
connections from those shoe n. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install the
equipment to operate properly and in hamtony ss ith the original intent of the drawings and
specifications. When directed by the Architect. the Contractor proposing substitutions shall
submit drawings shossing the proposed installation If the proposed installation is approved,
the Contractor shall make all necessary changes in all affected related work provided under
other Sections. including location of rough -in connections by other Trades, conduit supports,
insulation. etc. All changes shall be made at no increase in the Contract amount or additional
cost to the other Trades and, or Oss ner.
C Data Required for Review: Mark submittal literature and shop drawings clearly, bind 8 1/2 x 11
literature in hard backed looseleaf binders by individual sets. and include all equipment and material
shoran on drays ings and specified. Provide four (4) complete sets. ANY DATA NOT CLEARLY
MARKED OR NOT APPROPRIATELY SUBMITTED WILL BE RETURNED WITHOUT
CHECKING Indicate the following -
1. Specification reference and/or drawing reference for which literature is submitted for review
n ith an index. following specification format, and item by item Identification.
15010 - 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
1
1
1
2. Manufacturers name, address, and phone number: supplier's name. address. and phone
number; Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Catalog designation or model number.
4. Rough -in data and dimensions. „ -
5. Performance curves and rated capacities with performance data marked.
6. Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams.
7. Operation characteristics.
8. Complete customized listing of equipment. characteristics. accessories. etc.. specified.
Indicate whether item is "As specified ". Mark out all non - applicable items. The terminology
"As specified" used without this customized listing is not acceptable.
9. Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation.
10. Working construction drawings (shop drawings). Pro%ide one (I) sepia and two (2) blueline
prints.
D. Partial Submittals: If other than a complete submittal is made. the Contractor may make partial
submittals separated into complete specification section classifications.
E. Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only and does not relieve the Contractor from
any of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity,
dimension. fit or proper technical design of manufactured equipment. Where deviations of substitute
product or system performance have not been specifically noted in the submittal by the Contractor.
provision of a complete and satisfactory working installation is the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
F. Submittal data required but not limited to the follow ing:
Ductwork Shop Drawings Fire Dampers
Pipe Fire Damper Installation Detail
Isolators Controls
Valves Vale Tags 'Markers
Relief Valves Access Panels.Doors
Gauges Flexible Connectors
Chillers Pumps
Air Handlers Boilers
Condensers Pipe Identification Labels
Flexible Ductwork Water Heaters
Insulationlntemal Lining Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
Metal Jacket R Fittings Cleanouts
Exhaust Fans Floor Drains
ExhaustiRelief Caps Condensing Units; Heat Pumps
Volume Dampers Duct Tape
Supply Fans Grease Traps
Air Extractors Lint Trap
Grilles, Registers :Diffusers Acid Dilution Basin
Unit Heaters Fire Smoke Dampers
Spin -in Fittings Fire,Smoke Damper Installation Detail
1 09 SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
A. Prepare and submit working construction drawings as requested. specified. and otherwise necessary
to demonstrate proper planning for installation and arrangement of all work. Layout drawings to scale
15010 - 5
and show dimensions where accuracy of location is necessary for coordination or communtcation
purposes. Show work of all trades. including Architectural, Structural. Mechanical, and Electrical
items which may be pertinent to proper and accurate coordination. Provide shop drawings for all
products, ductwork systems, system components, and special supports which are not standard catalog.
products and which may be fabricated for the Contractor or by the Contractor. Identify all shop
drawings as to which section and paragraph of the specifications and/or drawing number the item is
covered under. Ductwork layout/shop drawings to be done at a minimum 1/8" = l' -0" scale, except
in mechanical rooms where they are to be at a minimum of 1 r4" = 1' -0 ".
B. ALL SHOP DRAWINGS OF MECHANICAL ROOMS SHALL BE DONE AT A MINIMUM
SCALE OF 1/4 INCH EQUALS I FOOT. SHOW ALL FLOOR DRAINS. EQUIPMENT,
INCLUDING ELECTRIC PANELS, TRANSFORMERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCH
LOCATIONS. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.
C. Submission of copies of the Engineer's drawings does not constitute shop drawings and is not
acceptable.
D. Submittal of shop drawings and complete engineering submittal data shall be made in sufficient copies
to provide one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Architect. one (1) copy of all data to be
retained by the Engineer. two (2) copies of all data to be accumulated for the Owner. additional copies
as required by the Contractor.
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Reference requirements stated elsewhere in the Specifications.
B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAPE ALL ADDENDA ISSUED DURING BIDDING TO HIS
CONSTRUCTION AND RECORD DRAWING SET PRIOR TO COMMENCING
CONSTRUCTION. PAY REQUESTS WILL NOT BE PROCESSED UNTIL THE CONTRACTOR
HAS COMPLIED WITH THIS REQUIREMENT.
C. In addition to other requirements. a master Record Drawing blueline set (separate from field sets) shall
be kept in the General's site trailer and marked up weekly as the work progresses, to show exact
dimensioned location and routing of all mechanical work which wi ll be permanently concealed. Show
routing and location of items cast in concrete or buried underground. Show routing of work in
permanently concealed blind spaces w ith in the building. Work located in spaces w ith access, or above
suspended ceilings. is not considered permanently concealed. Show complete routing and sizing of
any significant revisions to the systems shown. Show the location of all valves and their appropriate
tag. identification. Indicate locations of all existing active and inactive piping uncovered during
construction. Keep marked up set at site for review at site meetings.
D. Contractor shall indicate progress by coloring -in various conduits. pipes. ducts. and associated
appurtenances exactly as the are erected. This process shall incorporate both the changes noted
above and all other deviations from the original drawings whether resulting from job conditions
encountered or from any other causes •
E. The marked -up and colored -up pants will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work
installed. They shall be inspected periodically by the Architect and Owner's Representatives. and they
shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. This procedure is mandatory.
F. No monthly pay applications will be reviewed if the Record Drawings are incomplete or are
unasailable for inspection.
G. At the completion of the job. these prints shall be submitted to the Architect for final review and
continent. The prints will be returned with appropriate comments and recommendations. These
corrected prints, together with corrected prints indicating all the revisions. additions and deletions of
work, shall form the basis for preparing a set of record drawings.
15010- 6
1
1
11
H. The Engineer's original tracings may be borrowed by the Contractor for his Trade. to obtain a set of
mylar reproductions. Engineer's seal shall be removed from this set of mylars. Each Contractor shall
then transfer all work to his mylar set and shall add the date of printing and the legend "Record
Drawing Set" and submit a set of reproducible sepias to the Architect for his review. The Architect
shall comment on the set of sepias and shall return this set to the Contractor to make any final
modifications to the drawings. After all corrections are made. the Contractor shall add the date of
printing and the legend "Record Drawing Set' on the mylar set.
Using the "Record Drawing Set ", the Contractor shall print one (1) complete set of reproducible
mylars and two (2) sets of prints for submission to the Owner.
.1. Contractor shall bear all the costs of reproducing the original tracings. making all the necessary
changes and printing the mylar sets for the work in his charge.
K Control riser diagrams shall be mounted in glass front cases and shall be located as directed by the
Architect.
L. Final payment will be withheld until all Record Drawing Sets are submitted to the Owner.
I.I I CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. Comply with the applicable local, state and federal codes and ordinances affecting materials and
methods of installation of the Mechanical Systems. Follow recommended practices as set down by
ASME, SMACNA. ASHRAE, NFPA. Uniform Building Code. Uniform Mechanical Code, Uniform
Plumbing Code, National Electrical Code, AGA. ADA. Architectural Barriers and OSHA. as they
apply to this project, except in cases where statutes govern
In cases of difference between Building Codes. State Laws. Local Ordinances and Industry Standards
and the Contract Documents. each Subcontractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any
such difference. as applicable to his work.
C. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and the requirements of any Code or Authorities
having jurisdiction, the most stringent requirements of the aforementioned shall govern.
D. Should the Contractor perform any w ork that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable
Building codes, State laws. Local Ordinances and Industry Standards, he shall bear all costs arising
in correcting the deficiencies. as approved by the Architect.
1 12 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere.
I. Electrical Specifications: Div ision 16.
B Unless otherwise indicated on the Electrical Drawings or in Mechanical Specifications. provide all
mechanical equipment motors. motor starters, disconnect switches. thermal overload switches, control
relays, time clocks. thermostats. motor valves, damper motors. electric switches, electric components,
wiring. and any other miscellaneous Division 15 controls
C Carefully coordinate all work with the electrical work shown and specified elsewhere in these
documents.
D. Motors. Furnish electric motors designed for the specific application and duty applied, and to deliver
rated horsepower without exceeding temperature ratings when operated on power systems with a
combined variation in voltage and frequency not more than plus or minus 10 percent of rated voltage.
E. Verify from the drawings and specifications the available electrical supply characteristics and furnish
equipment that will perform satisfactorily under the conditions shown and specified.
15010-7
F. Size motors for 1.15 service factor, not to exceed 40 degrees temp. rise above ambient.
G. Provide self - resetting thermal overload switch for fractional horsepower motors.
H. Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install temperature control wiring and conduit. All control
wiring inside structure shall be in metallic raceway. All control wiring outside shall be in liquid tight
conduit.
When Mechanical Contractor furnishes motor starter, provide each three phase motor 25 HP and
larger with phase failure and phase reversal monitoring relay in all three phases. Relay shall open
motor starter contacts at 10% voltage unbalance and shall automatically reset when voltage returns to
normal. Provide adjustable time delay set at .2 second on drop -out to prevent nuisance tripping on
momentary voltage dips.
J. Duct smoke detector in supply and return air provided and installed by Mechanical Contractor for
units 2000 cfm and above. Provide detectors with remote test switches and indicators. Locate them
beside unit thermostat unless otherwise noted.
K. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the electric motors of the type, size and
electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings and any change in motor
size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution of mechanical equipment having.
characteristics requiring a change. shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the
entire cost of such change. including conduit, wiring. motor starting equipment. etc.. shall be paid for
by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge. unless the substitution was initiated by the
Owner.
1 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A Schedule. obtain. and pay for all fees and/or services required by local authorities and by these
specifications, to test the mechanical systems as specified in these specifications.
B. Request For Tests: Notify the Architect a minimum of 24 hours in advance of tests. In the event the
Architect does not witness the test. certify in writing that all specified tests have been made in
accordance with the specifications
C. Deficiencies. Immediately correct all deficiencies which are evidenced during the test and repeat test
until system is approved. Do not coser or conceal piping. equipment or other portions of the
mechanical installations until satisfactory tests are made and approved.
D. Operating Tests: Upon request from the Architect. place the entire mechanical installation and/or any
portion thereof. in operation to demonstrate satisfactory operation.
E
Los of Tests: The Contractor shall set up a testing log form to be kept at the job site with the record
drao ings. All tests shall have pertinent data logged at the time of testing. Pertinent data is to include:
date. time. description, personnel. system tested (and extent). test conditions, test results, etc.
F. Completion: Upon completion of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Architect's
satisfaction that the systems have been installed in a satisfactory manner in accordance with the plans,
specifications. and applicable codes. Demonstrate dynamic operation of all systems. Show that all
controls are operable and are properly adjusted in accordance with the requirements of the final
systems balance. that all systems are properly balanced. that all equipment operates properly, that
filters and strainers are clean. and that all components of all sy stems are installed and adjusted for
proper operation
I. Prior to final inspection. all w ork under this Division to be completed, all equipment to insure
operational and final testing and balance reports submitted and approved.
1.14 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION
15010 - 8
A. All equipment and materials shall be protected from physical and weather damage from the time of
delivery until completion of the project. This includes erection of temporary shelters and covering
items in the building with protective covering. Store items subject to moisture damage such as control
in dry, heated space. Failure to comply with the above to the satisfaction of the Owner'Architect will
be sufficient cause for the rejection of the equipment or material in question. Upon such rejection, the
damaged equipment or material will be completely replaced with new by the Contractor at no charge
to the Owner.
B. The Manufacturer's directions are to be followed from delivery. storage. protection and installation
of equipment and materials. Notify the Architect in writing of conflicts bens een requirements of
Contract Documents and manufacturer's direction.
C. Large pieces of equipment a hich are too large to permit access through doors. stains a} s or access
opening shall be placed in the space before enclosing the structure. After equipment is placed. it shall
be thoroughly protected from damage.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to final acceptance. instruct an authorized representative of the Owner on the proper operation
and maintenance of all mechanical systems. equipment. and controls under this contract. Make
available a qualified technician for each component of the installation for this instruction Give these
operation instructions after the operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished to the Owner.
Submit written certification. signed by the Contractor. and an authorized representative of the Owner,
that this has been completed.
1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals for training of Owner's personnel in operation and
maintenance of systems and related equipment in the manner described elsewhere in these
specifications. In addition. organize manuals and include data and narrative as noted below (bind each
manual in a hard - backed looseleaf binder. Use 8 -1/2" x 1 I" white paper).
B. Operating Sequence and Procedures:
Contents In each chapter. describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the
system and equipment covered in that chapter Also. include a copy of System Balancing
Report.
2. Typewritten Operating procedures: Write procedures for start-up. operation, and shutdown.
a Start Give complete step -by -step instructions for energizing equipment. making
initial setting and adjustments ssheneser applicable.
b. Sltutdossn Procedure. Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment
after operation. If a particular sequence is required. give step -by -step Instruction
in that order.
C. Maintenance Instructions•
1 Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of
performance for each preventive maintenance task. 1.e , cleaning. inspection, etc.
D. Manufacturer's Brochures: Include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering all appurtenances
used in each system, together with illustrations. exploded views and renewal parts lists. Provide
nearest manufacturers' representatives name. address and phone number
E. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected, approved submittals and shop drawings covering
equipment for the project either with the manufacturers' brochures or properly identified in a separate
subsection.
15010 - 9
F. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment furnished for project, with a tabulation of descriptive
data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or systems. Properly identify each part
by part number and manufacturer.
1.17 GUARANTEE
B.
A. The Contractor and Manufacturer's shall provide a ONE (I) YEAR guarantee for all work under the
Electrical, HVAC. Plumbing and Fire Protection Trade. However. such guarantees shall be in addition
to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by
other provisions of the Contract Documents. In any case. such guarantees and warranties shall
commence when the Owner accepts the mechanical /electrical system. as determined by the Architect,
and shall remain in effect for a period of ONE (1) YEAR thereafter.
B. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under each Section shall carry a ONE
(1) YEAR warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault under any Contract.
due to defective or improper material. equipment, workmanship or design which may develop shall
be made good, forthwith. by and at the expense of the Contractor for the work under his Contract,
including all other damage done to areas, materials and other system resulting from this failure.
C. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the system. which are to be provided under his
Contract, are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein
or as indicated.
D. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of any systems or equipment during the
guarantee period. the affected part or parts shall be replaced by the Contractor for his respective work,
as applicable.
E.
F.
Furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements.
Reference other guarantee information elsewhere in these specifications.
1.18 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION
A. When any piece of mechanical or electrical equipment is operable and it is the advantage of the
Contractor to operate the equipment. he may do so providing that he properly supervises the operation.
The tr arranty period shall. however. not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for
the benefit of the Owner.
1.19 RECORD FOR OWNER
Regardless of %% hetlter or not the equipment has been operated. the Contractor shall properly clean the
equipment. install clean filter media, properly adjust the equipment and complete all punch list items
before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and the start of the w arranty may no
be the same date.
A. Each Contractor shall accumulate and bind in an "Operating and Maintenance" manual the following
data to be presented to the Ost ner at the completion of the Project.
1 All warranties and guarantees and manufacturer's instruction on equipment and material
covered b■ the contract
Approted equipment brochures. u, iring diagrams and control diagrams and control diagrams.
3. Copies ofapprosed shop diagrams.
4. Operating instructions for heating and cooling and other mechanical systems. Operating
instructions shall also include recommended maintenance and seasonal changeover
procedures.
15010 - 10
1.20 SITE OBSERVATION
5. Repair parts lists of all major items and equipment including name, address and telephone
number of local supplier or agent.
6. Valve tag charts and diagrams herein before specified.
7. HVAC balance and test results.
8. "As-Built" Drawings as specified under "Construction Drawings" (these are not to be bound
in the 0 & M Manual).
B. All of the above data shall be submitted to the Owner for appros al no less than two (2) st eeks before
final inspection
A. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to personally make a careful inspection trip of the entire project.
assuring himself that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance before calling upon the
Owner, Architect or Engineer to make final acceptance of the work.
B. The final acceptance of the work will be made jointly by the Architect and the Owner.
END OF SECTION
15010 - 11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes specific requirements, products. and methods of execution which are typical
throughout the mechanical work of this project. Additional requirements for the specific systems will
be found in the sections specifying those systems. and supersede these requirements.
B. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a pan of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications. determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drawings.
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Obtain approval from Architect prior to cutting or drilling any building elements.
B. Structural Interferences* Should structural members prevent the installation of piping. ducting or
equipment, notify the Architect before proceeding.
Consider minor changes in position of equipment, piping. or ducting, as part of the contract at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. Coordinate with Structural and Architectural work to determine acceptable locations for sleeves and
supports which are required but may not be specifically shoo n on the plans Schedule installation of
sleeves and special supports in a manner timely to the work of other crafts. Anticipate minor offsets
necessary for proper coordination with other work. and reroute systems appropriately.
ID It is the Contractor's responsibility to properly use all information found on the Architectural,
Structural, Civil and Electrical Drass ings where such drawings affect his work.
1.03 DIMENSION AND FIT
Cut materials accurately from measurements taken on the JOB SITE.
B Do not spring or bend pipe to fit conditions or make up joints.
1 04 SERVICEABILITY OF PRODUCTS
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
A Furnish all products to provide the proper orientation of sery iceable components to access space
provided.
B. Coordinate installation of piping. ductwork, equipment. coils. system components. and other products
to allow proper service of all items requiring periodic maintenance or replacement.
C. Replace or relocate all products incorrectly ordered or installed to provide proper serviceability.
1.05 ACCESSIBILITY OF PRODUCTS
A. Arrange all work to provide permanent. convenient. and safe access to all serviceable and,'or operable
products. Layout work to optimize net usable access space «!thin confines of space available. Advise
Architect. in a timely manner, of areas where proper access cannot be maintained. Furnish layout
drawings to verify this claim. if requested.
15050 - 1
B. Provide access doors in ceilings, walls, floors, etc., for access to traps, valves. dampers. automatic
devices, and all serviceable or operable equipment in concealed spaces. Location of panels shall be
submitted for approval in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.
1.06 ROUTING
A. Route all pipelines and ductwork parallel with building lines. and as high as possible. except where
under ground or shown otherwise on the plan.
B. Route piping and ducts to clear all doors. windows, and other openings and to avoid all other pipes
and ducts, light fixtures, and similar products.
C. Conceal all pipes and ducts where routed through finished areas. unless authorized by Architect or
otherwise indicated on plans.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL PRODUCTS
A. Provide all products new, unused. and undamaged. of standard manufacture. and of latest design and
best quality.
B. When a manufacturer's name appears in these specifications or schedule. it is not to be construed that
the manufacturer's material does not have to meet the full requirements of the specifications or that
his standard catalogue item will be acceptable.
C. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation. local factory authorized service
and local stock of repair parts.
2.02 Where more than one type of material is specified. the Contractor ma} choose one type: however. he must state
«hich type of material he proposes to use in his submittal. Only one type of material may be used in a specific
piping sy stein.
2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe:
1. Threaded: Schedule 40. ASTM A53 grade B or ASTM Al20. American Standard pipe
thread. Malleable iron 150 lb. fittings.
B. Copper Pipe:
1. Type "I:" or "L" hard drat[ n copper with w rought copper fittings with openings machined
to accurate capillary fit for the pipe. Pipe to conform to Standard Specifications for copper
water tube.
2. Solder joints using 50'50 lead tin solder for s}stems operating below 180 F.
3. Solder joints using 430 sits er solder for s∎ stems operating at 180 or above.
4. Use "lead free" solder for all domestic [water piping.
C Compressed Air Piping:
I. All piping 2" and smaller shall be copper pipe
2. Use capped tees at each joint to allow for future connection. Capped tees to face up.
1 5050 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.04 VALVES
3. Slope all piping to drain. Provide drain leg at each low point with ball valve at bottom of
drain lee for draining system. Drain leg to be approximately 7' -6" A.F.F. (verify in field).
A. Select valves of the best quality and type suited for the specific service and piping system used.
Minimum working pressure rating 125 psig steam or 150 psig W.O.G.
B. Manufacturer: Nibco, Hammond. Jenkins, Milwaukee, Stock ham. other recognized manufacturer of
equal reliability. .
C. Gate Valves, 2" and Smaller: Bronze body and trim, rising stem. solid wedge.
D. Gate Valves. 2 -1J2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem. flanged.
E. Globe Valve 2" and Smaller: Teflon disc, bronze body, bronze trim.
F. Ball Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, virgin TFE seat rings. blow -out proof stem. reinforced
thrust washer, 1/4 turn full open. /full close.
G. Globe Valve 2'1;2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, Runa -N disc. flanged, bronze disc hot water,
Buna -N disc cold water.
H. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body. horizontal swing. Y- pattern. renewable disc.
I. Swing Check Valves 2 -1/2" and Larger Iron body, horizontal swing, bolted bonnet. renewable seat
and disc. flanged. non -slam type.
J. Drain Valves: Hose end gate valve or _gate valves with hose connection. Do not use sillcocks in lieu
of drain valves.
K. Valves Specified Elsewhere• Pros ide special valves such as motor operated valves. relief valves.
temperature regulating valves. etc., as specified under the individual system or as indicated on the
drawings.
L. USE BALL VALVES RATED FOR SERVICE INTENDED FOR ALL ISOLATION VALVES TWO
INCHES (2 ") AND SMALLER.
2.05 UNIONS
A Pros ide unions, flanges, or wing couplings adjacent to all tanks and equipment and where required for
disconnect and maintenance of equipment.
B. Union for Steel Pipe: Ground joint malleable iron.
C. Union for Copper Pipe: All brass.
D. Union Between Dissimilar Metals Dielectric type. designed and advertised to be unaffected by heat,
cold or fluid in pipe. EPCO or approved equal.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS
A Escutcheons. Nickel or chrome plate with screws or springs for holding plate in position.
2.07 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. General:
15050 - 3
1. Securely fasten all mechanical work to the structure to prevent hazard to human life and limb.
and to prevent damase to products of construction under all conditions of operation.
B. Pipe Supports:
1. Single Pipes:
a. Support all horizontal runs cast -iron soil pipe on hangers spaced not more than 5
feet on centers. Support piping in a manner to prevent binding. undue swine. and
the transmission of vibration to the structure.
Support plastic piping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and
the applicable ASTM standard. Support fuel gas piping per code. Support
horizontal steel and copper piping at not more than the following spacing. and at
valves and similar point loads. and at elbows.
Schedule 40 Type L Type M
O.D. Size. In. Steel Copper Drain
1'2 6 4
3'4 7 5 5
1 7 6 6
1 1'4 8 7 7
11/2 9 8 8
2 10 8 8
21'2 11 9
3 12 10
4 14 12
b. Support single pipes from clevis hangers equal to Grinnel No. 104. Install hangers
for insulated piping outside the insulation using high density section of insulation
and sheet metal shield or saddle. Provide copper plated hangers or plastic shields
in contact with copper pipe.
2 Trapeze Hangers. Where pipes are clustered. parallel. and in same plane, they may be
supported by trapeze hangers. Provide rods and angle -irons sized to suit load imposed.
3. Piping on Walls: Secure with hook- plates, clips or fabricated steel brackets.
4. Supports from Steel Beams and Similar Construction: Use appropriate beam clamps.
5 Guide and anchor piping where necessary to control expansion and contraction. Provide
supports and hangers tt ith non - corrosive and rust - resistant finish. Galvanize or plate hanger
rods after threading. Hangers other than those specified not permitted.
6. Provide single pipe supports not less than the following schedule:
PIPE SIZE - INCHES ROD SIZE - INCHES
I' 2" through 2" 3'8"
2 -1 2 " through 3" I'2"
4" through 6" 5'8"
7. Manufacturer's. Grinnel. C & P. Fee and Mason. Elcen. SuperStrut
C. Ductwork Support: Refer to Section 15810, Air Distribution.
D. Inserts. Provide all inserts required for installation of horizontal piping. In poured concrete provide
wrought steel or malleable iron and adjustable type. Where expansion bolts are necessary to secure
15050 -4
piping or equipment, use malleable iron type with expansion case. to be inserted by drilling concrete.
Power driven inserts not permitted for supporting piping to ceiling.
E. Miscellaneous Iron and Steel:
1. Provide all steel supports and hangers to support all equipment or materials unless noted
otherwise.
2. All work shall be cut, assembled, welded and finished by skilled mechanics. Welds shall be
ground smooth. Stands. brackets and framework shall be properly sized and strongly
constructed.
3. Measurements shall be taken on the job and worked out to suit adjoining and connecting
work. All work shall be performed by experienced metal- working mechanics. Members
shall be straight and true and accurately fined.
4. Welded joints shall be ground smooth where exposed. Drilling. cutting and fitting shall be
done as required to properly install the work and accommodate the work of other Trades.
5. Members shall be generally welded except that bolting may be used for field assembly where
welding would be impractical. Welders shall be skilled and certified.
6. All shop fabricated iron and steel work shall be cleaned and dried and given two (2) coats
of weatherproof primer paint on all surfaces and in all openings and crevices.
2.08 ACCESS DOORS
Doors shall be Karp. Inland Steel Products, Milcor, Miami or Walsh- Hannon. constructed of steel with
primer coat of rust inhibitive paint. and continuous piano hinge. Doors shall be key operated with
flush operated cylinders. key ed alike. Key lock system shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall
be approved by the Architect. Provide six (6) keys of type used for access panels for Owner's use.
Obtain receipt of key deliver' and submit to Architect for record.
1. Suspended lath and plaster ceilings - Style: "M" w ith 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel.
2. Masonry non -rated walls - Style: "M" with 16 _gauge frame. 14 gauge panel.
3. Masonry fire rated walls - fire rated with UL. 112 hour "B" rating. 16 gauge frame, 20 gauge
sandwich type insulated panel.
4. For access doors larger than 16" in either direction. provide ht o (2) locksets.
2.09 GAS VENTS
A. Gas vents shall be suitable for the equipment actually pros ided Vent type shall be at least Type B.
In addition, provide positive pressure type sealed vent s } stem where the sent will be under positive
pressure.
B Type B Vent (3" - 48 "):
I. Factory- built: labeled and tested for use w ith building heating equipment.
2. Double wall pipe: galvanized steel outer pipe, heavy gauge aluminum inner pipe.
3. Supply with support pieces. adapters, fittings and s enhlating thimble.
4. Provide vent and cap for all suitable gas consuming equipment. Size vents for the actual
layout and the flow and pressure requirements of the equipment provided. Submit sizing
15050 -5
calculations for review. In no case shall the pipe be smaller than the equipment connection
size.
5. Provide flashing base. truncoated 12" high cone flashing to match roof slope (may be shop
built if slope does not match standard manufactured slopes), and sealed storm collar.
6. Acceptable Manufacturer's: Metalabestos Type RV or QC or Metalfab.
C. Vent caps: Breident or Acme with 1/4" bird screen.
2.10 STARTERS
A. When specified, or integral to the equipment scheduled. starters shall be integral to the equipment and
may be definite purpose type conforming to Division 16 specifications.
B. Generally, separate starters. starters in motor control centers. and variable speed dris es are under
Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
A. Provide equipment concrete pads. treated support runners. roof curb supports. mounting accessories,
supports, hangers, expansion joints, adapters and any other appurtenances to adapt fixtures and
equipment supplied to the conditions of use
B. Independently support piping and ductwork at equipment so that no weight is supported by the
equipment.
C. Securely fasten fixtures and equipment to the building structure in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
D. At %%all attached fixtures and equipment weighing less than 50 pounds. provide backing plates of at
least 1/8 x 10 inch sheet metal or 2 x 10 inch fire retardant treated wood securely built into the
structural walls. Submit attachment details of heavier equipment for review.
E. Electrical conduit shall not be hung from equipment or mechanical systems.
3.02 SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeves as required where pipes pass through walls. floors. or ceilings. Make sleeves as
follows:
In non -fire rated bearing walls. foundations. masonry or concrete walls and floors above
grade. use schedule 40 black steel pipe.
2 In slabs on grade use Schedule 40 PVC.
3 In non rated construction. use minimum 20 gauge gal%anized sheetmetal.
4. In fire rated halls, floors and assemblies install sleeves as required by UL Ststem Number.
B In non fire rated areas install sleeves flush with surfaces. In mechanical rooms or any }set floor where
seepage may occur install slew e I inch above floor and caulk. Caulk both sides of penetration using
UL listed one part firestop synthetic elastomer sealant. flexible at normal working temperatures,
having smoke developed 50. fuel contributed 50, and flame spread 25 rating. Install thickness per
manufacturer's recommendation. Manufacturer. Dow Corning FireStop 2000 Sealant. Flame Stop V,
3M: CP -25.
15050 - 6
C. Waterproof all sleeves through building exterior skin. including walls, roofs and interior floor
penetrations to prevent leakage. Coordinate with the Architect on caulk material to use at exterior.
D. Size sleeves for cold piping to allow for continuous insulation through sleeve.
3.03 SEALING AND FIREPROOFING
A. SEALING OF PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS, FLOORS, CEILING AND
ROOF ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER UL "FIRE RESISTANCE
DIRECTORY ". UL SYSTEM NUMBERS INDICATED ARE FOR A PARTICULAR LISTED
INSTALLATION AND ARE FOR GENERAL LNFORMATION AND INTENT. OTHER
LISTED UL SYSTEM DESIGNS MAY BE USED. IN ALL CASES, SUBMIT MATERIALS,
UL SYSTEM DESIGN NUMBERS AND UL DETAILS TO BE USED THROUGHOUT THE
PROJECT AND IDENTIFY WHICH DETAIL IS TO BE USED FOR EACH SPECIFIC
CONDITION. POST REVIEWED DETAIL AT JOB SITE FOR REFERENCE.
1. Only materials tested in the specific UL System Number may be used.
a Wrap Strip (UL System No WL 5001): Nominal 1/4" thick by 2" w ide intumescent
elastomenc material. Manufacturer: 3M Type FS -I95.
1) Use one (1) wrap strip for up to one inch (1") thickness insulation.
2) Use two (2) wrap strips for 11'2" inch and larger thickness insulation.
b. Caulk Manufacturer:
1) 3M Type CP -25 WB+ for all assemblies requiring 3M caulk.
2) For WL3045 and 3046 use Hilti FS61 1A Sealant.
c. Steel Sleeve (stud wall) (UL System 1003): Cylindrical sleeve shall be fabricated
from minimum 0.019" thick (no. 28 gauge) galvanized sheet steel and having a
minimum 2" lap along the longitudinal seam. Length of steel sleeve to be equal to
thickness of wall plus I" such that, when installed. the ends of the sleeve will
project approximately I/2" beyond the surface of the wall on both sides of the wall
assembly. The diameter of the openings cut on each side of the wall assembly
(concentric with pipe) to be 2 to 2 1/2" larger than the outside diameter of pipe such
that, when the steel sleeve is installed, a Ito 1 1/4" annular space will be present
between the steel sleeve and the pipe around the entire circumference of the pipe.
Install sleeve by coiling the sheet steel to a diameter smaller than the through
opening. inserting the coil through the openings and releasing the coil to let it uncoil
against the circular cutouts in the gypsum wallboard layers.
d. Steel Sleet. e (concrete or block wall): For cables, provide sleeve cast in floor /wall
or mortared into CMU wall; optional slees e for UL System No. CAJ 1 175.
e. Forming Material: Minimum one inch (I") thickness mineral -wool batt insulation
material. Tight} pack into sleeve with minimum I/2" recess on ends.
Manufacturer: Thermafiber Salina Insulation.
\ \'ire "Cables•
a. For g) plum frame wall (single cable): Fireproof per UL System No. WL300I.
Opening for cable to be hole -sawed through gypsum wall board layers. Diameter
of opening to be 3/8" to 5.8" inch larger than outside diameter of cable. Cable to
be rigidly' supported on both sides of wall assembly. Caulk to fill annular space
throughout thickness of gypsum wall board layers and apply 1/4" bead of caulk to
perimeter of cable at its egress from wall (both sides).
15050 - 7
b. For gypsum frame wall (multiple cables): Use UL System No. WL3021. WL3045.
WL3046 or equivalent to maintain rating of wall.
c. For concrete walls'floors or CMI.J walls (single or multiple cables): Fireproof per
UL System No. CA.13030. Cables to be a minimum ten percent (1O %). maximum
thirty -three percent (33 %) of cross- sectional area of opening. Recess minimum one
inch (1 ") thickness of mineral wool material into opening around cables. Caulk
openings around cable to minimum depth of one inch (1"). Optional sleeve may be
used per UL detail requirements.
Firestop system shall be installed at top surface of floor and symmetrically on both sides of
wall assemblies.
4. Materials used in firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. provided with materials for specific UL System No.
5. Reference Architectural for the exact location of all rated walls, floors, ceilings and
ceiling/roof assemblies.
B. Manufacturer's- 3M, Metacaulk, Hilti. BioFireshield or equal
C. In non -rated walls identified for sound insulation, provide 1.2" space between pipe and sleeve packed
with multiple layers of forming material. Allow 518" minimum space on each side and caulk with
acoustical sealant.
D. Final condition to prevent passage of fire, smoke, noxious gas and water.
E. For non -rated mechanical :electrical room walls: Seal all piping and ducat ork passing through walls,
floors and ceilings with 3M caulk, Type CP -25 +.
3.04 WATERPROOFING AND COUNTERFLASHING
A. Provide and install all counterflashing of all conduit, pipe or duct and equipment which penetrate walls
and other weather barrier surfaces. Metal Roofing Contractor shall provide and install all
counterflashing for all roof penetrations. Verify detail with Architect before installation.
B. All ss ork shall be performed in a workmanlike manner to assure weatherproof installation. Any leaks
developed shall be repaired at his expense, to Architect's satisfaction.
C. Conduits. pipes or ducts passing through slabs shall have the sleeve extended above floors to retain
any water and the space between the conduit, pipe or duct and sleet e caulked with lead wool. The top
shall be sealed with lead and the bottom shall be sealed with monolastic caulking compound.
D. All ss aterproofing. flashing and counterflashing shall be installed by the Roofing Contractor and shall
be compatible with roofing system so as not to void any roof is arranties. Confirm installation with
Architect.
3.05 LABELING AND TAGGING
A. Tag all salves with heat resistant laminated dark plastic labels engraved with readily legible white
lettering I'4" high indicating fluid in pipe and a P (plumbing) or M (HVAC) number. Securely fasten
to the salve stem or bonnet ss ith beaded chain. Provide a self - closing aluminum valve chart and frame
with glass cover for typewritten director. Install where directed. Refer to Section 15010, and
Manuals.
B. Label all equipment ss ith heat resistant laminated plastic labels having engraved lettering 1/2" high
and fastened in place with rivets or screws. Example "W'H -1, AHU -1, etc." If items are not
15050'- 8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
specifically listed on the schedules, consult the Architect conceming designation to use. Refer to
Section 15010. Label all equipment served by emergency electrical panels with red labels.
C. Label all thermostats and controllers with heat resistant laminated plastic labels having engraved
lettering 1/4" high and fastened in place with rivets or scretss. Label is to correspond to equipment
controlled.
D. Provide access panel markers (laminated engraved plastic type) to indicate ceiling tile to be used for
access for all A/C equipment. terminal units and plumbing shut -off valves. Use light green for
plumbing and light blue for A/C equipment. Label attached to ceiling grid.
E. Manufacturer: Seton Pipe Marking Products or equal.
3.06 TYPICAL PIPING
A. Provide insulating couplings or unions to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals st hen use of
dissimilar metals cannot be avoided in one system.
B. Close all openings in pipes with appropriate caps, plugs, or covers during storage and progress of the
work to preclude introduction of contaminants.
C. Arrange systems and locate valves so that either entire system or separate sections thereof may be
drained for service. All service valves located no more than 24 inches above the ceiling and normally
accessible from an 8 foot ladder.
D. Provide valves and unions adjacent to all tanks. batteries of plumbing fixtures and equipment. for
disconnect purposes. Install all valves with stems vertical 1%herever possible, and in no case with
stems below the horizontal.
E Ream ends of all pipe to full diameter.
F. Provide pipe anchors. swing joints. guides, and expansion compensators as necessary to control the
expansion of pipelines.
G. Reduce pipe sizes using reducing tees or reducing fittings. Bushings not permitted.
H. Provide escutcheons on all pipes passing through walls. floors. and ceilings in finished areas where
piping is in counters, closets or cabinets, and subject to 5 iew when doors are open. Cover the pipe
sleeve and secure plate in position.
I. Install hangers at each change in direction and within 2 feet at each elbow or tee
J. Pipe hooks. wire. chains or perforated metal shall not be used for pipe supports.
K. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping with at least noo layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape.
L. Install piping not to interfere tt ith removal of equipment. ducts, and devices or block access to door
or access openings.
M. Piping serving plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be securely supported near the point where pipes
penetrate the finished wall.
N. Test all piping in accordance with accepted trade standards if not specified elsewhere.
0. Branch connections of chilled and hot water piping above the roof shall be made with a swing joint
with a minimum of; - 90° elbows after tap.
3.07 THREADED PIPE
15050 - 9
A. Cut all threads true and of depth to make up properly without leaks.
B. Make connections to show at least nvo threads and not more than four threads when tight.
C. Make up joints with Teflon tape only as recommended by tape manufacturer, or as specified in specific
piping sections.
3.08 PAINTING AND CODING
A. Ductwork and Piping: Paint all exposed angle braces. hanger rods or straps. damper rods. and
quadrants with one coat aluminum paint after removing scale and rust. Paint ductwork and piping
exposed in finished rooms to match room finish. Coordinate painting and color with Architectural
paint specified elsewhere. All painting done by persons regularl} emplo} ed atand skilled in that trade.
B. Grilles, Registers, Etc.: Furnish all grilles, registers, etc., other than extruded aluminum or plastic with
prime coat paint by manufacturer. Furnish all ceiling grilles. registers and diffusers with factory
applied baked enamel to match ceiling tile. Paint all ductwork and'or conduit visible through registers.
grilles and other openings with one coat of flat black paint to a point four feet (4') from opening on
straight duct or around bend. whichever applies.
C. Pipe Coding:
1. Identify piping with pressure- sensitive coded pipe marker at piping adjacent to equipment,
at intervals along all piping not to exceed 50' and at points where piping disappears into or
emerges from floors. walls, or ceiling. Secure both ends of marker with pressure sensitive
tape with flow arrow on roll to indicate flow direction. Color code pipe markers and arrows
indicating the liquid and/or use of the pipe.
Code piping to the following schedule: (SUBMIT ALTERNATE CODING)
Cold Water Cv'
Hot Water H
Hot Water Circulating HWC
Chilled Water Supply CHS
Chilled Water Return CWR
Hot Water Supply HWS
Hot Water Return HWR
Gas FUEL GAS
Heat Pump Suppl HPS
Heat Pump Return HPR
Condenser Water Supply CWS
Condenser Water Return CWR
Sprinkler SPKR
Condensate Condensate
3. Manufacturer: Seton Pipe Marking Products or equal.
3.09 CONDENSATE DRAINS
A. Provide metallic condensate piping to hub drains Condensate drains ma■ be combined according to
follow ins schedules
EQUIPMENT CAPACITY *MINIMUM PIPE SIZE
Up to 2 tons of refrigeration 3'4'
3 to 5 tons of refrigeration 1
6 to 23 tons of refrigeration 1 -1/4"
*Minimum size of drain shall not be smaller than drain outlet size for unit.
15050 - 10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B. Coordinate mounting heights of units to allow I /4 " /ft. slope for condensate piping to disposal point.
C. Provide cleanout plug at each change of direction.
D. Direct drainage into hub drain. Maintain required air gap.
END OF SECTION
15050 - 11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 15180
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping, Equipment and Duct Insulation
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data including:
1. Schedule of materials by service showing thickness and finish.
2. Thermal properties.
3. Adhesives and sealants.
4. Installation procedures.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Deliver material to fob site in original non- broken factory packaging. labeled with manufacturer's
density and thickness.
B. Perform work at temperatures recommended by the product manufacturer.
C. Insulation shall be applied to clean dry surfaces. Piping shall be tested before insulation is applied
or joints shall be left uncovered until leak tests have been performed.
D. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings (insulation, jacket and adhesive
used to adhere jacket or facing to the insulation), as tested by procedure ASTM E -84, NFPA 255 and
UL 73 not exceeding Flame Spread of 25, Fuel Contributed of 50 and Smoke Developed of 50. All
other component such as adhesives. mastics (except joint sealer). cements, tapes and cloths. etc., shall
also meet these ratings. ASTM -E84 -25'50 rating should be clearly marked on each joint of insulation.
E. All flexible elastomeric insulation shall be guaranteed free from defects in materials and workmanship
and insulation and its glue system will not suffer deterioration due to effects of sunlight, moisture
penetration, weathering or ozone exposure. Furthermore. insulation manufacturer certifies that
insulation and its glue system does not contain any constituents which could potentially cause stress
corrosion cracking or pit corrosion. including but not limited to: ammonia, ammonia chloride,
ammonium hydroxide. ammonium nitrite, elemental mercury. mercurous nitrate, sulfides, sulfurous
compounds. cyanides and hydrogen chloride. If it can be shown that the insulation or its glue system
contains any ingredients n hich cause corrosion, regardless of the environment, the manufacturer will
pay for all replacement costs.
F Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the Midwest Insulation Contractor's Association
(MICA) Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards. 1983 as required by the Energy
Conservation Design Standard for New State Buildings.
PART? - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Insulation
1. Armstrong
2. Certain Teed
3. KNAUF
4. OWENS- CORNING
5. PITTSBURG CORNING
15180 -1
2 02 MATERIALS
6. SCHULLER
B. Adhesives, Sealants and Finishes,
1. 3M
2. Childers
3. Foster
4. IMCOA -FUSE SEAL SYSTEM
5. Pittsburg Corning
6. Thermal Ceramics
A. Cellular Glass: 8.5 pcf density, 0.45 K factor at 200 ° F pipe covering. vake and fitting covers, curved
segments and block.
B. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 6 pcf density, pre - molded pipe covering with white all service vapor
barrier jacket and pressure sensitive adhesive longitudinal lap seal. 0.23 K factor at 75 ° F.
C. Fiberglass Blanket: 1.5 pcf density, glass fiber blanket with foil scrim Kraft vapor barrier jacket.
minimum total R value of 6.0 at 75 F., 0.75 pcf concealed. 1.0 pcf exposed.
D. Cellular Foam Insulation: Flexible, cellular foam elastomertc thermal insulation with 0.27 K- factor
at 75 ° F. Armstrong Armaflex or approved equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3 01 PREPARATION
A. Do not install covering before ducts ork and equipment hate been tested and approved.
B. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation.
C. Apply finishes with s) stem at operating conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install all insulation and apply all sealants and finishes in strict accordance with manufacturer's
printed installation procedures
B. Insulation shall be continuous through wall, floor and ceding openings and sleeves.
C. At all pipe hanger locations where the insulation must resist compression and piercing, supporting
devices must be used in combination with metal hanger shields. Supporting devices such as cork
stoppers. short lengths of wood dotoels, wood blocks or polyoleftn dowels which have the same
thickness of the insulation may be used. Coat the dowel is ith an approved adhesive before insertion
into the insulation and coat the outer surface to provide a vapor seal. Protect insulation at hangers,
guides and rollers with 16 gauge galvanized metal saddles and a section of rigid cellular glass
Insulation a minimum of 12" long and V2 circumference of the insulation.
D. Repair separation ofjoints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship.
E. Locate seams in least visible locations.
F. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation:
15180 -2
1
1. Insulation shall be applied to piping with butt joints staggered an all joints tightly butted and
sealed with Foster 95 -60 or Engineer accepted equivalent water based joint sealant.
2. The joint sealer shall cover the joint surface through the entire thickness of the insulation and
shall be applied to the mating butt ends of succeeding sections of insulation to insure that
a thin continuous seal is provided for the full length and depth of each joint.
3. Insulation shall be secured with stainless steel bands at a rate of two (2) bands per section
of insulation.
4. Over the installed and sealed insulation apply a tack coat of Pit coat 404 or Engineer
accepted equivalent vapor barrier mastic at the rate of nvo to three gallons per one hundred
square feet. Embed a layer of reinforcing fabric into the tack coat (PC Fabric 79 or engineer
accepted equivalent) while wet. overlapping all joints a minimum of 3 ". Fabric shall be
applied smooth without wrinkles. Over the fabric apply a second coat of mastic (before the
tack coat cures) at the rate of four gallons per one hundred square feet. There shall be no
fabric visible through the final coat of mastic.
5. Apply all service vapor barrier jacketing with a tack coat of Foster 30 -80 or Engineer
accepted equivalent vapor barrier mastic. overlap longitudinal joint. Seal butt joints and
longitudinal joints with 4" wide pressure sensitive all service jacket tape.
6. Valves. Fittings. Strainers, and Flanges: Fabricate covers of cellular glass of the same
thicknessas the adjointing pipe. Seal and finish in the same fashion as pipe insulation.
G. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
I. Apply insulation to pipe and seal longitudinal seam with pressure sensitive Foster 85 -60
water base adhesive. Seal butt joints with vapor barrier adhesive. Finish with vapor barrier
adhesive and 4" butt strips of facing material. Overlap adjacent pipe 2" minimum.
2. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves. fittings. flanges, etc.. and at 21' intervals on
continuous runs with vapor barrier sealant.
3. Fittings: Apply insulation to the same thickness as the adjoining pipe. Finish with white
PVC fitting covers and seal all joints with PVC adjesive and 2" PVC tape. Finish shall
overlap adjacent insulation by 2" minimum.
4. Valves. Strainers and Flanges Cold Service: Pro. ide covers fabricated from insulation of the
same thickness as the adjoining pipe. Overlap the adjacent insulation by 4" minimum. Pack
.olds with glass fiber blanket. Apply vapor barrier Foster 85 -60 ater base adhesive to all
butt joints. Fabricate in a minimum of sections to facilitate service and replacement. Finish
. ith white PVC fitting covers and seal all joints.. ith PVC adhesive and 2" PVC tape.
5. Valves and Strainers Hot Service: Insulate valves as described above for cold service. Do
not insulate unions. flanges and expansion joints. Terminate insulation on a bevel with
plastic troweled material.
6. Protect insulation at hangers. guides and rollers with 16 ga. galvanized metal saddles and a
section of rigid cellular glass insulation a minimum of 12" long and % circumference of the
insulation.
7. Insulate p -traps of floor drains and hub drains receiving condensate from air conditioning
units.
H. Fiberglass Duct Insulation
I. Concealed ducts shall be insulated with blanket insulation.
15180 -3
8. Air distribution devices shall be insulated with blanket insulation.
9. Provide a section of rigid cellular glass insulation a minimum of 12" wide at trapeze hangers.
1. Cellular Foam Pipe Insulation
Apply pipe insulation as recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Stagger all butt joints and longitudinal joints. Co erjoints when multiple layers are used.
3. Seal all joints and seam with Foster 82 -31 or Armstrong 520 adhesive or Engineer accepted
equivalent.
4. Insulation finish shall be suitable for field painting.
3.03 MATERIAL SCHEDULE
A. Piping
I. Refrigerant Suction cellular foam
2. Domestic Cold Water fiberglass
3. Domestic Hot Water fiberglass
4. Condensate Drain foamed plastic
B. Ductwork
2. Ducts exposed to view, outdoors or indoors, shall be insulated with board insulation.
3. Apply insulation to duct with ends firmly butted. Compress duct wrap a maximum of 2540.
4. Adhere insulation with Foster 85 -60 water base adhesive applied in 6" wide strips around
the duct perimeter 16" on center.
5. On ducts 18" wide or over. additionally secure w ith mechanical fasteners 16" on center.
6. Overlap the facing on longitudinal seam a minimum of 2" and seal with 100% coverage of
Foster 85 -60 water base adhesive. Staple in place with outward clinch staples.
7. Seal all staple and fastener penetrations and any other breaks in the vapor barrier with vapor
barrier mastic and 4" wide strips of facing material as the adjacent insulation adhered with
100% coverage of Foster 30 -80 water based adhesive.
I. Supply Air Ducts fiberglass
2. Outside Air Ducts fiberglass
3. Return Air Ducts fiberglass
4. Relief Air Ducts fiberglass
5. Exhaust Ducts fiberglass
3.04 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULES
A. Hot and Cold Piping
15180 -4
INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULES
Hot and Cold Piping
Pipe Size
(Inches)
Pipe Temperature ( ° F) 1 1 -1/4 4 8 Over
Or Tess Ina to 6 to 12 12
251 to 350 2.0 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
201 to 250 1.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 3.5
141 to 200 1.0 1.5 2 0 2.0 2.5
40 to 60 1 0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2
RS for DX Refrigeration 1.0 1 5 1.5 1.5
Domestic CU' Supply 0.5 1.0 1.0 15
Domestic HWS & HWR 0.5 1.0 1.5 1.5
Roof Drain Bodies & Piping 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 _
Piping Exposed to Ambient 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 3 5
Temperatures*
*Denotes all piping outside the insulated and conditioned envelope of a building
END OF SECTION
15180 -5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes general requirements, products. and methods of execution relating to
excavation. backfill. and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those
which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the
structure.
B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of eN ery description and of whale%er substance
encountered to the depth indicated. or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawings.
Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material. Compact backfill
material.
C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drawings.
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES
A. Local Codes and Ordinances
B. Texas Safety Standards
C. OSHA - Section 1926 650
1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and
comply with all requirements of Public Law 91- 696. 29 U.S.C. Secs 65I et. seq., the Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with
all of the provisions of this Act. In addition. on projects in which trench excavation will exceed a
depth of five feet. the contractor and all of its subcontractors shall comply with all requirements of 29
C.F.R Secs. 1926.652 and 1926.653. OSHA Safety and Health Standards
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL
15190 -1
2 02 TRENCH BACKFILL
SECTION 15190
INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH
EXCAVATION. BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If
suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation. import it from sources approved by
the Architect.
B Use granular material. free from large stones, boulders and debris Maximum aggregate size passing
a two inch (2") sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified
compaction.
C. For plastic and copper piping. bed pipe and surround for 2" in all directions, with washed sand free
of stones.
A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material
compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation. import it from sources
approved by the Architect.
B. Use granular material, free from large stones. boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within
a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches (4 ").
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner. and in conformance vv ith safety
codes.
B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling.
C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are
encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with
select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing
piping.
3.02 LOCATION
A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings.
B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes.
C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements.
3.03 DERATERING
A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water
in the excavation.
3.04 TIMING
A. Do to backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested. inspected and approved.
B. Coordinate with the work of others. and complete all trench work in a timely manner.
3.05 BEDDING
A Place bedding material under. around. and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth.
B. Rork material around pipe by hand methods. taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of
contact w ith the pipe. and to provide uniform support for the pipe.
C. Cover pipe w ith bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12" depth before adding other
backfill
3.06 BACKFILLING
A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade, or as shown
on the drawings.
B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth.
3.07 COMPACTION
15190 -2
A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95% of maximum density. taking care not to damage the pipe.
B. Compact all backfill under footings. slabs, and other structures to 959. of maximum density or more.
if required by the Architect.
C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlement. and at least 85% of maximum density.
3.08 FINISHING
A. After completion of backfilling. dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade.
B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to
prevent pipe damage.
3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations.
B. Minimize number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls.
C. Support footings. foundations. and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible
chance of damage. and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage.
D. Backfill under footings and bearing c alls, using maximum compaction or concrete of proportions as
specified for footings.
E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services, foundations. cables. conduit lines or foundations
Repair an existing underground as ork accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner
END OF SECTION
15190 -3
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL
3.01 EXCAVATION
1. Section 15010 - General Provisions
2. Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
3. Division 2 - Site Work
A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings.
15191 - I
SECTION 15191
OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH
EXCAVATION. BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
B. Description: This section described general requirements, products. and methods of execution relating
to excavation, backfill, and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings. The arbitrary line of
demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5' outside the building perimeter.
C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and
comply with all requirements of Public Law 91- 696.29 U.S.0 Secs. 651 et. seq.. the Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto. and to WHICH TRENCH
EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET. THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF
ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS.
1926 652 AND 1926.653, OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS.
D. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this Mork The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drat ings.
A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If
suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by
the Architect.
B Use granular material. free from large stones. boulders and debris maximum aggregate size passing
a 2" sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction.
C. For plastic piping. bed pipe and surround for 2" in all directions. with sand free of stones.
2 02 TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material
is not available from trench excavation. import it from sources approved by the Architect.
B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris Maintain moisture content within
a range that will alloy. specified compaction. maximum aggregate size 4 inches.
PART3- EXECUTION
B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill m an orderly manner and in conformance with safety
codes.
Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling.
D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are
encountered. remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade. fill to required depth with
granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing pipine.
3.02 LOCATION
A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings.
B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes.
C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements.
3.03 DE- WATERING
A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in
the excavation.
3.04 TIMING
A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested. inspected. and approved.
B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench M ork in a timely manner.
3.05 BEDDING
A. Place bedding material under. around. and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth.
B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of
contact with the pipe, and to provide untform support for the pipe.
C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6" depth before adding other backfill.
D. Cover water line weh 18" bedding material before backfilling.
3 06 BACKFILLING
A Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade. or as shown on
the drawing
B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth.
3.07 COMPACTION
A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95% of maximum density. taking care not to damage the pipe.
B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement. or at least to 90% of maximum density.
3.08 FINISHING
A. After completion of backfilling. dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade.
B Restore all surface areas to original conditions, or improve as shown on the drawings. Replace all
paving. base course. gravel surfacing. sub -base, topsoil, or other existing finished surface as shown
on drawings.
15191 - 2
C. Clean up and finish all construction areas to orieinal condition or better.
END OF SECTION
15194 -3
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 15400
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes specific requirements, products. and methods of execution relating to the
domestic water distribution system for the project.
B. The work of this section includes: All water distribution work inside the structure. and all outside
distribution work up to and including connection to the water source. including. provision of the
outside water source, or water using apparatus, although the work of this section does include the
interface connections at all of these related items.
C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications. determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID COPPER TUBING, 1n° - 2 12"
A. Pipe: Type "L" hard drawn copper
B. Fittings: Cast or wrought copper or brass.
C. Joints: Sweat type, high temperature lead free solder. Threaded with union or flange at equipment
connections.
2.02 CONTINUOUS COPPER TUBING, 1 2" - 2"
A. Pipe: Type "K" soft drawn copper.
B. Fittings: None below slab or grade.
C Joints: None below slab or grade.
203 VALVES
A. Refer to Section 15050.
2.04 TEMPERING VALVES
A. Under each lavaton and sink provided with hot water. provide and install a Watts Model USG - B
(hidden) or USG -B -SC (exposed) tempering valve set at 110 degrees F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL METHODS
A. Make all joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The tools used shall be the tools
adapted to that specific purpose
B At all fixtures. install and connect hot water on left and cold eater on right, as viewed when facing the
fixture.
15400 - I
C. Where required for connections to fixtures, equipment items. etc.. employ lengths of red brass pipe
with threaded ends of copper to IPS adapters, brass couplings. etc.. to the end that there shall be no
ferrous pipe in any water piping system.
D. Provide valves on each branch line at the point of connection into the supply and circulating mains
serving all batteries of plumbing fixtures. Provide stop valves in each water supply for even plumbing
fixture.
E. Provide air chambers minimum 18" lone, same size as supply line or 3'-1" minimum or PDI rated water
hammer arresters with accessible isolation valve equal to Wade Shok -stops or Sioux Chief Water
Hammer Arresters on cold water and hot water supplies to plumbing fixtures. Provide access door for
all concealed arresters. Shok -stops shall not be installed in the pendant position.
F. Install vacuum breakers on all plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur and
on boiler make -up lines and hose bibbs.
G. No pipe dope shall be employed upstream of flush valves and other control devices.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test all water piping hydrostatically at 80 psig for a period of 6 hours. Observe piping during this
period and repair all leaks. Protect vessels, relief valves. and other devices during test.
3 03 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS
A. Sterilize each unit of completed supply line and distribution system with chlorine before acceptance
for domestic operation. or connection to supply.
B. Accomplish sterilization as described below or by the system prescribed by the American Water
Works Association Standard C -601. Apply the amount of chlorine to provide a dosage of not less than
50 pans per million. Provide chlorine manufactured in conformance to the following standards:
1 Liquid Chlorine: Federal Specification BB -C -120,
2. Hypochlorite• Federal Specification 0- C -114a. Type 11. Grade 13. or Federal Specification
0 -X -602.
C. Introduce the chlorinating material to the water lines and distribution system after piping system has
been thoroughly flushed. After a contract period of not less than 24 hours. flush the system with clean
water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 part per million.
D. Open and close all salves in the lines being sterilized se%eral times during above chlorination.
E The sterilization process shall be done by persons nshose major business is water treatment and
sterilization. Pay all costs and charges associated to this test and certification
F. Certify in writing that sterilization has been completed in accordance with these requirements.
3.04 PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULE
SYSTEM PIPE 'FITTINGS JOINTS NOTES
Hot and cold water Rigid Copper Sw eat
above slab or grade to 2 I 2"
Hot and cold w ater Continuous Copper None (1)
below slab to 2"
Cold water above slab or grade. Steel A. Threaded
15400 -2
Notes:
1) Includes work below grade, within a plan envelope 5' 0" outside the building envelope.
Where PVC with solvent welded or mechanical joints is locally approved for water below
grade. and is employed for site utility work, that piping may be continued from the 5' 0" point
up to 6" above finished grade, and there be connected to the "above slab" pima material
with a suitable Flanged or union connection.
END OF SECTION
15400 -3
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 15405
LIQUID WASTE TRANSFER
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 DESCRIPTION
A. Description
1. This section describes specific requirements. products. and methods of execution relating to
the transfer of liquid waste for the project. The work of this section includes providing the
following piped systems:
a. Sanitary waste and vent.
b. Storm and overflow.
c. Indirect waste drain. vent and relief for plumbing equipment.
d. Indirect waste drain, vent and relief not provided for project equipment in other
Sections.
B. SPECIAL NOTE. All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
di% isions of these specifications. determine the extent of Impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drab inns.
1.02 CONNECTION TO UTILITY SEWER AND STORM SYSTEMS
A Final wastewater connection point to extend approximately five feet (5') outside the building, as
indicated on the drawings Coordinate with Civil Drawings for wastehater service point to within five
feet (5') of the building Coordinate with site utilities to insure proper Inverts for all lines and
connection point prior to installation. Contact Architect immediately if any conflict is discovered.
Make final connection to service line.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CAST IRON PIPE WITH CAULKED JOINTS. 2" - 10"
A. Pipe. Cast iron. service «eight with hub and spigot joints.
B. Fittings• Drainage pattern
C. Joints: Caulk with white oakum and lead.
2.02 CAST IRON PIPE WITH COUPLED JOINTS. 11.2" - 10"
A. Pipe Cast iron, service height. with plain ends
B. Fittings: Drainage pattern.
C. Joints. Tyler no -hub or Clamp -all couplings with Neoprene sleeve and stainless steel clamp and
shield. T. pe 304.
2.03 CAST IRON PIPE WITH GASKETED JOINTS, 2" - 15"
A. Pipe. Cast iron. service weight with hub spigot joints
1 5405 - 1
B. Fittings: Drainage pattern.
C. Joints: Tyler Ty -seal neoprene gaskets.
2.04 PVC DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, Type I. Grade 1120, per ASTM D -1784 with hole and spigot joints.
B. Fittings: Drainage pattern.
C. Joints: Solvent weld.
2.05 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
A. Copper or brass DWV piping. smaller than 2 ". for above grade use. Chrome plated if exposed.
B. PVC ss here concealed and connected to PVC waste system.
2.06 STEEL
A. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel.
B. Fittings: Schedule 40 galvanized malleable iron.
C. Joints: Threaded
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
A. Install pipe and fittings to required grade with hubs and bottom half section in undisturbed soil.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A Refer to Section 15050.
3.03 GRADING
A. Grade all horizontal runs of pipe in building and under Floor slab at I,'4" per foot downward in
direction of flow. If it is absolutely impossible to maintain a grade of 1/4" per foot, piping four (4)
inches in diameter and larger may slope to a minimum grade of not less than 1 /8" per foot.
3.04 SUPPORTING
3 05 CLEANOUT TEES
Support all horizontal runs of pipe in building at intervals not to exceed 5' -0" and at each change of
direction Provide a support at the base of vertical risers with intermediate supports as required.
Brace all adequately to present motion. per manufacturer's recommendation.
A. Provide cleanout tees as sltostn on plans and in an accessible location at base of all risers in soil, waste
and dram piping and at each change in direction in horizontal runs of pipe. In long straight runs,
provide a cleanout at even 75 feet (maximum) for piping four inches (4 ") and larger and at a
maximum of every 50 feet for piping less than four inches (4 ").
3 06 VENTING
A. Provide a vent for each trap and as shown on the drawings.
15405 - 2
B. Extend each vent vertically to a point not less than six inches (6 ") above the extreme overflow level
of the fixture served before offsetting horizontally. Whenever two or more vent pipes converge.
extend each such pipe at least six inches (6 ") in height above the flood rim level of the plumbing
fixture it serves before being connected to any other vent and utilize only approved drainage fittings
and materials to connect piping.
C Provide a building main relief vent for waste piping not provided tenting by fixture branch
connections. Vent size shall be per code requirement, based upon fixture unit loading in the pipe
vented.
3.07 VENTS THROUGH ROOF
A. Extend vents through the roof a minimum distance of 6" and terminate at least 15 ft. horizontally from
operable windows. doors. or air intakes. and at least 3 feet above such opening. Do not terminate
vents through roof at edge. ridge, or valley amid. Secure t ent below roof surface.
B. Flash and counterflash vents through roof. Provide flashings not less than 18" square. with
prefabricated 4 -pound lead counterflashing. Extend vertical portion of flashing up entire length of
pipe and turn dots n inside the pipe at least I inch with turned edge hammered against pipe. Coordinate
with type roof and Architectural details and flash them into roof according to the roofing products
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Protect the roof from tools and equipment. Remove all scraps on roof to prevent damage to roof.
3.08 GENERAL
A. No piping shall be permanently concealed before the examination is completed by the authorities
having jurisdiction.
B All fixtures used in conjunction with the conveying ofttaste substance shall be connected by means
of a trap.
C. All connections for floor mounted water closets and waste piping shall be made with appropriate closet
flange and wax gaskets.
3 09 TESTING
A. Test all piping in accordance with the requirements of the applicable codes.
B. Repair leaks and retest system. repeating this process until piping system is free of leaks
C. Test shall be conducted and completed before an} joints are concealed or made inaccessible.
D. Maintain a log of tests indicating date. time, result of test. person doing test, and observers.
3.10 INDIRECT WASTE PIPING
A Indirect waste provided under other Sections.
1. HVAC condensate
B. Route condensate dram line from plumbing equipment requiring drainage to nearest floor drain or
disposal point. Coordinate locations and sizes with equipment actually furnished Slope all piping
to drain at minimum 1/8" per foot. Minimum size of drain shall not be smaller than drain outlet size
for unit.
C. Coordinate mounting heights of units to allow adequate slope for piping to disposal point.
D. Provide cleanout plug at end of each main run
15405 - 3
3.11 PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Notes:
SYSTEM PIPE'FITTINGS JOINTS
Inside Building
Gravity waste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked
above slab B. Cast Iron Coupled
C. PVC Sch. 40 Solvent Weld
Gravity waste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked
below slab B. Cast Iron Gasketed
C. PVC Sch. 40 Solvent Veld
Gravity waste and vent
below grade
Hot drain
A. Cast Iron
B Cast Iron
C. PVC Sch. 40
Condensate drain A. Copper drain Soft solder
B. PVC Sch. 80 Threaded
C. Steel Threaded
A. Copper drain High temp. solder
B. Steel Threaded
Relief A. Copper pressure Silver braze
B. Steel Threaded
Outside Building
Gravity ssaste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked
below grade B. Cast Iron Gasketed
C. PVC Sch. 40 Soh ent Weld
I) "Inside building' includes work within plan envelope 5' 0" from outside edge of building
ens elope.
2) Plastic only if allosted by the authority having jurisdiction. Plastic shall not be used in return
air plenums. nor in apentop chases connected to plenums.
3) Couplings exposed to moisture shall be galvanized.
4) Pressure pattern finings may be used on vent piping which is 6" above the flood rim of the
highest fixture vented to a vent terminal Wallowed by the authority having jurisdiction.
5) For sanitary waste pipin receiving waste potentially above 120 degree F, neoprene gaskets
and couplings are not permitted. If waste is above 140 degree F, PVC is not permitted.
"Potentially" includes occasional use such as boiler and water heater dram, blowdown and
relief val\ es. as well as regular use such as disho asher and laundry drains. "Not permitted"
means not permitted in any waste and vent connected to a common vent terminal and/or
common building sewer with the drain receiving high temperature waste, and extending
upward 6" above the flood rim of the drain and downward to the utility sewer connection.
6) See text.
END OF SECTION
15405 - 4
Caulked
Gasketed
Solvent Weld
NOTES
5, 1.4
2 , 5
5
2, 5
5
2. 5
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 15410
FUEL GAS SYSTEMS: (NATURAL)
A. Description: This section describes specific requirements, products. and methods of execution relating
to the provision of Fuel Gas Systems for the project.
B. Scope: Provide all products, including above and below ground piping. all connection to gas burning
apparatus, and all work at the gas source to provide a complete system.
C SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications. determine the extent of impact on the Al ork required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drawings.
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES
A. Provide all products and installation in strict accordance w ith the following:
I. Standard Gas Code
2. NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code
3. Local Ordinances
4. Local Utility Rregulations
1 03 CONNECTION TO UTILITY COMPANY GAS METER
A. The local gas utility company will provide underground piping to the new meter location and the new
meter. Coordinate with the utility company to establish the precise meter location, and to properly
integrate their work with the other work of the project. Provide the connection at the gas
ineter,'regulator outlet using appropriate materials, compatible joints. supports, and all other products
for proper interface. Verify that the utility company has inspected, tested. and approved their work
before connecting to the outlet of the meter.'regulator assembly. Provide necessary protection against
damage for meter.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. Schedule 40 black steel piping and fittings and conforms to standard Specifications for Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipe. ASTM Designation A53. T} pe E or S.
B. Low Pressure (under 14" hater column): Schedule 40 black steel pipe with black malleable iron
fittings. threaded or welded black steel pipe and fittings.
C Pressure 14" water column and greater: Welded Schedule 40 black steel pipe and fitting.
D. Wrap below ground piping w ith .1M Trantex pipeline tape E -20, protective pipe coating and in
accordance with local gas utility company regulations.
E. Piping (outside underground. medium and low pressure) Polyethylene t pe approved for gas service
at pressure encountered (ASTM D3261 -1931) Butt heat fusion joints. Install per manufacturer's
recommendations. All risers up to building to be black steel as specified from elbow up below grade,
including elbow.
15410 -1
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS IN CONTACT WITH GAS
A. Provide line -size, lever - handle. stopcock of a type designated and approved for handling gas at each
gas - consuming appliance.
B. All products bear the AGA and UL label for the use intended.
2.03 METER - BY UTILITY CO.
2.04 HIGH PRESSURE REGULATOR - BY UTILITY CO.
2.05 MEDIUM PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Provide medium pressure regulator with dirt leg and gas cock upstream of each appliance. Mount
regulator so vent is not subject to weather damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange all products to be readily accessible for inspection. testing. and shutting off of gas supply.
B. Install all pipe and fittings clean and free from cuttings, burrs. and defects in structure or threading.
and thoroughly brushed and scale blown.
C. All gas piping 2 1 /2" and larger or concealed piping shall be Melded (by certified welder). Use chill
rings throughout.
D. Do not install any gas piping in concrete or masonry, or below slab.
E. Provide connection at all gas consuming appliances.
F Provide underground stub up for connection to gas meter as required by Gas Company for meter
support.
G. Paint all exposed gas piping. Riser to match building.
H. Provide a wrench operated plug cock valve at building entrance.
I. Install dirt legs located in accessible position at each piece of equipment and regulator. They shall be
no smaller than the gas main .t finch they drain. End of din leg shall ha. e a suitably sized threaded
malleable iron black cap.
J. All branch outlets must be taken off the top of all horizontal lines.
K Provide swing joint with minimum of 3 - 90 elbows after tap.
3.02 TESTING
A Test all gas piping before connection to the gas source. Do not enclose or conceal any untested
portion of the gas system.
B. Test all piping in accordance with plumbing code. Test pressure to be 60 psi, soap all joints and
eliminate leaks.
C. Obtain a certificate of final inspection from the Administrative Authority and provide a letter stating
all gas piping has been tested successfully.
15410 - 2
END OF SECTION
15410 -3
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 15450
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included
1. This section describes certain components of domestic plumbing, systems, including, related
specific requirements, products and methods of e■ecution. Plumbing water, waste and s ent
piping, and other primary distribution components of the plumbing, system are included with
related a ork specified elsewhere
B. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the
Mork required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR DRAINS
A. All floor drains to be the same size as waste line size indicated on plans. If size not indicated, drain
size shall be 3 ". Provide trap primer for each floor and hub drain unless noted otherwise.
FD - (General Purpose): C.1 body, flashing collar. weepholes, adjustable satin nickel bronze square
top (6" x 6 "). Josam 30000 -S Series
FD - (General Purpose): C.I. body. flashing collar, weepholes, adjustable satin nickel bronze round
top (6" diameter). Josam 30000 -A Series.
FD - (General Purpose): C.I body. flashing collar. seepholes. adjustable satin nickel bronze round
top (7" diameter). Josam 30000 -A Series.
- (Hub Drain): C.I. body, round strainer with satin bronze finish. Josam 30000-El Series.
B. Manufacturer's: Josam, Wade, Zurn. J.R. Smith.
2 02 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts shall be same nominal size of pipe lines up to four incites (4 ") and not less than four inches
(4 ") for larger lines.
B. Floor Cleanouts: Gas and watertight seal. internal taper ABS cleanout plug. satin nickel bronze finish
scoriated round top with countersunk screw for installation flush with finish floor. In carpeted areas,
provide carpet ring. Josam 56000 Series.
C
Wall Cleanouts: Countersunk plugs. with smooth round or square access cover, polished stainless
steel.
D. Manufacturer's: Josam, Zurn, Wade. approved equal.
2.03 FIXTURES
A. The fixtures are chosen from standard manufacturers.
15450 - I
B. Provide all similar fixtures and trim from one (I) manufacturer. except where specified others ise.
C. Acceptable Manufacturer's:
2.04 TRAPS, STOPS AND SUPPLIES
A. Provide traps. stops and supplies for all fixtures.
B. P- Traps: 17 gauge chrome - plated cast brass. Trap adapters shall be slip joint.
C. Supplies: Flexible. chrome - plated. 7538 Series.
D. Stops: wheel handle type. 2302 Series.
E. Acceptable Manufacturer's: American Standard, Brass Craft. McGuire.
2.06 Provide air chambers minimum eighteen inches (18 ") in length or PDI rated water hammer arresters equal to
Wade Shok -Stops on cold water and hot water supplies to plumbing fixtures. Provide access door for all
concealed arresters.
2.07 Fixtures Specified under other Divisions. Provide appropriate strainer. tailpiece. trap, waste and supplies.
Rough -in and connect only.
2.08 No lead materials shall be used in construction of fixtures used in potable water systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 04 Fixture setting:
1. Fixtures: American Standard. Crane. Eljer, Kohler. Oasis, Elkay, Universal Rundel.
2.
Faucets:American Standard. Moen, Bradley, Elkay. Chicago. Eljer, Kohler. T & S Brass.
3. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay. Bradley, Just.
4. Carriers: J.R. Smith. Josam. Zum.
5. Flush Valves: Sloan. Delaney.
6. Mixing Valves: Powers, Leonard, Symmons.
3.01 Store all fixtures and trim above ground in a covered location not subject to accidental damage by traffic or
other construction activities. Handle fixtures and trim carefully to avoid chipping. denting, scratching, or other
damage. Replace damaged items with same item in new condition.
3 02 Pros ide permanent metal and wire positioners. supports and fixture carriers to secure fixtures and piping rigidly
in proper alignment without sway or sideplay.
3.03 Anchor all fixtures securely to withstand applied vertical load of not less than 250 pounds on the front of the
fixture. without noticeable movement.
A. At existing finishes: Install all fixtures plumb, level and flush to the finished Architectural surface,
so that the maximum gap between the fixture and the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch. Grout under
water closets to level fixtures. Caulk the edge of the joint between fixture and surface with silicone
or bung type waterproof caulking compound
B At new finishes: Verify that fixture fits plumb, level and flush to the finished surface. Do not use
grout to level fixtures. Caulk the edge of the joint between fixture and surface with silicone or butyl
n waterproof caulking compound.
3.05 Adjust all functional components for proper operation in accordance w ith manufacturer's recommendations,
or as otherwise directed.
15450 - 2
1
1
1
1
'1
1
1
1
1
1
'1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.06 Clean all fixtures and trim thoroughly to spotlessly clean condition. Obtain a written certification from the
Architect that this has been accomplished.
3.07 Where floor drains or janitor sinks are located over any room. pro%ide waterproof installation
3.08 Ensure final location of cleanouts have ample clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage s■ stem. Check
locations before Installation. Contact Architect for alternate location if maintenance clearance is a problem.
Cleanouts to be moved at no additional cost to Owner for failure to coordinate locations.
3.09 Coordinate slope of floors to floor drains. Adjust height of floor drain :rate top so it is slightly below the
adjacent finished floor.
3.10 Provide all adapters, flanges. gaskets. etc. as required for proper installation of fiytures. Coordinate fiyture
placement before core drilling of floor or sleeve installation.
3.11 No offset flanges will be allowed for installation of water closets.
END OF SECTION
15450 - 3
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 15600
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
D - X SYSTEMS
A. This section describes specific requirements, products. and methods and execution relating to the D -X
mechanical equipment for the project. -
B. Provide complete operating installation for all systems shown and specified. Air handling unit and
condensing unit shall be from single manufacturer.
C. The manufacturer is to provide wiring diagrams for specific equipment to the Controls Contractor for
proper coordination.
D. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications. determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 AIR HANDLING UNIT
A. Air handler shall be a factory assembled unit. UL listed with blower. heaters, steel casing, and
completely wired. Air handler and coil section may be bolted together in field but must be a mated
pair from a single manufacturer.
B. Cabinet
2. Internal dram pan (factory installed).
C. Blower:
I. Centrifugal type, dynamical') and statical) balanced.
D. Heaters:
I. At least 22 gauge cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish. Interior of cabinet around
electric heating elements shall be lined with 1'2 inch thick 1 112 Ib. density fiberglass
insulation. Filter access panel shall have quick access latches (screw type fasteners not
acceptable).
2 Direct driven multi -speed blower, factory installed with at least three blower speeds.
I . Nickel - chromium staged elements (os er 5 kw) a ith 5 year warranty. Element sequenced on.
2. Each set of heaters shall be equipped ss ith limit control with fixed temperature "OFF" setting
and automatic reset with supplemental thermal cut -off safety fuses.
3. Provide fan time -delay relay and circuit breakers. Air handler shall have manually reset
transformer.
E. Cooling Coil:
15600 - I
1. Factory leak- tested, dehydrated, sealed and shipped with holding charge.
2. Coil installed in baked on enamel finish insulated casing.
3. Staggered row copper tube, aluminum fins. -
4. Coils to be ARI certified.
5. Provide with thermal expansion valve.
F. Filter:
1. Provide one inch (I ") thick throw -away type as furnished by air handler Manufacturer.
G. Electrical:
I. All units provided for single electrical connection point.
H. Approved Manufacturer's: Trane, Carrier or York.
2.02 CONDENSING UNITS /HEAT PUMPS
A. Condenser coil shall have copper tubes with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded.
B. Fans shall be direct driven propeller upflow type.
I. Fan motor thermostatically controlled, permanently lubricated. and designed with permanent
protection.
2. Motors shall be resiliently mounted.
3 Each fan shall have a safety guard.
C. Unit shall be capable of operation in the cooling mode dossn to a minimum of 45° F. unless otherwise
noted.
D. Compressor shall be of hermetic design with the following features Each condensing unit shall have
one (I) compressor.
1. Externally mounted brass service valves with charging connections.
2. Crankcase heater (except on scroll compressor).
3. Resilient rubber mounts.
4. Compressor motor overload protection.
E. Controls
I Factor} o ired and located in separate enclosure
High and loss pressure cutout and condenser fan motor overload devices.
3. Off -cycle timer to prevent short- cycling of compressor and shall prevent compressor from
restarting for 5 minutes if poster is interrupted.
4. Heat pump unit shall be supplied with outdoor air thermostat that will not allow simultaneous
operation of compressor and heater. Set adjustable thermostat at 25 F.
15600 - 2
F. Casing:
1. Fully weatherproof for outdoor installation. Baked -on enamel finish on all exterior surfaces.
2. Openings shall be provided for power and refrigerant connections. .
3. Panels shall be removable for servicing.
G. Provide charging valves for each unit.
H. Thermostat:
1. Auto - changeover heat Honeywell T874 tt ith appropriate subbase.
I. Manufacturer's: Trane, Carrier or York.
2.03 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install refrigeration system complete as a system pith all refrigerant. oil. valves.
dehydrators, gauges. flex connections, and controls as required for proper operation.
B. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Meet requirements of ASTM B 280 -83. "Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service ".
C. Refrigerant Fittings:
1. Wrought hard temper Type "L" copper with long radius elbows.
2 Approved Manufacturer's:
a. Mueller Streamline
b. Engineer approved equal
D Suction Line Traps:
I. Manufactured with one (I) 90 short radius elbow and two (2) 45 fittings
E. Connection Material-
For Brazing- -
a Sil -Phos or Easy Flow (minimum 10% silver content).
F. Expansion Valves:
I. Provide thermal expansion sale for each s). stem.
2. Size valves to provide full rated capacity of cooling coil served.
G. Filter- Drier:
I • On lines 3' 4" outside diameter and larger. filter -drier shall be replaceable core type with non-
ferrous casing and Schraeder type valve.
2. On lines smaller than 3/4" outside diameter, filter -drier shall be a sealed type using sweat
copper fittings.
15600 -3
3. Size shall be full line size.
4. If liquid line filter drier comes as and integral part of the condensing unit. additional filter
driers shall not be installed.
5. Manufacturer's: Mueller. Alco, Sporlan.
H. Sight Glass:
I. Combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap.
2. Sight glass shall be full line size.
3. Sight glass connections shall be solid copper or brass.
4. Required for each system utilizing expansion valve.
5. Manufacturer's: Mueller. Alco, Sporlan.
I. Manual Refrigerant Shut -Off Valve:
1. Ball valves designed for refrigeration service and full line size.
2. Valve shall have cap seals.
3. Valves with hand n heels are not acceptable.
4. Provide sen ice valve on each liquid and suction line at compressor.
5. If service valves come as integral part of condensing unit. additional service valves shall not
be installed.
6. Manufacturers: Mueller. Superior
2.04 ROOF CURBS
A. Factory installed wood nailer.
B Welded 18 gauge gal%anized steel shell and base plate.
C. 1 -1 2" thick. three (3) pound rigid insulation.
D. Constructed to match roof pitch.
E. Manufacturer: Thcurb Model or equal. Minimum toelse inches (12 ") high for heating and
ventilating equipment and fourteen inches (14 ") high for cooling equipment
F. Curb shall be provided and located by the Mechanical Contractor. Curb shall be installed, (lashed and
counterfashed by the Roofing Contractor.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 Refrigerant piping shall be installed b■ licensed refrigeration Contractor. Size per Manufacturer's
recommendation for length encountered. Submit isometric drawing from the manufacturer indicating routing,
sizes and seloctn' in piping and pressure drop in piping. Provide minimum four inch (4 ") diameter PVC sleeves
as required for each refrigerant line set located under slab and through ssalls. Use 22 1/2 sleeve fittings for
all underslab installation Seal watertight top of PVC sleeves as they penetrate grade.
3.02 LIQUID LINE
15600 - 4
A. Install moisture indicator/sight glass at each condensing unit.
B. Install properly sized filter -drier "in- line" type at each condensing unit if unit is not supplied with one.
If unit is a heat pump, use bi -flow type drier.
C. All valves, driers and indicators to be full line size and have MS eat fittings.
D. Maximum pressure drop in line shall be 10 psig. Size per manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Insulate portion of liquid line exposed to direct sunlight.
3.03 SUCTION LINE
A. Every coil shall be trapped u hen vertical rise is more than five feet (5') . When the compressor is
below the evaporator. provide a trap in the suction line by coil. raise line to a point above coil and
slope suction line down to compressor from that point. Trap shall be made up of one (1) short radius
90° and two (2) 45° fittings. For heat pumps. all horizontal vapor lines should be level.
B. All rises in suction lines returning to compressor shall be trapped Use double suction risers a here
necessary. All risers must maintain a minimum of 1000 fpm and a maximum of 3000 fpm. Line sized
for a maximum of 3 psig pressure drop in system. Size per manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Insulate all suction lines, including the thermal bulb, from the thermal expansion valve See insulation
section for type and thickness.
D. Slope suction lines down toward compressor one inch (1 ")'ten feet (10') or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.04 The length of refrigerant line runs shall be kept as short as possible. It is preferred that they not exceed seventy
feet (70') in running length. but in no one case should they exceed the coolim_* equipment manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.05 All condensing units above roof shall have neoprene vibration isolation pads mounted under each corner and
sized per manufacturer's recommendations. Secure unit to support and support to structure.
3.06 Circulate dry nitrogen throughout system during ss elding or brazing process.
3.07 Test all refrigerant piping and repair all leaks. Pressure test with dry nitrogen: use pressure reducing valve to
limit pressure to 150 psig. After testing. evacuate and fully charge s) stem with refrigerant per manufacturer's
written instructions. Submit manufacturer's evacuation procedures with submittal.
3.08 General Contractor to pros ide level concrete pad for all condensing units, heat pump units. Verify actual size
with equipment.
3.09 Pack fiberglass insulation and sealing material. such as permagum. around refrigerant lines where they penetrate
exterior building envelope.
' 3.10 VIBRATION ISOLATOR
A Pros ide vibration isolation at each air handling unit. Vibration isolators are to be rubber in shear type.
Isolators are to be sized for actual equipment purchased
B. Manufacturers: Amber Booth. Vibration Mounting & Controls. Inc.. or equal.
END OF SECTION
15600 - 5
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
2 01 FANS
A. General Requirements for All Fans.
1. All fans constructed to AMCA Standards. AMCA listed and labeled.
2 Bearings:
15810- 1
SECTION 15810
AIR DISTRIBUTION
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Description: This section describes specific requirements. products and methods of execution relating
to the project air distribution systems.
B. Provide all air distribution systems as shown and specified. complete in every detail. and in perfect
operating order.
C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
theses specifications. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications.
determine the extent of impact on the c ork required to complete the work required by this section of
the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings.
1.02 Provide all air distribution vv ork in accordance with the minimum provisions of the latest approv ed editions of
the following codes and standards.
A. NFPA 90 A - Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B. NFPA 90 B - Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
C SMACNA - Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards.
D. TIMA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
E. SMACNA - Duct Liner Application Standard
F. SMACNA - Ducted Electric Heat Guide.
G AMCA Standard 210 -74 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
H. AMCA Pub. 261 Directory or Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
1. AMCA Standard 300 -67 Test Code for Sound Rating.
J AMCA Standard 301 -65 Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices
K. AMCA Publication 511 -75 Certified Ratings Program for Louvers. Dampers and Shutters.
L. ASHRAE Standard 52 -76 Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter.
M. ASHRAE Standard 70 -72 Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and
Inlets
1.03 Where any references to "Sheetmetal v ork" or "ductwork" appears in this section of these specifications or on
the drawings. it shall be construed to include outside air ducts. supp■ air ducts, return air ducts, exhaust ducts,
relief ducts. plenums, duct taps, grille taps. diffuser connections and all other related pieces and parts of the air
convey ing systems.
1 04 Before starting shop drawings or fabrication of any duct v ork, the Contractor must have an approved reflected
ceiling plan with which he can coordinate location of air outlets. lights. grille patterns, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
a. At factory assembled package units 1 HP and larger, provide 200,000 hour bearings
(AFBMA L -50) selected at maximum fan rpm.
b. At packaged equipment 3/4 HP and smaller. provide manufacturer's standard
bearings.
c. Arrange equipment for easy access to lubrication fittings. Provide extended grease
lines whenever easy access is not possible.
3. Balance fans statically and dynamically at factory
4. Factory paint fan housing. fan wheel (except aluminum), frame and support brackets with
prime coat and enamel finish coat at factory. after properly preparing surfaces.
5. Arrange fans to be cleanable and so that wheel. bearings, shaft. and drive are removable.
Provide plug type cleanout doors or split fan housing. Gasket joints and bolt airtight.
6. Provide vibration isolation for all fans per manufacturer's recommendations.
7. Assemble fans at factory and test with permanent motor for proper operation. alignment and
balance.
B. Belt Drives (All Belt Driven Fans):
1. Provide v -belt drive with sufficient belts to prevent slipping at start-up. Select drive for 1.5
service factor.
2. On each fan 10 HP and smaller. provide variable pitch drive sheave with infinitely adjustable
pitch diameter. Select drive sheave and fan pulley combination to provide fan rpm with drive
adjusted to near mid -span.
3. On each fan 10 HP and larger, provide a fixed speed drive sheave. Change fan and drive
sheave in field to attain specified air delivery at completion of balancing.
4. Provide belt guard with hinged tachometer cap.
C Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans:
1. Direct drive or hay a adjustable pitch v -belt AS SCHEDULED.
2. Wheels shall be backward curved and housing shall be removable or hinged aluminum,
3. Isolate motor with vibration dampeners.
4 Provide with motorized dampers.
5. Insulated. pre- fabricated metal roof curb shall be for flat or sloped roof as required.
6. Provide with galvanized insect screen.
7. Manufacturer's: Greenheck, Acme. Loren Cook. ILG. Penn, Briedert and Carnes.
2.02 ' FAN ACCESSORIES
A. Flexible Fan Connectors:
I. Provide at inlet and discharge of each fan.
a. For standard application:
1) Material suitable to withstand the pressure encountered. Constructed from
coated heavy glass fabric, flameproof and ozone resistant. Joints to be
sealed airtight. Minimum of4" flex connection to be used.
15810 -2
2) Manufacturer: Duro -dyne Corporation "Durolon" or equal.
2. Insulate over flex connection at inlet and discharge of all air handling units and rooftop units
with two inch (2 ") Type "C" insulation. Hard cast insulation to ductwork and unit or use
UL I81A -P pressure sensitive tape.
2.03 DUCTWORK
A. Low Velocity Ductwork Systems:
1. Definition: Ductwork systems where duct pressures do not exceed 2" w g . maximum static
pressure and duct velocity does not exceed 2000 FPM. •
2. Ductwork Construction:
a. Galvanized steel sheets in strict accordance with SMACNA Low Velocity Duct
Standards. Insulate per Specification Section 15180
b. All dimensions are inside clear dimensions. Sheet metal size shall be increased to
allow for duct liner where applicable.
c. Seal all transverse joints, seams and fitting connections with mastic to prevent air
leakase. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable.
3. Rectangular Ducts
a. Where special rigidity or stiffness is required. construct ducts of metal two gauge
numbers heavier.
b. Ducts larger than 96" require special field study for gauging and supporting and
supporting methods. (Furnish shop drawings for supporting and construction
requirements.)
c. Rectangular low pressure ducts shall be constructed in the following minimum
gauges
4. Round Ducts.
Largest Dimension of Duct Gauge of Metal
Up to 12" 24 min.
13 "to30" 24
31" to 54"
The above rectangular ducts shall be constructed. braced and reinforced in
accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association.
a Construct round ducts from steel sheets of the following U.S. Gauge thickness,
using the scam method shown.
b. Where special rigidity or stiffness is required. construct ducts of metal two gauge
numbers heavier.
c. Ducts 14 ". through 22" diameter. 24 gauge. Long or spiral seam.
5. Transitions:
15810 -3
2.04 DUCT ACCESSORIES
b. Offset not more than 20 ° , on diverging flow and 30 on contracting flow. unless
called for otherwise on drawing.
6. Elbows and Turning Vanes:
a. Use long radius, 45° and 90 fittings for all elbows and at tees unless otherwise
shown.
A Air Volume Controls.
a. Provide tapered transitions at changes in duct size and at connections to fans and
other equipment.
1) Construct fittings with centline radius equal to 11 /2 times the duct width
at the turn.
2) Where square vaned elbows are used, provide access doors as detailed
below.
b. Tuming Vanes: In all 90 square elbows provide 12" x 12" access door into duct
on both sides of each vaned fitting to facilitate duct cleaning.
7. Flexible Duct:
a. Do not use flexible duct unless specifically called for on the plans.
b. At diffuser connections:
I) Provide duct listed as UL -ISI Class I air duct. and constructed in
compliance with NFPA 90A.
2) Minimum length 7 1/2 feet. maximum length 10 feet. Install with not
more than one (I) 90 full radius degree bend.
3) Make joints with Nashua brand UL181A -P duct tape and 1 /2" wide
positive locking straps. Use Panduit straps.
4) Minimum sound net insertion loss for duct as follows.
BAND. HZ 125 250 500 1000 2000
LossdB;ft. 2.1 3.0 27 3.0 2.7
5) Submit sound and construction data for proposed alternates.
6) Tough vapor barrier reinforced metalized polyester jacket. tear and
puncture resistant.
7) Airtight inner core with no fiberglass erosion into airstream.
8) R- Value: 6.0 (w 75 ° F. mean temperature.
c. Manufacturer's: Atco 36 Series, Certainteed. Thermotlex, Wiremold. Genflex,
approed equal.
Provide air volume dampers, or other control devices as shown, at each low pressure duct
main and branch for a balancer to adjust the system to produce the air quantities shown.
15810 - 4
2. Volume Dampers:
a. Flat sheet. single leaf damper with a continuous rod: damper leaf two (2) gauges
(minimum 16 ga.) heavier than the duct where installed. Pros ide locking quadrants
with indicators located accessible without demolition.
b. The locking-type quadrant operators for dampers, when installed on ducts to be
thermally insulated, shall be provided is ith stand -off mounting. brackets, bases or
adapters to provide clearance, between the duct surface and the operator, not less
than the thickness of the insulation. Stand - off - mounting items shall be integral with
the operator or a standard accessory of the damper manufacturer. Volume dampers
shall be provided where indicated.
c. All operators accessible and lockable. Do not insulate over top of volume
damper operator handle.
d. Locate dampers a minimum of 7.5 feet from diffusers.
3. Extractors:
a. Combination air straightenmg vanes and dolume control with locking quadrant on
outside or accessible through face of register.
b Manufacturer: Titus AG -45 or approved equal.
c. Provide extractors at supply grilles attached directly to any main or branch duct
serving more than one (1) grille.
4. Splitter Dampers:
a. Construct damper using sheetmetal blade hinge mounted inside duct.
b Dampers or spliners shall be constructed from the same gauge metal as the ducts
htch the serve with a minimum of22 gauge. Splitter length shall be 1 1!2 times
the duct tt idth up to 24" in size and above 24" in size shall be I 1/4 times the duct
width.
c. Attach Duro -dyne SRP -40 series splitter damper bracket to blade.
d. Connect 1'4" steel rod to damper bracket and extend through Duro -dyne SRP -14
ball joint damper casting mounting on outside of duct. Use 3/8" steel rod for
splitter in ducts above 24" in size.
e. Install assembly for full swing of damper blade. Lock damper in proper position.
5. Opposed Blade Dampers:
a. Gang operated opposed blades.
b. Aluminum construction.
B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers:
I. Provide backdraft dampers counter balanced to desired static pressure setting. Wide open
static pressure drop not to exceed 0 15" W.G.
2 Damper blades aluminum tt ith felt applied to tops of blades. Where dampers are exposed
to outside temperature, provide neoprene edged blades.
15810 - 5
3. Damper frames extruded aluminum; nylon bearings.
4. Assembly designed for operation at 20 F.
C. Access Panels and Doors:
1. Low Velocity System Access Panels:
a. Sheetmetal doors reinforced, cross - bracketed or otherwise stiffened to prevent rattle
or vibration.
b. Seal doors airtight with felt edged gaskets.
c. Secure with hinges and sash locks.
2.05 GRILLES. REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A. Provide grilles. registers, and diffusers of the types and sizes called for on plans and in schedule on
drawings.
B. Finish with factory applied finish for extruded aluminum items. and with a prime coat for steel items.
(Provide an additional factory baked enamel finish to match ceiling grid.) (Submit color sample for
approval.)
C. Equip diffusers with panels of the proper size to match the suspended ceiling layout or with the proper
frame for surface mounting. Fully correlate diffuser and grille style, dimension. and fit with ceiling.
D. Manufacturer's: MetalAire. Titus, Price. Krueger, Anemostat. Carnes.
2.06 LOUVERS AND HOODS
A. Provide air exhausts: intakes through building skin, as shoe n.
B. Hoods:
I. Construction of heavy dun aluminum sheets with rolled interlocking seams with galvanized
hood support members. similar to Greenheck Fabrahood or equal.
2. Provide with insect screen on outside air intake hood and 14" x 1!4" galvanized bird screen
on relief hoods.
3. Curbs are to be a minimum of twelve inches (12 ") high.
4. Manufacturer's: Greenheck. Acme, Penn. Cook. Briedert. Carnes.
2.07 INFRARED HEATERS
A. Provide AGA label gas -fired. high- intensity, infrared heaters v. ith capacity as scheduled on drawings.
B. Each heater shall cam: a permanently affixed plate stating that the unit is designed certified by the
American Gas Association (AGA) in accordance with the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) Z83.6 test standards, and also stating that the heater is approved for installation in aircraft
hangers and garages when installed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
No. 409 and No. 88, respectiseb.
C. The heaters shall be of the fixed air. atmospheric type suitable for horizontal or angular mounting on
the long axis in either direction from 0 up to an angle of 30 from the horizontal. Each heater shall
consist of a stainless steel. shrouded, unitized burner housing incorporating universal mounting
15810 - 6
brackets, an integrated modular perforated "effect" ceramic combustion surface. shade assembly,
shrouded enclosed protective control compartment, and a completely factory mounted and wired
control manifold system incorporating a brass orifice with adaptor, a combination low- pressure
appliance type gas valve/pressure regulator, test port capable of allowing the sensing of gas pressure
immediately ahead of the main burner orifice.
D. Stainless steel shall be used in the fabrications of the burner housing. venturi and ceramic tile retainers.
The design and manufacturer of the orifice bracket shall be such as to insure continued proper
alignment of the orifice with the main burner venturi. The ceramic matrix shall employ the patented
Schwank Effect Tile capable of sustaining 1650 F surface temperature while maintaining plenum
temperatures below the flash point of the gas air mixture. Each tile shall have two hundred (1 28mm)
expanded ports per square inch and a ceramic tile surface loading. based on an adjusted net radiant
surface area, not to exceed 395 BTU per square inch at 1650 F. radiant surface temperature. The
adjusted net effective surface area of the ceramic emitter shall be 2.62 sq. in.'1000 BTU of input = 2
I'2 %.
E. Each heater shall be equipped with a heat treated, polished aluminum shade. The standard equipment
shade shall be suitable for easy field connection of an optional shade extension or an approved
perforated protective screen as made available by the manufacturer.
F. All units are to be factory fire tested as a part of the standard production procedure. Firing and
inspection to check for proper construction, including the absence of all gas leaks, control function.
general operation of the unit and to assure that the unit operates at the published capacity.
G. Provide Solid State Ignition Detection Control System with 110V to 24 V transformer and safety shut
down (lock out).
H. Provide a one (I) year limited warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. under normal
use and service. Provide a one ( I ) )ear additional warranty on the controls for a total of two (2) years
Warranty shall be limited to replacement of defective control. Provide an additional fourteen (14) year
warranty on the burner exclusive of controls. Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of the
"Effect" tile stainless steel burners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK
A. Provide ductwork in accordance with SMACNA low velocity standards.
B. Provide backdraft dampers for all exhaust fans if motor operated dampers are not called for. Provide
one inch (1") mesh bird screen at all exhaust discharges.
C. Seal all joints with Foster 30 -35
D. Where ducts. exposed to v ten. pass through walls, floors or ceilings. furnish and install sheetmetal
collars to cover the voids around the duct.
E This w ork shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) )ear from and after the date of acceptance of the
job against noise. chatter. whistling or vibration and free from pulsation under all conditions of
operation. After the system is in operation. should these defects occur. they shall either be removed
and replaced or reinforced as directed by the Owner.
F. Duct shall be erected in the general locations shown on the drawings. but must conform to all
structural and final conditions of the building. Before fabricating any ductwork, the Contractor shall
check the physical conditions at the job site, and shall make all necessary changes in cross sections,
transitions. offsets. etc.. whether they are specifically indicated or not at no additional charge to the
Ou ner
G. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling. breathing. vibration or unnecessary noise, such reinforcing
15810 - 7
3.03 ACCESS
to be as recommended in the SMACNA manual plus any additional reinforcing as may be required
to meet job conditions.
H. Provide manually operated volume control dampers in all branches, splits and taps for proper
balancing of air distribution, whether shown on drawings or not. dampers to be either single blade or
multiblade as shown in the SMACNA manual as required. They shall incorporate an indication device
with lock to hold damper in position for proper setting.
1. Damper operators in all unfinished areas shall be Young Series 400 of the exact style, type and size
required. All other operators shall be Young #315 and. or 4896 opposite end from the operator.
Where dampers are installed in ducts located above accessible type ceilings, damper operators shall
not be extended through the finished ceiling.
J. All square elbows shall have turning vanes per the SMACNA manual requirements.
K. Where ducts connect to fans, including roof exhausters. flexible connections shall be made using
"Ventglas" fabric that is fire - resistant, waterproof, mildew- resistant and practically air tight, and shall
weight approximately thirty ounces per square yard. There shall be a minimum of two and one -half
inches (2 1/2") distance between the edges of the ducts. There shall be a minimum of one inch (I")
of slack for each full inch of static pressure on the fan system.
L. Furnish and install screens on all ducts. fans, etc. furnished by the Contractor which lead to, or are
outdoors. Screens shall be 16 gauge, one -half inch (1 ") mesh in removable galvanized steel frames.
M. All holes in ducts for damper rods and other necessary devices shall be either drilled or machine
punches (not pin punches), and shall not be larger than necessary. All duct openings shall be provided
with sheetmetal caps if the openings are to be left unconnected for any length of time. All panels of
uninsulated ducts twelve inches (12 ") and larger shall be cross broken.
3.02 DUCTWORK SUPPORTS
A. Support all ductwork to prevent sag, undue play, and swing. Provide a hanger within twelve inches
(12 ") from unit supply and return. R.'A plenums on back of air handling units must have a minimum
of four (4) support straps
B Low Pressure Ductwork:
Duct 40" and Less: Provide with 1" x 18 gauge straps fastened to ductwork, and to building
construction. Space not more than eight feet (8') on center. Hanger straps shall lap under
duct a minimum of one inch (1") and has e a minimum of one (1) fastening screw on the
bottom and two (2) on the side.
C Recommend methods of fastening bracing to ductwork, including riveting. bolting. and tack welding.
D Use minimum stet e (12) gauge wire with saddle for suppon of flex duct. Maximum permissible sag
is 1 per foot of spacing between suppons. Use one inch (1 ") strap (minimum) for all round
sheetmetal runouts: minimum 8' -0" o.c.
A. Furnish all fans with consideration of location of motor and drive.
B Furnish and install in the ductwork, hinged access doors to provide access to all manual and automatic
dampers, fusible links, cleaning operations, etc. Where the ducts are insulated, the access doors shall
be double skin doors with one inch (1") of insulation in the door. In rectangular ducts larger than
twenty inches (20 ") in their smallest dimension, install access doors every twenty feet (20'). Where
the size of the duct permits, the doors shall be eighteen inches (18 ") by sixteen inches (16 "). Factory
fabricated doors as manufactured by Milcor meeting these specifications will be acceptable. Access
doors shall be submitted for approval.
15810 - 8
3.04 Fully coordinate and work directly with the Balancing and Testing Agency to provide all systems in perfect
operating order. Make corrections and adjustments as required by the Balancing and Testing Agency in a timel■
manner.
3.05 Cap open ends of all ducts (including spin -ins) and equipment with minimum four (4) mil. plastic to prevent
construction debris and dust from entering openings during construction.
END OF SECTION
15810 - 9
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The section describes general requirements and methods of execution relating to the testing and
balancing of the mechanical systems provided on this project
B. Scope:
2. The tt ork of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Testing and balancing HVAC systems and equipment.
b. Providing a final report.
102 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. SMACNA Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air Distribution Systems.
B. AMCA Publication 203. Field Performance Measurements.
C AMCA Standard 300 -67. Test Code for Sound Rating.
D National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Recommended Procedures.
103 QUALIFICATION OF AGENCY
15850 - I
SECTION 15850
BALANCING AND TESTING
I . Fumish the services of a qualified and approved Balancing and Testing Agency to perform
the work of this specification.
C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of
theses specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for
instructions and include all Items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other
divisions of these specifications. determine the extent of Impact on the work required to complete the
work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work short n on the
drawings.
A. Subcontractor Minimum Qualifications Include:
1. Maintain a complete service organization that has operated tt ithin the Austin: San Antonio
areas for at least three years prior to bid date of this project
2. Demonstrate satisfactory completion of three projects of similar size and scope. Provide
references if requested.
3 Bids by suppliers. Contractors or any firm that does not maintain a full -time staff of active
and experienced HVAC s stems balancers are not acceptable
1.04 TIMING OF WORK .
A. Schedule the testing and balancing it ork in cooperation with other trades.
1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO BALANCING AGENCY
A. Award the test and balance contract to the approved agency upon receipt of contract to allow the
Balance and Testing Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and
comply with completion date.
B. Put all heating, ventilating. and air conditioning systems, equipment and controls into full operation
for the Balancing Agency and continue the operation of same during each working day of testing. and
balancing.
C. Provide scaffolding. ladders and access to each system for proper testing and balancing.
D. Provide and change pulleys. belts and dampers. and add am dampers and test taps as necessary for
correct balance as recommended by the Balance and Testing Agency, or as directed by the Architect
after review of Balancing Report, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Statement
B. Test Plan: Outline of the general sequence of work: test taps necessary: optimal and custom procedures
to be used: trade coordination affecting this work including scheduling coordination test report forms.
C. Preliminary Test & Balance Report: Provide one rough copy to Engineer as testing is accomplished:
Do not hold until final report.
D. Test & Balance Report: Completed test report forms. After review by Engineer, include in Owner's
Manual.
E. Operations Report: Verification that systems and equipment are operating properly in each mode.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 THIS PART NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTRUMENTS
A Maintain all instruments accurately calibrated and in good working order. Use instruments with the
following minimum performance characteristics.
B. Air Velocity Instruments: Direct reading in feet per minute. 2 °° accuracy.
C. Static Pressure Instruments: Direct reading in inches n ater gauge. 2% o accuracy.
D. RPM Instruments: Direct reading in revolutions per minute. 1 2'1. accuracy; or revolution counter
accurate within 2 counts per 1000.
E. Temperature Readout: Direct reading in degrees F., plus minus 0.1 degrees F.
3 02 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR ALL SYSTEMS
A In cooperation with the Contractors representative. coordinate adjustments of automatically operated
dampers and valves. including_ the controlling thermostats. to operate as specified, indicated, and /or
noted.
B. Use manufacturer's ratings on all equipment to make required calculations.
C. MAKE FINAL ADJUSTMENTS FOR EACH SPACE PER HEATING OR COOLING COMFORT
REQUIREMENT. State reason for variance from design din, 1 e.. "too noisy ", "too drafty ", etc.
3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS
15850 - 2
A. Identify each diffuser, grille. and register as to specific location and area.
B. Identify and list size, type. and manufacturer of diffusers. grilles. registers. and all equipment tested.
C. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles. and registers. include required fpm velocity. and required cfm
and test cfm after adjustments. If test apparatus is designed to read cfm directly. velocity readings may
be omitted. Identify test apparatus used. Identify wide open (W.O.) runs.
D. Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts and excess noise in all areas.
3.04 BALANCING LOW VELOCITY CONSTANT VOLUME DUCTWORK
A. Adjust the fan for design airflow.
B. Read and record the airflow at each inlet (or outlet).
C. Adjust the branch dampers so that each inlet (exhaust systems) or outlet (supply *stems) in the system
is within = 10% of design airflow.
D. Adjust outside air or make -up air supply outlets to -0% to - -15 °,o of design air floe.
E. Secure each branch damper and mark the balanced position of the damper quadrant.
3.05 FAN ADJUSTMENT
A. Balance ductwork before making final fan adjustment.
B. Verify that system is free of debris. that inlets and discharges ar not obstructed, and that filters are
clean.
C. Make pitot traverse of main ductwork to determine airflott and record.
D. Adjust fan rpm to obtain design airflow.
E. Test and record motor amperage and voltage on each phase leg. Reduce fan rpm if necessary, so that
motor running amperage does not exceed motor nameplate amperage Record final amperage and
voltage.
F. Record fan rpm
G. Test and record s■ stem suction and discharge static pressures.
H. Record airflow.
L Test and adjust system for minimum design cfm outside air, as shown, where applicable.
J. Test and record entering air temperatures across coils and fans.
K. Test and record leaving air temperatures across coils.
L. Test and record static pressure drop across each filter and coil bank.
3.06 BALANCING REPORT
A Compile the test data and submit 8 copies of the complete test data for forwarding to the Architect for
acceptance andlor analysis and recommendations.
B. Include a complete list of all test equipment used, including apparatus manufacturer's name, model
number, serial number. and date last calibrated.
15850 - 3
C. Include complete identification of all elements. Identify by unit number. room name and number, air
outlet symbol, etc., to clearly and positively identify' the location of each element
D. Include all test data specified in addition to test data recommended in the applicable standards
referenced in Part 1. Tabulate all nameplate data at all balanced equipment and at the associated
motors.
E. Tabulate data separately for each system. Describe balancing method used for each system.
F. Include at the front of the report a summary of problems encountered. deviations from design,
remaining problems. recommendations, and comments.
END OF SECTION
15850 -4
ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS
Electrical Specifications
z -------------
Division 16
Myeo&Asmdates
455 H
igbxn) 195, Suite B
Georgetown, Texas 78628
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 16010
GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified. provide all labor, equipment. supplies, materials. superintendence and
testing necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by these specifications
and as shown on the Drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. Complete such
details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of
all electrical systems described on the Drawings. Include empty conduit as required for the telephone
system.
B. Submit a bid on the basis of a complete installation. including all labor, material. cartage. insurance.
permits, fees, and taxes.
C. Include temporary electrical power and lighting that will be required for the interior of the buildings.
Provide lighting to satisfy OSHA requirements.
D. All Agreement Forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Division 1 of the
specifications shall apply to the work specified in Division 16.
E. Additional Site Visit Costs: The Contractor shall be charged with any cost resulting from uncompleted
items that require additional site trips by the Architect/Engineer.
•
F. No attempt has been made to show complete design details of building construction on the Electrical
plans. Refer to Architectural. Structural and Mechanical plans for additional details V. lticlt will affect
electrical work. No extra cost will be allowed for offsets in conduit and wiring to avoid other stork
or V. hen minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation or maintenance.
G. REMODEL WORK: COORDINATE ALL CONNECTIONS OF NEW EQUIPMENT WITH
EXISTING SERVICES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL
EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS. AND INCIDENTAL ITEMS REQUIRED TO MAKE SYSTEMS
COMPLETE AND OPERABLE.
1 02 SITE INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site verifying all existing items and familiarize himself with
existing work conditions and understand the conditions sshich affect performance of the work of this
Division before submitting bids for this work. The submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence
of such visits and e'aminations.
B. All bids shall take the existing conditions into consideration and the lack of specific information on
the drays ines shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility. No subsequent allowance for time
or money n ill be allowed for work or change related to failure to examine site conditions.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Provide electrical connections and service to items described in all other sections of these
specifications.
1 04 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Certain labor. materials. or equipment may be provided under other sections of these specifications,
by utility companies. or by the On ner. When such is the case. the extent. source and description of
these items will be as Indicated on the Drawings or described in the specifications but the Contractor
is responsible for verifying with all parties involved as to the extent of his requirements of work.'
16010- I
B. Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall be furnished by others. but connected by the Electrical
Contractor as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Unless otherwise specified. Mechanical equipment control wiring shall be provided and installed by
the Mechanical Contractor.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to bidding, examine the premises to determine if there are any special or existing conditions
which may effect the work to be performed.
B. Definitions:
C. The Contractor binds himself. his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the Owner
hereto in respect to all covenants. agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the 'written consent of the
Architect'Owner. nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him hereunder,
without the previous vv rrtten consent of the Owner /Architect.
D. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using his best skill and attention. He shall be
solely responsible for all construction means ; methods. techniques. safety. sequences and procedures
and for coordinating all portions of the Work under his Contract.
E. The Contractor shall provide. without extra charge. all incidental items required as a part of the Work,
even though not particularly specified or indicated. and if he has good reason for objecting to the use
of a material, appliance. or type of construction shown or specified. he shall register his objections
sr ith the Architect'Engineer. in writing: others ise, he shall proceed with the work under the stipulation
that a satisfactory job is required.
F. Drawings:
1. "Provide' or "Install': Includes all material, labor subcontracts. appurtenances and mark -up
required for a complete operable system as shown and specified. set in place, connected and
ready to use
2. "Furnish ": Purchase and deliver to job site, material as shown and specified.
3. "Record Drawings ": Drawings that reflect the electrical systems as actually constructed by
the Contractor.
The drawings are in general diagrammatic and the location of outlets, ss itches, motors, etc.,
on the drawings do not necessarily mean that such units shall be placed at that exact spot, as
scaled on the drawings, but shall be located to function best. Use the drawings, and these
specifications for guidance and secure the Engineer's approval of all changes in location.
Verify all measurements at the site. No extra compensation s i11 be allowed because of
differences between locations shorn on the dram rags and measurements at the building.
3. The Contractor is to dram electrical rooms to scale with approved equipment and submit to
the Engineer prior to installation. The Contractor must insure that all minimum NEC
working clearances are maintained.
4. Where lighting fivtures and other electrical items are shor in conflict with structural
members and mechanical or other equipment. provide all required supports and wiring to
clear the encroachment.
5. The branch circuits and arrangement of home runs have been designed to compensate for
voltage drop and other considerations to accomplish maximum economy. Re- circuiting will
not be permitted without specific approval.
16010 -
6. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer Do not proceed Sti
installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies hate been fully resolved.
7. Drawings and specifications are complimentary each to the other. What is called for by one
shall be as binding as if called for by both.
8. Should the drawings disagree in themselves. or with the specifications, the better quality or
greater quantity of work or materials 'shall be used.
9. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or area. without
specific approval. shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect at no
cost to the Owner. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans.
The Architect shall have the right to make any reasonable change in outlet locations before
rough-1n without additional cost to the Owner.
G. Substitutions:
I. Unless otherwise indicated, base bid on the equipment shown on the on the Drawings and
hereinafter specified
2. Request for approval to substitute materials. methods. or processes shall be made to Architect
and if found acceptable. will be confirmed by an addendum to the Construction Documents.
Where proposed substitutions are not incorporated into the Construction Documents by
addendum PRIOR to time of the General Contract bid opening. all bids shall be held to have
been made on the basis of the materials, methods and processes required by the Construction
Documents.
3. All substitutions shall be of equal or better quality to the equipment specified.
4. Acceptance of the substitution by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for proper operation of the systems. compliance with specifications. necessary
changes due to dimensional differences or space requirements. and completion of work on
schedule.
5. It is not the intent of the Specifications to limit materials to the product of any particular
manufacturer. Where definite materials. equipment and.tor fixtures have been specified by
name. manufacturer or catalog number, it has been done so as to set a definite standard and
a reference for comparison as to quality. application. physical conformity and other
characteristics.
H. Protide a completed Schedule of Values, see Specification Section 16060. Schedule shall be
submitted to Architect Engineer ss ithin sivty (60) days after the award of the contract.
1 06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Reference requirements stated elsest Isere in the specifications.
B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAPE ALL ADDENDAS ISSUED DURING BIDDING TO HIS
CONSTRUCTION AND RECORD DRAWING SET PRIOR TO COMMENCING
CONSTRUCTION. PAY REQUESTS WILL NOT BE PROCESSED UNTIL THIS
REQUIREMENT IS MET.
C In addition to other requirements, a master Record Drawing blueline set (separate from field sets) shall
be kept in the Job site trailer and marked up sleekly as the stork progresses. to show exact dimensioned
location and routing of all electrical work which will be permanently concealed. Show routing and
location of items cast in concrete or buried underground Show routing of work in permanently
concealed blind spaces within the building. Work located its spaces with access, or above suspended
ceilings. is not considered permanently concealed. Show complete routing and sizing of any
16010 - 3
significant revisions to the systems shown. Indicate locations of all existing active and inactive
conduit uncovered during construction. Keep marked up set at site for review at site meetings.
D. The Contractor shall indicate progress by coloring-in various conduits. ducts, and associated
appurtenances exactly as they are erected. This process shall incorporate both the changes noted
above and all other deviations from the original drawings whether resulting from job conditions
encountered or from any other causes.
E. The marked -up and colored -up prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work
installed. They shall be inspected periodically by the Architect and Owners Representatives and they
shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. This procedure is mandatory.
F. No monthly pay applications will be reviewed if the Record Drawings are incomplete or are
unavailable for inspection.
G. At the completion of the job. these prints shall be submitted to the Architect for final review and
comment. The prints will be returned with appropriate comments and recommendations. These
corrected prints together with corrected prints indicating all the revisions. additions and deletions of
work, shall form the basis for preparing a set of record drawings.
H. The Engineer's original tracings and/or computer discs may be borrowed by the Contractor for his
Trade, to obtain a set of mylar reproductions. Engineer's seal shall be removed from this set of my lars.
Each Contractor shall then transfer all work to his mylar set and shall add the date of printing and the
legend "Record Drawing Set" and submit a set of reproducible sepias to the Architect for his review.
The Architect shall comment on the set of sepias and shall return this set to the Contractor to make any
final modifications to the drawings. After all corrections are made. the Contractor shall add the date
of printing and the legend "Record Drawing Set' on the mylar set
1. Using the "Record Dray, ing Set', the Contractor shall print one (1) complete set of reproducible
m} lars. two (2) sets of prints and a set of computer discs. in autocad version 14, for submission to the
Owner.
J. The Contractor shall bear all the costs of reproducing the original tracings. making all the necessary
changes and printing the mylar sets for the work in his charge.
K. Final payment will be withheld until all Record Drawing Sets are submitted to the Owner.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer within sixty (60) days after the an and of the contract a typewritten list of those
items of equipment and appurtenances which will be furnished. Include the name or description of
the item. name of manufacturer, model or t\pe. catalog number and manufacturer's printed
information. The information submitted shall include oterall dimensions, weights, voltage rating,
phase. t■ firing diagrams. etc.. and nameplate data Assemble all submittals into one (1) brochure. The
Engineer's check ss ill be general and does not relieve the Contractor of final responsibility to comply
with the Contract Documents in all respects.
B. Submit Shop Drat ings for. but not 'linked to. the follov, ine items•
Devices
2. Safety Disconnect Switches
3. Panelboards
4. Interior Lighting Fixtures
5. Exterior Lighting Fixtures
6. Wire and Cable
7. Combination Motor Starters
8. Contactors
9. Transformers
10. Intercom & Sound System
16010 - 4
11. Lamps
12. Photocells
13. Time Clocks
14. Fuses
15. Cabinets and Enclosures
16. Distribution and Fuse Blocks
17. Electric room (coordinate with mechanical). Also. indicate other equipment and, or systems
on plan.
18. Fire Rated Penetration Details
C. When requested, present samples of all materials proposed for use to the Engineer for his approval.
D. Certify Shop Drawings have been checked for compliance ss ith Contract Documents. Certify that the
materials submitted can be delivered and installed according to the construction schedule.
E. Select all other materials, not specifically described on the Drawings or in these specifications but
required for a complete and operable facility, and submit to the Engineer for approval.
F. Submit to the Engineer a [thin thirty (30) days after the award of the contract evidence that all pemuts
and fees have been paid to the local governing authorities. Evidence must be submitted to the
Engineer prior to processing any pay application request.
1.08 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code,
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and all other applicable Federal, State and local codes.
All codes and standards shall be per the latest edition with all supplements and official interpretations
included. The Drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes,
standards, ordinances, and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the
Drawings and specifications.
B. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable
Building Codes. State Laws. Local Ordinances and Industry Standards. he shall bear all costs arising
in correcting the deficiencies. as approved by the Architect.
C Contractor is required to obtain all permits and licenses required by the jurisdiction having authority
over his specific trade. Additionally. Contractor is required to submit to Engineer and /or Architect
photocopies of all permits and licenses obtained from jurisdiction having authority prior to submittal
of Contractor's first draw request.
1.09 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A Investigate each space in the building through ss hich equipment must pass to reach its final location.
If necessan. the manufacturer shall be required to ship his material in sections sized to permit passing
through such restricted areas in the building.
B. Retain all portable and detachable parts or portions of installation such as fuses. key locks, adapters,
blocking clips, and inserts until final completion of work Deliver parts to the Owner or his authorized
representative and attach an itemized receipt to obtain request for final payment.
C. Product Handling:
1 Use all means necessary to protect the work and materials of this section before. during, and
after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades
2 In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner.
16010 - 5
3. • Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Provide suitable box or crate electrical equipment and cover with waterproof cosers to
protect against dirt. moisture or accidental damage during shipment or outdoors at the job
site.
5. Store all conduit on skids.
1.10 SERVICEABILITY OF PRODUCTS
A. Furnish all products to provide the proper orientation of serviceable components to access space
provided.
B. Coordinate installation of piping. ductwork. equipment. conduits. panels and other products to allon
proper service of all items requiring periodic maintenance or replacement.
C. Replace or relocate all products incorrectly ordered or installed to provide proper serviceability
1.11 ACCESSIBILITY OF PRODUCTS
A. Arrange all work to provide permanent. convenient and safe access to all serviceable and or operable
products. Layout work to optimize net usable access space ss ithin confines of space available. Advise
Architect. in a timely manner. of areas where proper access cannot be maintained. Furnish las out
drawings to verify this claim. if requested.
B. Provide access doors in ceilings. walls. floors, etc. for access to automatic devices and all serviceable
or operable equipment in concealed spaces. Location of panels shall be submitted for approval in
sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of ss orb
1 I2 UTILITY COSTS
A. Pas all service charges required by the electric utility or telephone utility to facilitate construction.
1.13 CLEAN -UP
A Remove debris and waste materials from within the construction areas and transport off - site, daily.
B. Keep the construction area clean. free from hazard. and orderly arranged.
C Pay all costs of h aste removal and disposal.
D. Dispose of ssaste materials in accordance with all regulations ss hich gos ern.
E. Take all precautions to protect persons who enter the construction area from hazardous conditions, '
hazardous waste. toxic waste. or other unsafe conditions.
F. Upon completion of construction, remote all debris. [saste materials. unused materials. temporary
constructions. vehicles. tools. fencing. etc. to Owner's satisfaction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise indicated. pros ide only new equipment and materials.
B. On all major equipment components. provide manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial
number permanently attached in a conspicuous location.
16010.6
C. All materials furnished under these specifications shall be the standard product of manufacturer's
regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved
standard design.
D. Guarantees:
6. Reference other guarantee information elsewhere in these specifications.
2.02 STANDARDS
A. Where the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) have established standards and issued labels for a
particular group, class or t) pe of material. apparatus, appliance or device. provide the UL label on all
such items in that category incorporated into the work
B. Where such items are not covered by UL standards, they shall meet or exceed the requirements of the
current National Electrical Code (NEC). or if not covered there, by the applicable, published,
recognized standard of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). or of the industry and of
the related engineering society. Example: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
and Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
The Contractor and Manufacturers' shall provide a ONE (1) YEAR guarantee for all work
under the Electrical Trade. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu
of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and the Contractor may have by law or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents. In any case, such guarantees and warranties shall
commence when the Owner accepts the mechanical/electrical system. as determined by the
Architect and shall remain in effect for a period of ONE (1) YEAR thereafter.
2. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship. including lamps furnished under each
Section, shall care' a ONE (1) YEAR warranty against all defects in material and
workmanship. Any fault under any contract. due to defective or improper material.
equipment. workmanship or design which may dev elop shall be made good. forthwith. by and
at the expense of the Contractor for the work under his Contract. including all other damage
done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure.
3. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the system. which are to be provided
under his Contract, are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements
as set forth herein or as indicated.
4. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of any systems or equipment
during the guarantee period. the affected part or parts shall be replaced by the Contractor for
his respective work, as applicable.
5. Furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above
requirements.
3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to minimize cutting. channeling, chasing. or drilling of
floors, walls, partitions. ceilings. etc. Perform all cutting. channeling. drilling. etc., as required for the
proper support, concealment, installation, or anchorage of raceways, outlets. or electrical equipment
in a careful manner. Any damage to the building, structure. piping, ducts. equipment, or defaced
finish. tile. plaster. woodwork. or metal work shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades
involved at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All cutting, channeling,
chasing. or drilling of unfinished masonry, tile. etc.. or cutting. drilling, anchoring to or welding of
structural members shall be performed in a manner having the Engineer's prior approval. All openings
made in fire rated or smoke rated walls, floors, and ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a
manner to conform to the fire rating or smoke rating for the enclosure
16010 - 7
B. Where conduits pass through exterior walls, thoroughly caulk with sealant the annular space around
the conduit to provide a watertight closure. Provide at least 1/2" annular space around the conduit.
Provide and install all counterflashing of all conduit, pipe and supports which pierces roofs and other
weather barrier surfaces. Verify detail with Architect before installation. All work shall be performed
in a workmanlike manner to assure weatherproof installation. Any leaks developed shall be repaired
at his expense, to Architect's satisfaction. All waterproofing. flashing and counterflashing shall be
compatible with roofing system so as not to void any roof warranties. Confirm installation with
Architect and Roofing Contractor.
3.02 SEALING AND FIREPROOFING
A. SEALING OF PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS, FLOORS, CEILING AND
ROOF ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER UL "FIRE RESISTANCE
DIRECTORY ". UL SYSTEM NUMBERS INDICATED ARE FOR A PARTICULAR LISTED
INSTALLATION AND ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION AND INTENT. OTHER
LISTED UL SYSTEM DESIGNS MAY BE USED. IN ALL CASES, SUBMIT MATERIALS,
UL SYSTEM DESIGN NUMBERS AND UL DETAILS TO BE USED THROUGHOUT THE
PROJECT AND IDENTIFY WHICH DETAIL IS TO BE USED FOR EACH SPECIFIC
CONDITION. POST REVIEWED DETAIL AT JOB SITE FOR REFERENCE.
Only materials tested in the specific UL System No. may be used.
a. Caulk Manufacturer:
1) 3M Type CP -25 WB + for all assemblies requiring 3M caulk.
2) For WL3045 and WL3046 use Hilti FS61 IA sealant.
b. Steel Sleeve (stud wall) (UL System No. WL1003): Cylindrical sleeve shall be
fabricated from minimum 0.019" thick (no. 28 gauge) galvanized sheet steel and
having a minimum two inch (2 ") lap along the longitudinal seam. Length of steel
sleeve to be equal to thickness of wall plus one inch (1") such that, when installed,
the ends of the sleeve will project approximately 1/2" beyond the surface of the wall
on both sides of the wall assembly. The diameter of the openings cut on each side
of the wall assembly (concentric with conduit) to be 2 to 2 1/2" larger than the
outside diameter of conduit such that. when the steel sleeve is installed, a 1 to 1 1/4"
annular space will be present between the steel sleeve and the conduit around the
entire circumference of the conduit. Install sleeve by coiling the sheet steel to a
diameter smaller than the through opening. inserting the coil through the openings
and releasing the coil to let it uncoil against the circular cutouts in the gypsum
wallboard lavers
c. Optional Steel Sleeve (concrete or block sr all): Except for single insulated cables,
provide sleeve cast in floor /wall or mortared into CMU wall; Schedule 40 or
heavier. length to extend a maximum one inch (1 ") from top surface of floor or a
maximum of one inch (1") from both sides of wall.
d. Forming Material- Minimum one inch (I ") thickness mineral -wool batt insulation
material. Tight]) pack into sleeve ttith minimum 1/2" recess on ends.
Manufacturer: Thermafiber Salina Insulation.
2. Firestop system shall be installed at top surface of floor and symmetrically on both sides of
wall assemblies and one (1) side of floor.
3. Alternate floor penetration system (with firestop mortar): UL System No. CAJ 1032.
4. Wires and Cables:
16010 - 8
a. For gypsum frame wall, single cable: Fireproof per UL System No. WL3001.
Opening for cables to be hole -sawed through gypsum wall board layers. Diameter
of opening to be 3'8" to 5,'8" larger than outside diameter of cable. Cable to be
rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Caulk to fill annular space
throughout thickness ofgypsum wall board layers and apply I!4" bead of caulk to
perimeter of cable at its egress from wall (both sides).
b. For gypsum frame wall, multiple cables: Use UL system No. WL3021, WL3045.
WL3046 or equivalent to maintain rating of wall.
c. For concrete walls. /floors or CMU walls. single or multiple cables: Fireproof per
UL System No. CAJ3030. Install sleeve in assembly flush with both sides. Cables
to be a minimum often percent (10 %) and a maximum of thirty -three percent (33 %)
of cross - sectional area of opening. Recess minimum one inch (1 ") thickness of
mineral wool material into opening around cables. Caulk openings around cable to
minimum depth of one inch (I "). Optional sleeve may be used per UL detail
requirements.
5. Reference Architectural for the exact location of all rated «ails. floors. ceilings and
ceiling'roof assemblies.
6. Materials used in firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, provided with materials for specific UL System No.
7. Manufacturer's: 3M. Metacaulk, Hilti, BioFireshield or equal.
B. In non -rated walls identified for sound Insulation, provide 1.2" space between conduit and sleeve
packed with multiple layers of forming material. Allow 5'S" minimum space on each side and caulk
ss ith acoustical sealant.
C. Final condition to prevent passage of fire, smoke, noxious gas and Mater.
D. For non -rated electrical mechanical rooms: Seal all conduit passing through room walls, floors and
ceilings with 3M caulk, Type CP -25 WB+.
3.03 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION
A For the actual fabrication, installation and testing, use only thoroughly trained and experienced
workmen completely familiar with the Items required and with the manufacturer's recommended
methods of installation. In acceptance or rejection of the installed work. no allowance will be made
for lack of skill on the part of workmen.
B Install all specialties as detailed on plans. Where details or specific installation specifications are not
included herein. follow approved manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Install complete. thoroughly check. correctly adjust. clean. and leave ready for operation all equipment
and material connected with this protect.
D Ballasts, contactors. starters. transformers and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier
than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced
E. Electrical service stub locations. sizes and quantities for equipment are approximate only. The
Contractor must verify all service locations. sizes and quantities w ith the equipment supplier before
rough -in.
F. The Electrical Contractor shall make all final connections to all electrical equipment furnished and set
in place by others. including millwork with outlets. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install
all disconnect switches as required.
16010 -9
G. The Electrical Contractor shall provide /install all circuit breakers, power ss inng, conduit systems and
final connections required for operation of heating cable systems.
H. Provide and install all adjustable mounting brackets, steel bar hangers. T -bar mounting clips. support
channels and universal support bridges as required for installation of light fixtures, speakers, alarm
devices and other ceiling mounted des ices. Ceiling tile shall not be used to support ceiling mounted
devices in lay -in ceilings.
3.04 BALANCING SYSTEM
A. Balance the electrical system between the respective phases of the system. Balance individual circuits
in each panel of the system. Where phase assignments or circuit numbers are indicated on the
drawing. do not deviate without the Engineer's approval. All des iations shall be noted on panelboard
submittals and on Record Drawings and schedules.
3.05 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
A Cooperate with other Contractors so that the installation of the electrical materials and equipment may
be properly coordinated. Where a conflict occurs with piping. duct work. etc.. it shall be resolved as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Interferences bets een conduit and other trades shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines
requiring grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the following order of
precedence shall generally be observed:
I. Building Lines
2. Structural Members
3. Soil and Drain Piping
4. Vent Piping
5. Refrigerant Piping
6. Supply. Return, 0 A Ductwork
7. Exhaust Ductwork
8. Chilled and Hot Water Piping
9. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping
10. Natural Gas Piping
11. Electrical Conduit
12. Fire Protection Piping
3 06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A Each Contractor shall compare his drawings and specifications ss ith those of other Trades and report
any discrepancies between them to the Architect and obtain from the Architect written instructions to
snake the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All ssork shall be installed in cooperation
with other Trades installing inter - related work. Before installation. all Trades shall make proper
provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect
B. Locations of conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work with interferences
anticipated and encountered. Exact routing and location of systems shall be determined prior to
fabrication or installation
C. Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit systems shall be made as required to maintain proper
headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings.
D. \\'Isere discrepancies in scope of work as to what Trade pros ides items such as starters, disconnects,
floss switches and the like exist. such conflicts shall be reported to the Architect prior to signing of the
Contract. If such action is not taken. the various Trades shall furnish such items as part of their work
for complete and operable systems.
16010 - 10
E. Verify voltage, phase, termination points and required disconnects for all mechanical and or Owner
famished equipment prior to rough -in. Report discrepancies to Architect'Engineer.
F. The Contractors are to avoid routing conduit through fire rated assemblies where practical. Each trade
is responsible for proper coordination of required sleeves or block -outs with rated assembly installers.
Each trade is responsible for providing sleeves, as required. for his work. Each trade shall verify
acceptable tolerances around penetrating item in fire assembly before beginning fire sealing.
G. Verify voltage, phase, termination points and required disconnects for all electrical equipment
provided by the Owner or other trades. prior to rough - in. Report discrepancies to ArchitectEngineer.
3 07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be famtliar and
comply with all requirements of Public Law 91- 696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq.. the Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with
all of the provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION. ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH
EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET. THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF
ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C F.R. SECS.
1926.652 AND 1926.653. OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS.
3.08 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide three (3) Operation and Maintenance manuals for training of Owner's personnel in operation
and maintenance of systems and related equipment in the manner described elsewhere in these
specifications In addition, organize manuals and include data and narrative as noted below (bind each
manual in a hard - backed looseleaf binder. Use 8 1/2" x 11" white paper).
B. Operating Sequence and Procedures:
1. Contents: In each chapter. describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the
system and equipment covered in that chapter.
2. Typewritten Operating Procedures: Write procedures for start operation and shutdown.
a Start-up: Give complete step -by -step instructions for energizing equipment, making
initial setting and adjustments whenever applicable.
3. Shutdovi n Procedures: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after
operation. if a particular sequence is required, give step - by - step Instructions in that order.
C Maintenance Instructions:
D. Manufacturer's Brochures: Include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering all appurtenances
used in each system. together with illustrations, exploded stews and renew al pans lists. Provide the
nearest manufacturer's representatives name. address and phone number.
E. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected. approved submittals and shop drawings covering
equipment for the project either with the manufacturers brochures or properly identified in a separate
subsection.
F. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment furnished for the project, with a tabulation of
descriptive data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or systems. Properly
identify each part by part number and manufacturer.
3.09 IDENTIFICATION
1 Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of
performance for each preventive maintenance task: i.e.. cleaning, inspection. etc.
16010 - 11
3.10 TESTING
A. Equip the following items with nameplates:
1. All motor starters, panelboards and motor control centers.
2. Control power equipment in separate enclosures including relays.
3. All main switchboard overcurrent devices and spares. and circuit breakers.
4. All branch circuit and power panelboards.
5. Safety disconnect switches.
6. Contactors
B. No dymo (stick on indented plastic) type label will be permitted.
C. identify equipment listed above. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT NUMBERS WITH MECHANICAL
PLANS. Each piece of equipment shall be numbered consistently throughout.
D. Fabricate nameplates as follows:
I. Provide three (3) ply. 1 /16" laminated plastic nameplate material with white core for lettering
and black background. All nameplates, for equipment powered from emergency circuits.
shall have w hite core for lettering and red background.
2. Use capital letters.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum 3'4" high x 2" long nameplates with 1/4"
letters.
4. All labels shall be permanently affixed to the front of all required equipment using two (2)
round head self tapping screws. Self- adhesive labels are not acceptable. Align labels with
equipment.
E. All junction boxes shall have the panel /circuit number(s) identified on the blank coverplate,
handwritten with a permanent black marker. Disconnects. combination motorstarter /disconnects and
manual motor starter shall have the panel /circuit number(s) identified on the inside of the front cover,
hand written with a permanent black marker.
F. Provide engraved coverplates for all switches and control devices w hich are not othenvise clearly
related to the equipment they serve.
A. Test and record results for all power feeders for megger readings. including phase to phase and phase
to __round as recommended b■ the cable manufacturer.
B. Measure service ground resistance
3.11 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
A Submit, at time of request for final inspection. a completed letter in the following format.
I. (Nance) , of (Firm) . certif ■ that the electrical work is complete in accordance with Contract
Plans and Specifications. and authorized change orders (copies attached) and will be ready for final
inspection as of (Date) I further certify that the follow mg specification requirements have been
fulfilled.
I Megger readings performed. six (6) copies of logs attached.
' - Ground tests performed. six (6) copies of method used and results attached, including service
ground readings
16010- 12
3. Operating manuals completed and instructions of operating personnel performed for all
systems, (Date), (Signature, Owner's Representative).
4. Record drawings up - to - date and ready to deliver to En_ineer.
5. All other tests required by Specifications have been performed.
6. Final clean -up is completed.
7. All systems are fully operational.
3 12 DURING FINAL INSPECTION
END OF SECTION
16010- 13
Signed:
A. Demonstrate installation to operate satisfactorily in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
B. Should any portion of installation fail to meet requirements of Contract Documents. repair or replace
items failing to meet requirements until items can be demonstrated to comply.
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 16060
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall breakdown the final Schedule of Values to be used for pay application into the
following minimum categories.
B. All categories shall have appropriate material and labor breakdown.
102 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Mobilization
B. Service - wiring and conduit
C. Site wiring. and conduit
D. Gear
E. Lighting Fixtures
F. Branch Circuit - wiring and conduit
G. Feeders - wiring and conduit
H. Deices
1. Sound Systems
1. Labeling of Equipment
K. Testing
L. Record Dra« mgs and 0 & M Manuals
END OF SECTION
16060 - 1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Electrical demolition.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2 01 EXAMINATION
A. Demolition Drawings are based on field observations and existing Record Documents. Report
discrepancies to Architect'Engineer before disturbing existing installations.
B. Verify field measurements and circuitry arrangements prior to starting demolition.
C. Verify that wiring and equipment to be abandoned sers e only abandoned facilities.
D. Beginning of demolition means the Contractor accepts existing conditions.
2.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical *stems in walls. floors. ceilings. etc. scheduled for removal. Reference
Architectural drawings and specifications for limits of demolition
B. Coordinate utility service outage with Utility company and the Owner. prior to starting demolition.
C Provide temporary wiring and connections to_maintain existing s,s stems in service during construction
When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits. use personnel experienced in such
operations.
2 03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove abandoned wiring. conduit and appurtenances to source of poster (panelboard) or previous
device. including conduits, a iring and appurtenances above accessible ceilings.
B. Remove. relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Cut conduit flush with a ails and floors. and patch surfaces Reference Architectural Specifications
for repairing and painting requirements
D. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets. stems. hangers. and other
accessories.
E. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide
access panels. as required
F Extend existing installations. as required. using materials and methods as specified or that is
compatible with existing electrical installation.
2.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which are to be reused.
16070 -1
SECTION 16070
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed
circuit directory showing revised circuitry arrangements.
Luminaires: Remove designated existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to
clean all exterior and interior surfaces: rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace all
ballasts, lamps and broken electrical parts and'or lenses, as required.
END OF SECTION
16070 -2
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide a complete conduit system as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Conform with the latest requirements of the NEMA. the National Electrical Code. and be UL listed.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rigid galvanized steel.
B. IMC
C. EMT
D PVC - Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC Duct) shall be UL rated.
Conduit fittings and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer and approved for such use.
E. Flexible conduit.
1. Liquid -tight (vibration and'or wet areas) fabricate from continuous lengths of spirally wound
galvanized steel strip interlocked with a gray polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the core
to make the conduit liquid tight. oil proof and bendable to a small radius.
2. Greenfield (vibration and or dry areas)
a. Metal Clad (MC) cable shall be acceptable.
2.02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Perforated iron straps are not permitted for supporting conduits. Conduits run between the webs of
bar joists may use tie wire for securing the conduits.
B. Support horizontal and vertical conduit runs by one -hole malleable straps. clamp -backs or other
approved devices a uh suitable bolts.
C All conduits shall be supported a maximum often feet (10') on center. Also. support conduits within
n+elwe inches (12 ") of any bends, outlet boxes, wall penetrations or joints to pipe. All conduits shall
be secured to structure. Lighting fixture whips may be secured to ceiling tie wires with caddy clips
or acceptable equal. Metal clad cables shall be secured directly to structure or on an acceptable
hanging method. Groups of MC cable shall be gathered together, strapped with tie wrap at 2 1/2'
increments and secured directly to structure or acceptable hanging method.
2.03 FITTINGS AND HARDWARE
A. Pro ide fittings. locknuts. bushings. and hardware that are compatible with the type of conduit used.
16110 - 1
No indenter type of connectors and couplings are allowed.
B. Provide screw -in type fittings for use with flexible conduit.
C. Provide set -screw or compression fittings for EMT.
D. Provide approved MC connectors.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not drill or pierce structural steel members under any circumstances without the Engineer's
specific approval.
B. Do not install conduit that is crushed or deformed in any way.
C. Provide a nonmetallic (nylon. polypropylene. or approved equal) drag line of suitable strength in
spare conduits and telephone conduits. Tightly plug spare conduits at both ends.
D. Do not pull wire into conduit system until the conduit system is complete in all details: in the case of
concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been completed.
3.02 INSTALLATION ABOVE GRADE
A. Minimum size raceway is 1/2 inch.
B. Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit for locations exposed to severe physical damage and in damp
or as et areas and where underground conduit rises exposed above grade or exposed through slab.
C. Install intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) Type I may be used as an option for rigid galvanized steel
conduit in areas permitted by the National Electrical Code.
D. Install electrical metallic tubing (EMT) within enclosed buildings, in furred ceilings or walls, in dry
areas, and exposed above 8 feet above floor. Do not use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) where
exposed to moisture.
E. Provide liquid -tight flexible metal conduit for transformer terminations, motor terminations, and other
equipment where vibration and moisture are present. For other equipment and /or lighting fixtures in
dry areas, conduit may be galvanized, Greenfield. Minimum length is two feet (2') and maximum
length is six feet (6') for all flexible conduit. MC cable use is permitted to exceed six feet (6') in
length for all uses except lighting connections. Flexible conduit other than identified above is NOT
acceptable.
F. Follow manufacturer's recommendations regarding installation, termination, bending, and coupling
of conduit.
G. Provide pull boxes as required or as directed by the Engineer.
f1. Where possible, conceal raceways w 'thin finished walls. ceilings. and floors other than slab -on- grade.
1. Where practical. avoid routing conduit directly above or below equipment. Keep raceways six inches
(6 ") away from parallel runs of flues and hot water pipes. Avoid offsets where possible. Where
necessary, make an approved offset with conduit bending machine.
16110 -2
J. Route conduits and/or metal clad cables above slab parallel to and 90 to building structure.
K. Route conduits from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, pull or junction boxes with locknuts
and bushings in such manner that each system is continuous throughout. Conduit shall not contain
more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 °. total), including those bends located
immediately at the outlet or fitting.
L. Do not suspend raceways or equipment from piping. ceiling grid or ductwork, but provide
independent and separate support methods. Provide toggle bolts or expansion (spider type) anchors
in hollow masonry units, lead expansion bolts in solid masonry or concrete (or preferably use pre -set
concrete inserts in concrete). machine screws, bolts. and wood screws on wood construction. Note:
Nails. of proper type and heads. may be used to anchor in w ood construction in lieu of screws only
where rigid support will be provided by their use. Use of pow er- driven studs is prohibited and is not
allowed on the job
M. Provide fire sealing around conduits penetrating through fire resistance rated walls. partitions, floors
and ceilings. Reference Specification Section 16010 for additional information.
N. Provide maximum six feet (6) of flexible conduit to each grid type light troffer.
O. Coordinate all roofing penetrations w ith Mechanical and General Contractors in order to minimize
the number of penetrations.
P. Route conduit to rooftop equipment below the roof wherever possible. If possible. do not penetrate
roof: go through a high wall above the roof flashing or through a roof curb instead. If roof
penetration is necessary. coordinate with the Architectural Specifications and penetrate as directly
below the equipment disconnect or wiring connection point as possible
Q. No PVC conduit will be allowed above finished grade or finished floor.
R. Conduits may be routed in bar joists and secured with tie wire. However. conduits routed below bar
Joists must utilize acceptable clamps (reference Specification Section 16110. 2.02).
3.03 INSTALLATION BELOW GRADE
A. Minimum size raceway is 3/4 inch.
B Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit or PVC where conduits are installed in concrete floor slab or
passing through any concrete structure PVC conduit shall not penetrate slab above finished grade.
C. Provide rigid galvanized steel or PVC conduit where conduits are installed below grade.
D. Swab clean all conduits before cable installation. Waterproof all conduit joints after cable installation
E. Provide conduit wall sleeves for all conduits penetrating walls. erode beams, etc. below grade and
other locations shown on the Drawings.
F Where required to bend PVC ducts to satisfy indicated routing. prefonn ducts to allow ends of duct
sections to be in a straight alignment. Accomplish prefor nne of ducts by utilizing proper duct heater
units.
G. Perform all necessary exca\ ation and backfilling for proper installation of w ork. Take precautions
not to excavate below depth required. Tamp backfill in six inch (6 ") layers to original grade,
moistening as required for proper compaction All backfilling shall be free from harmful materials.
In areas to be paved, compact to density to receive pavement. Where pavement is broken for the
16110 -3
installation of conduit, repair to original condition. Provide shoring. bracing, and de- watering if
necessary for installation of work. Remove from site all materials encountered which are not suitable
for backfill.
H. When and if damage is caused to underground utility lines or structures. above ground utility lines
or structures, or other purposeful surface conditions. either on or off the right -of -way, make
immediate temporary repairs. At the first opportunity, make permanent repairs which are acceptable
to the Owner. All such repairs shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
I. Where necessary, provide barricades around open excavations to prevent endangering the public.
Provide warning beacon lighting at night to adequately mark all excavations.
J. Where conduits embedded in concrete floor or roof deck cross expansion joints, they shall be joined
together using O.Z. Gedney type DX expansion fittings and bonding jumpers. Straight runs of
conduit over 150' long shall have O.Z. Gedney Type AX expansion fittings installed to minimize
movement. Fittings shall be installed at a maximum of 150' on center.
K. Where horizontal runs of conduit transition to vertical and continue above finished grade or finished
floor: the transition shall be made with a 90 degree long radius sweep. The sweep may be PVC (2"
and smaller) and shall be RGS (2 1'2" and larger). No PVC conduit will be allowed above finished
grade or finished floor.
END OF SECTION
14110 -4
PART1- GENERAL
16120 -1
' WA:.4o, 2 R J5 got
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway systems as shown on the drawings and hereinafter
specified. Route all wire through an approved raceway unless otherwise indicated. regardless of
voltage application.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Provide conductors in accordance with the applicable sections of UL and IPCEA Standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Engineer shop submittals for each type of wire and cable.
13. Provide shop submittals which includes the following information:
1 Insulation type.
2. Insulation temperature rating.
3 Manufacturer.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wire and Cables (600 Volts)
I. Provide copper wire and copper ground conductors. Conductors shown on plans are thusly
sized.
Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be :12. how ever, 614 may be used for
motor control circuits w here specified on the drawings. For HVAC controls, 616
AWG may be used.
b. All conductors 68 and larger shall be stranded.
2. Provide copper conductors of annealed. 98 percent conductivity soft drawn copper Provide
stranded conductors for control circuits.
T
B Metal clad cable shall be acceptable Reference Specification Section 161 10. 2.01. E
C. Insulation (600 Volts)
I. Provide all conductor insulation types rated for w et and dry locations and approved by the
National Electrical Code for the particular application Provide all wire and cable with the
following (or better) insulation classes:
a. All feeders and branch circuits are to be dual -rated Type THHN/THWN, except
250MCM and larger conductors w hich ma} also be T} pe XHHW.
b Insulation rated for operation at 600 volts.
c. In areas where the temperature will exceed 167 ° F.. provide wire rated 105
C. minimum and a type approved by the local code. Include any wiring within three
feet (3') horizontally or ten feet (10') above any heating appliance.
3.01 INSTALLATION
2. Color code in accordance with the wiring diagrams famished with equipment All twins for
control systems to be installed in conjunction with mechanical and.or miscellaneous
equipment. Color code by line or phase all branch circuit wiring, including circuits to motors
and feeders as follows: Wire No. 6 and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire No. 4 and
larger may be color coded by color taping within six inches (6 ") of exposed ends Verify
color coding with authority having jurisdiction.
120,208 Volt
Phase A - Black
Phase B - Red
Phase C - Blue
Neutral - White
Ground - Green
D. Wire and cable (50 volts or less):
B. Wire Connections and Devices
16120 -2
277 480 Volts
Phase A - Brown
Phase B - Yellow
Phase C - Purple
Neutral - Gray
Ground - Green
I. Provide copper wire. minimum size 4'16 AWG for controls. >I8 AWG minimum for fire
alarm and 4'20 AWG minimum for communications. All wire and cable shall be solid.
Stranded conductors are not acceptable.
2. All conductors shall be routed in conduit or shall have an insulation approved for plenum
installation. unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Unless otherwise indicated wiring size noted on the drawings extend for the entire length of a circuit.
Install wire in raceoays in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use a UL
approved wire - pulling lubricant. Strip insulation so as to avoid nicking of wire.
1. Provide all terminating fittings, connectors. etc.. of a type suitable for the specific cable.
Make all fittings up tight. Make up all terminations in strict conformance with manufacturer's
recommendations using special washers. nuts. etc.. as required.
2. Connect No. 8 and larger wire to panels and apparatus with properl 'sized, solderless, or
compression lugs or connectors.
3. Join No. 10 and smaller wire by twisting tight and applying UL listed twist -on connectors.
4. Lease at least an eight inch (8 ") loop of st ire for ends at each outlet box for the installation
of fixtures or devices.
C. Flashover or insulation value of joints shall equal that of the conductor. Provide connectors rated at
600 volts for general use and 1000 volts for use within fixtures.
D. Group conductors into conduit as indicated on the drawin_s. Nov, ever. several branch circuit "home
runs" (the distance from the supplying panel to the closest circuit utilization) may be grouped (except
ground fault protected circuits) into one (1) conduit with a maximum of 3 phase conductors (each a
different phase) and one (1) common neutral No grouping allowed which would require derating by
the National Electrical Code. unless specifically indicated on the drawinus.
E. Where the distance between the supplying panel and the first branch circuit receptacle or light is more
than 100 feet. provide minimum No. 10 wire for this distance.
F. Wiring for emergency systems shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment
as required by Article 700 of the NEC.
3.02 TESTING
A. Prior to energizing feeders. perform insulation resistance tests at 500 Volts D.C. for 30 seconds on
each cable with respect to ground and adjacent cables. Maintain the following log for feeder tests:
FEEDER DESCRIPTION:
TESTER'S NAME:
TEST INSTRUMENT SERIAL f:
TEST DATE:
RESISTANCE:
A_B A = C 4 = G B_C B -G C-G
B. Test all circuits for proper neutral connections.
C. Upon completion of all testing, prepare a detailed report of all voltage and insulation resistance
measurements. Deliver report to Engineer with request for final inspection.
END OF SECTION
16120 - 3
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 16130
OUTLET BOXES. PULL
BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Provide outlet boxes in accordance with the National Electrical Code at locations shown on the
Drawings and hereinafter specified.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide hot - dipped galvanized pressed steel boxes, minimum I -1 /2 inches deep.
B. Provide standard outlet boxes for junction and pull boxes of 150 cubic inches or less: cabinets with
screw covers or as specifically noted for junction or pull boxes larger than 150 cubic inches.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Through [t all boxes and boxes mounted back -to -back are not permitted. Provide 8 inch minimum
separation in order to minimize sound transmission.
B. Set flush with wall or ceiling finish in accordance with N.E.C.. Article 370 Extension sleeves are not
permitted for boxes improperly set.
C. Verify location of outlets prior to rough -in. When necessary. relocate outlets to avoid interference
ss ith other work or equipment. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling. provide
a junction box and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceilings or walls
with appropriate covers.
D. Where more than one (1) switch or device is located at one (1) point. unless otherwise indicated.
provide gang boxes and covers When the voltage between switches exceeds 300 volts, provide
barrier partitions benteen adjacent switches located in the satne box Sectional switch boxes or utility
boxes not permitted.
E Provide pressed steel boxes for concealed work. Provide four inch (4 ") square boxes with 1/2 inch
raised cover for exposed n ork in utility areas.
F. Do not drill and pierce structural concrete members and structural steel without prior approval of the
Engineer.
G. Mount all boxes plumb.
H. Mount boxes completely rigid without conduit or finished wall support.
1. Where outlets are installed in steel stud type systems, provide additional cross bracing, bridging,
and or straps as required to stake the outlet completely rigid prior to the application of the wall facing
material.
J. Dimensions are from finished floor to centerline of outlets. Adjust heights of outlets in masonry walls
from that indicated so that outlet box will set in corner of block or brick. Outlet height so adjusted
shall be consistent. Unless otherwise indicated, mount outlets at the following heights:
Wall snitches 4 ft - 0 in.
16130- 1
Duplex receptacles
Weatherproof duplex receptacles
Telephone outlets
Pay telephone outlets
END OF SECTION
16130 -2
I ft. - 4 in.
1 ft. -6 in.
I ft. - 4 in.
4 fr. -O in.
K. For boxes installed above ceilings. label the boxes with the circuit numbers installed.
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide switches and receptacles as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.
102 STANDARDS
A. Provide all receptacles which conform with NEMA standards for amperage and voltage classification.
B. Provide devices U L. listed for the application and for the type of wire used.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell
B. General Electric
C. Arrow Hart
D. Leviton
E. Bryant
F. Pass Se Seymour
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Engineer shop submittal for each device.
B. Provide shop submittals sthich includes the following information
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MATERIALS
I. Manufacturer and catalog number.
2. NEMA configuration.
3. Voltage and amperage ratings.
C. Device Plates:
16140 - 1
SECTION 16140
DEVICES
Receptacles: Provide receptacles as specified in the schedule on Drawings. Verify the exact type
receptacle required before ordering. Receptacles powered front emergence circuits shall be red.
B Sts itches: Provide sss itches as specified in the schedule on Drawings. Switches controlling circuits
from emergency power shall be red
I. Unless otherwise indicated. provide smooth metal device plates of Type 430 stainless steel
for all indoor devices. Cover plates for devices served by emergency circuits shall be red.
Provide telephone and data outlets with blank covers.
3 Provide vertical single lift device plate of aluminum die cast for weatherproof receptacles
D Floor Outlets
I. Provide where shown on the drawings, cast adjustable rectangular floor boxes.
2. Receptacle floor outlets specified as duplex shall have duplex screw cap coverplates.
Telephone and'or data floor outlet boxes to have combination screw cap coverplate.
3. Provide brass carpet flanges for each floor box installed in carpeted areas.
4. Multiple device locations shall incorporate two (2) or three (3) gang outlet box.
E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles within 6 feet of any sink, lavatory or wet area.
F. Provide a receptacle in all mechanical/electrical rooms.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices of the type as indicated on drawings. Make up all connections tight and set
device plumb. Use care in installing device in order to pre% ent damage to the device and the wire in
the outlet box.
B. Device Plates: Provide a device plate for each outlet to sun the device installed and install blank
plates or covers for junction boxes and empty outlets, including telephone, computer. etc.
C. Mount duplex receptacles vertically with grounding opening down unless otherwise noted.
D. Prior to installation of outlets other than 20A, 120 Volts. verify receptacle type with Owner through
Architect. Receptacles not h erified shall be changed at Electrical Contractor's expense if necessary
to operate equipment.
E. Install all switches that are required to be handicap accessible at proper height per latest handicap
standards.
F. Provide cross bracing between wall studs, as required to install switches, thermostats. intercom .
devices. etc. Device boxes shall be aligned on center line of each box.
G. Receptacles installed for electric water coolers shall be mounted at a height so as not to be visible after
installation of E \VC. Coordinate with equipment being provided
H. Provide one (1) duplex GFI receptacle adjacent to mechanical equipment, located on roof or ground
and not more than 25 feet from all exterior HVAC equipment. Connect receptacles together
(maximum of 8) and homerun to the nearest available panelboard.
END OF SECTION
16140 - 2
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide and install manual motor starters where shown on drawings and as hereinafter specified
1.02 STANDARD
A. UL Listed.
B. Conform to the latest NEMA Standards.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Square D
B. Cutler Hammer
C. ITE Siemens.
D. General Electric.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
- A Pros ide data sheets that includes equipment voltage.'current rating. catalog, numbers. horsepower rating,
and other such descriptive data which may be required
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. All manual motor starter st itches shall consist of topple operated two (2) or three (3) pole switches
mounted in a NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure unless exposed to outdoor conditions: then mount
in NEMA 3R enclosure.
B Contacts shall be double break sits er alloy.
C. Terminals shall be supplied. clearly marked and accessible from front of switch.
D. Switch shall be equipped With melting alloy type thermal oterload relay. Thermal unit shall be of
one -piece construction and inter - changeable. Staner shall be inoperative if thermal unit is removed.
E. Toggle switch shall be furnished «n a handle guard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Confirm pith Mechanical and 'or Plumbing Contractor prior to mounting switch on respective
equipment.
SECTION 16155
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Securely mount switches in accordance with NEC and all local codes. Provide all mounting materials
and hardy. are.
END OF SECTION
16155 - 1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 16158
COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS
PART] - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide full voltage combination starters utilizing fused so itches ss here indicated on the Drawings and
herein specified.
1.02 STANDARD
A. UL listed.
B. Conform to the latest NEMA standards.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Allen - Bradley.
B. Cutler Hammer
C. Square D.
D. ITE Siemens.
E. General Electric.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Engineer shop submittal for each starter size. type and enclosure type.
B. Provide shop submittals which includes the folios+ing information:
I. Starter size as rated by NEMA.
2. NEMA enclosure type.
3. Number of au\tltary contacts.
4. Sts itch ratings.
5 Manufacturer catalog numbers.
6. Maintenance manuals. installation manuals, renewal parts, recommended spare parts (10
copies of each).
7. Other descriptive data as may be required
8. Potter monitors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STARTERS
A. Provide electrically operated, electrically held. three pole assemblies with arc extinguishing
characteristics. Provide silver -to -sits er renewable contacts.
16158- 1
B. Provide three (3) ambient temperature compensated bimetallic overload relays. one (1) per each
ungrounded phase. Provide overload reset button.
C. Include with each starter a "hand- off - automatic" selector switch. a _green "stop" pilot light. and a red
"run" pilot light mounted in the door of each starter.
D. Include with each starter minimum of two (2) additional normal open contacts and 1 normal close
contact.
E. Include with each starter a 480 -120 volt control transformer whenever motor voltage is 460 volt, 3
phase.
F. Provide lugs UL listed for copper cable.
2.02 FUSED SWITCH
A. Provide quick -make. quick -break switches.
B. Accept Class R dimension fuses.
C. Combination safety interrupt 100.000 amperes.
2.03 ENCLOSURE
A. Provide NEMA 4x enclosure where exposed to corrosis e atmosphere.
B. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where exposed to rain or continuous moisture (Le.: adjacent to cooling
toners).
C. Pros ide NEMA I enclosure n hen located indoors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Securely mount combination starters in accordance with the NEC Provide all mounting hardware
B. Size overload relays according to manufacturer's recommendation for horsepower and KVA code of
the motor to be started.
C Pros ide nameplates as described in Section 16010. 3.09.
D. POWER MONITORS for three phase motors (5HP and larger) shall be protected against single
phasing by the addition of porter monitors to the control circuits. Power monitors shall be Time Mark
Model No. 258. or approved equal. Include in submittals.
E. In general. combination starters must be mounted on an independent and separate support system, not
on the equipment being ser%ed. Where such an independent support n ould require penetrating or
resting on a roof. it is preferable to mount on the equipment. In no case. however, may the switch
interfere with access to or operation of the equipment. nor shall the sss itch be located within the
significant impact zone of a flue or other high temperature component.
END OF SECTION
16158 -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
F. Provide lugs U L. listed for copper cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
16170 - I
SECTION 16170
SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OR WORK
A. Provide safety switches as indicated on the Drawings and specifications or as required.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Conform to U.L. listed and the latest NEMA standards.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Cutler Hammer
B. Square D.
C. General Electric
D. ITE Siemens.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A Furnish Engineer shop submittal for safety disconnect switches.
B. Provide shop submittals which Include the following. information:
1. NEMA hype.
2 Enclosure type.
3. Ampere rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide safety switches appropriately rated for use with electrical system 600 Vac for 480 volts, 250
Vac for 208 volts and etc.
B. Provide safety switches NEMA heavy duty t). pe HD. and horsepower rated for A/C motors.
C. Unless otherwise indicated. pro ide non -fused (NF) switches. Switches requiring fuses and rated 600
amps and below shall be pros ided «ith rejection clips. Switches rated lamer than 600 amps shall have
Class "L" fuse connections provided.
D. Unless otherwise indicated. provide safety switches in NEMA 1 enclosure located on the interior of
building. Unless otherwise indicated. provide safety sit itches In NEMA 3R enclosure located on the
exterior of the building or in n et locations.
E. Provide quick -make and quick -break operating handle. Provide mechanisms which are an Integral part
of the box.
A. Securely mount safety switches in accordance with the N.E.C. Provide all mounting materials and
mount safety switches vertically.
B. In general. safety switches must be mounted on an independent and separate support s stem. not on
the equipment being served. Where such an independent support would require penetrating or resting
on a roof. it is preferable to mount on the equipment. In no case. however. may the switch interfere
with access to or operation of the equipment, nor shall the switch be located within the significant
impact zone of a flue or other high temperature component.
END OF SECTION
16170 -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide lighting contactors as show n on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.
1.02 STANDARDS
A Approved per UL 508 and designed in accordance with NFPA 1052-211B
B. UL listed.
C. Conform to the latest NEMA Standards.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A Square D.
B. Cutler Hammer.
C. General Electric.
D. ITE Siemens
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish Engineer shop submittals for contactors.
B. Provide shop submittal which includes the following information:
I. Voltage and ampere rating.
2. Wiring diagram
3. Enclosure tpe.
4. Coil voltage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A Continuously current rated
B. Capable of making_ and breaking all cases of loads w ithout the aid of auxiliary arcing contacts.
Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable.
C Industrial duty rated for applications to 600 volts maximum.
2.02 MATERIALS
SECTION 16195
CONTACTORS
A. Totally closed. double break. sds er to silver power contacts. Contact inspection and replacement shall
be possible w uhout disturbing line or load wiring.
B. Provide terminals with straight through wiring and accept copper wire.
C. Provide switches or provisions for switches as indicated on the drawings.
D. Unless otherwise indicated. provide contactor in NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
16195 - I
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Securely mount lighting contactor. Provide all mounting hardware.
END OF SECTION
16195 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide and install fuses as shown on the Drawings and as hereinafter specified.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Conform with the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code. NEMA and be UL listed.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Bussman.
B. Gould.
C. Little Fuse.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Time Delay /Dual Element (Class R) fuses 1 /10 through 600 amps.
B. Time Delay'Dual Element (Class RK5) fuses 1 /10 through 200 amps. where noted.
C. Time Delay (Class L) fuses 601 - 6000 amps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized.
13. Test and inspection shall be made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a
thorough cleaning. tightening and review of all electrical connections and inspection of all grounding
conductors.
C All fuses shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
D. All fuses shall be of the sane manufacturer.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A. Mains. Feeders and Branch Circuits.
Circuit 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting dual - element. time delay
fuses. All dual - element fuses shall have separate overload and short- circuit elements. The
fuse must hold 500 o of rated current for a minimum often (10) seconds, with an interrupting
rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK -I (or RK -5
where specifically permitted).' They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the
specifications. and placed to a conspicuous location on the enclosure.
2 Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting time delay fuses. Fuse
link shall be pure silver links (99.9 %) pure), to limit the short circuit current let through
valves to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. Fuses
1 6430 - 1
SECTION 16430
FUSES
shall be time -delay and must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of four (4) seconds
with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL
Class L. "CAUTION" labels to alert the end user of engineered level of protection of the
electrical equipment. shall be field installed by the Electrical Contractor. The ■ shall be
marked with the proper fuse rating. per the specifications. and placed in a conspicuous
location on the enclosure.
3. Motor Circuits - All individual motors rated for 200 horsepower or less shall be protected
by time delay!dual- element fuses. The fuses for motors shall be installed in ratings
approximately 125% of motor full load current. except where high ambient temperatures
prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to a
full speed quickly. such as large fans. Motors shall be protected by fuses of the rating shown
on the Drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class RK -I (or RK -5 where specifically permitted)
Dual Element/Time Delay. "CAUTION" labels to alert the end user of the engineered level
of protection of the electrical equipment shall be field installed by the Electrical Contractor.
They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating. per the specifications. and placed in a
conspicuous location on the enclosure.
END OF SECTION
16430 - 2
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1 6450 - 1
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Provide a complete grounding system in strict accordance n ith Article 250 of the National Electrical
Code and as hereinafter specified and shown on the Draw ings.
A. Provide copper clad 3/4" x 10 ft. - 0" long ground rods. appurtenances. bonding plates. clamps.
connectors and grounding conductors as required.
A. Properly ground all service equipment conduit systems. supports. cabinets. equipment. motor frames,
fixtures, etc., and the grounded circuit conductor in accordance with the latest issue of the National
Electrical Code. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings. clamps, etc.. as required
for complete grounding. Route ground conductors to provide the shortest and most direct path to the
ground electrode system. Bond conduit if made of current conducting material. All ground
connections shall have clean contact surfaces. Bond the service equipment to a grounding electrode
as shown on the Drawings.
B. Provide a grounding type bushing for all feeder and branch circuit conduits which do not have a
grounding conductor and individually bond this raceway' to the enclosure's ground bus or lug.
C. Provide a grounding type bushing on the end of each isolated section of metal conduit and band the
conduit to the equipment grounding conductor. or using a conductor of the same size, bond directly
to the equipment ground buss of the equipment at the end of the run.
D. Make single or dual connections to ground rods. plates. and other buried connections by the
exothermic process (Cadweld) or Bumdy Hyground TM Compression Systems and "hammer tested"
to insure that a good bond has been made. Alternatively all below grade compression grounding
systems must meet all UL467. CSA. IEEE837 test requirements and conform to the National Electrical
Code Standards. The material at the connectors shall be pure wrought copper extrusions, rod and
seamless tubing and be identical material to the conductor Connectors must be of heavy duty design
and be of range taking design to accept conductor ranges of n6 solid to 500 Kcmil plus 1/2", 5.'8 ", 3/4"
and 1" ground rods Compression connectors need to be compressed with system engineered tooling
which makes a circumferential or round crimp. Hex crimp is not acceptable due to sharp flashes and
spurs that may occur. Each connector must be clearly marked with catalog number. conductor size
and installation die information. Inspection ports must be provided on lug terminations and splices.
The system must emboss all the appropriate die index number on all connectors after completion of
the crimp. Connectors must be prefilled with penetrox copper type oxidation inhibitor and be
individually sealed m clear poly ethy lene sheet to keep out dirt and contamination.
E. Drive grounding electrodes as required. Where rock is encountered, grounding plates of copper,
x 24 -in. x 24 -in, may be used in lieu of grounding rods. Plates must be installed at 36"
minimum below finished grade
F. Provide a grounding terminal pad in all panelboards, switchboards, and other electrical equipment to
be connected to the main service entrance with a copper _round conductor.
G. Directly ground to the work piece welding machines used in construction. The use of the building or
equipment steel or conduits of any kind as a common ground point is not allowed under an
conditions Contractor is responsible for any electrical pieces of equipment damaged b■ not using the
%%elder grounding method described above.
H. Provide a green insulated grounding conductor in all conduit serving receptacles and'or equipment
Refer to panelboard schedules for sizing.
3.02 TESTING
A. Following completion of installation. test system ground for continuity and test resistance to ground
by "fall of potential' method and all feeders or sub - feeders tstth appropriate meggers. or other
approved instruments and methods. to determine ground and insulation resistance values.
B Submit logs of values obtained. nameplate data of instruments used and iristrument calibration data
prior to final inspection. Instruments used are subject to approval.
END OF SECTION
1 6450 - 2
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
SECTION 16460
TRANSFORMER DRY TYPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide dry type transformers as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Underwriters' Laboratories listed, where listing applies.
_13. Designed to meet applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute (ANSI C89.1).
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA STI -4). and Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Cutler Hammer.
B. Square D.
C. ITE Siemens
D. General Electric.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A The shop drawings shall contain the following information
PART? - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
I. KVA.
2. Voltage. primary and secondary.
3. Dimensions and weight.
4. Sound level.
5 Mounting (wall or floor).
6 Taps (FCBN and FCAN).
A. Transformers must be constructed with grain oriented magnetic circuit steel to minimize no load losses
and exciting current. and inter - laminar vibrations
B Transformers shall be designed for continuous operations at rated KVA. tss enty -four hours a day, 365
days a year. ssith normal life expectancy as defined in IEEE 4
C. All materials used in the transformer shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as
defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635.
D. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2.02 MATERIALS (I5KVA and ABOVE)
A. Provide four 2 -12 percent taps FCBN and two 2-12. percent taps FCAN on the primary side. Taps
shall be brought to a terminal board accessible by remos ing a panel.
16460 - I
13. Provide conventional dry type transformers suitable for indoor service and enclosed in a sheet metal
housing. Housing shall be equipped for conduit connections. Transformers installed outdoors or in
wet locations shall be provided a ith weather shield and NEMA 3R rated enclosure.
C. The core-coil assembly shall be designed and mechanically braced to withstand short circuit tests as
defined in NEMA TR 27 by the use of full scale testing. The coil construction and mechanical bracing
members shall be such as to prevent mechanical degradation of the insulation structures during short
circuit.
D. Transformer case shall be of the self - bracing type. Enclosures shall be provided with lifting holes to
facilitate handling and installation ss ithout removal of any of the enclosure components.
E. The following tests must be given all units at the factory:
1. Applied voltage test (I minute) - 600 Volt Class - 4 KV.
2. Induced voltage test - 2 times normal for 7200 cycles.
3. Ratio and phase relation.
Certified test reports on electrically duplicated units shall be submitted with approval drawings
certifying that the following tests have been performed on the first rating of any design: No -load
losses. total losses. applied voltage. induced voltage. sound ley el. impulse test. and temperature rise.
F. Provide an insulation system classification of 150 degree C temperature rise above 40 degree C
ambient. Provide insulating materials in accordance with NEMA ST20 -1972 standards for 220 degree
C U.L component recognized insulation system.
G. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 degree C above a 40 degree
C ambient.
H. Maximum sound level shall be as follows:
0 -9KVA 40 db
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
51 -150 KVA 50 db 301 -500 KVA60 db
10 -50 KVA 45 db 151 -300 KVA 55 db
A. Provide 36" long (maximum). liquid -tight (for outdoor or poet locations) or Greenfield (for indoor or
dry locations) conduit connections to the transformers. Provide cut sections of Korfund "Elasti -rib"
for all contact areas between shall and floor and mount in such a manner as to reduce sound
transmission. All transformers. suspended from structure shall utilize spring isolators to minimize
vibration transfer to the structure.
13. Any transformer causing objectionable sound will be required to be replaced.
C. Set taps under load conditions for correct voltage.
D Mount all transformers plumb and rigid.
E. Maintain the same clearances and spacm_ as specified by the manufacturer and NEC Section 450.
Incorporate these dimensions into electrical room and closet I'4" scale drawings are to be submitted
to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
16460 -2
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 16471
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide branch circuit panelboards as shown on the Drast ings and as herein specified.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Provide UL label.
B Comply with applicable standards of NEMA and the NEC.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D.
B. Cutler Hammer.
C. ITE Siemens.
D. General Electric.
E. All equipment within panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Engineer shop submittal for each branch circuit panelboard
B Pros ide shop submittal which includes the following:
1 Cabinet
3. Busing
a Housing
b Trim
c. Outline dimensions
d. Mailable spaces
e. Panelboard mounting
Circuit breakers
a. Frame size
b. Trip setting
c. Class
d. Interrupting rating in RMS Symmetrical amperes
e Mounting
f. Voltage rating
a. Ampere rating
b. Material
c. Incoming cable lug: size
d. Bus bracing
4. Maintenance manuals. installation manuals, renewal parts, recommended spare parts (10
copies of each).
16471 -1
5. Manufacturer's catalog numbers.
6. Other descriptive data as may be required.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2 01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Busing
1. Provide tin plated aluminum or plated copper busing.
2. Provide full size insulated neutral bus bar.
3. Provide bracing equal to the rated interrupting capacity of the smallest circuit breaker in the
panelboard. Refer to drawings for minimum bracing.
4. Provide full height phase busing. Reduction is not allowed.
5. Make all bus and stub connections of such a size as to limit the teinperature to 50 degrees C.
when carrying full load current.
6. Arrange bus bar taps for sequence sharing of branch circuit devices.
7. Provide suitable lug on neutral busing for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral
connection.
S. Provide a tin- plated aluminum or plated copper grounding terminal pad for the equipment
grounding system. Grounding pad shall be separate from the insulated neutral bus. Ground
pad or bar shall be copper.
9. Equip all spaces with busing and mounting straps for the maximum device that can be fined
into space.
10 Provide mechanical (bolt type) wire connectors
B. Labeling
I. Provide typewritten directory card mounted under a transparent protective cover, set in a
metal frame on the inside of the cabinet door. Provide directory with the following
information:
a. Panel designation
b Point from ss hich It is fed.
c. Individual branch circuit identification (as shorn on the panel schedules) load
served and location. CIRCUIT LABELING SHALL AGREE WITH EQUIPMENT
DESIGNATIONS. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR.
Provide manufacturer's nameplate affixed to the front of the panelboard containing the
following.
a. Manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturers panelboard type designation.
Manufacturer's identification reference.
16471 -2
d. Voltage rating.
e. Continuous current rating.
f. Frequency rating.
C. Interiors
1. Design interiors so that circuit breakers can be replaced ss ithout disturbing adjacent units and
without removing the main bus connectors.
2. Design interior so that circuits may be changed ss ithout machining- drilling or tapping.
3. Arrange branch circuit using double row construction.
4. Branch circuit numbering by manufacturer.
D. Enclosure -
1. Make enclosure from galvanized code gauge steel.
2. Unless otherwise noted, provide general purpose enclosures. Mounting as indicated on
Drawings.
3. Provide minimum four interior mounting studs.
4. Maximum height 90 inches
E. Trim
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. Provide hinged door covering all circuit breakers Door shall not uncover any live parts.
Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position Provide a flush, stainless
steel cy linder type lock with catch and spring loaded door pull. Key locks alike.
2. Fabricate trims from code gauge sheet steel.
3. Trims for flush panels shall overlap box a minimum of 3'4 inch all around. Trims for surface
panels shall have the same ss idth and height as the box.
4. Fasten trims with quarter turn clamps.
5. Paint trim with manufacturer's standard gray enamel over a rust resistant phosphatizmg
primer.
A. Provide circuit breakers with frame size, trip settings and UL listed RMS Symmetrical ampere
interrupting rating shossn on the Drawings.
B. Pros ide molded case, bolt -on type
C. Pros ide thermal magnetic type circuit breakers employing quick -make, quick -break mechanisms for
manual operation as sell as automatic operation.
D. Indicate automatic tripping by the breaker handle assuming a distinctive position from manual "ON"
and "OFF ".
16471 -3
E. Provide multi -pole breakers with a common trip. Tie handles for multi -pole breakers without common
trip are not permitted.
F. Minimum size circuit breaker shall be 20 amps unless otherwise noted.
G. Provide HACR rated circuit breakers for air conditioning. heating and refrigeration equipment having
motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR t} pe circuit breaker.
H. Provide HID rated circuit breakers for service to HID (high intensity discharge) and fluorescent
lighting systems.
I. Provide only full one inch (1") height breakers; half height or tandem two (2) to a pole breakers are
not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install box. trim and interior rigid and plumb. Center interior tt nit opening.
B. Install panelboards in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the
Drawing. Install complete with all required electrical connections
C Unless otherwise noted. install panelboards with the top of the trim 6 ft. 0 in. above finished floor.
D. Field check panelboard loading and reconnect circuits as required to provide balanced phase and line
loads
E. Neatly bundle. route and support cables installed in wiring _utters of panelboards. Minimum bending
radii as recommended by the wire and cable manufacturer.
F. Install three (3) 3'4" conduits from top of flush mounted panelboards to accessible void above ceiling.
Cap end of conduits above ceiling.
G All recessed panels are to be installed in six inch (6 ") minimum wall thickness. Coordinate clear
dimensions with Architect and General Contractor prior to rough -in.
END OF SECTION
16471-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. Provide all lighting fixtures and equipment as specified in the fixture schedule: Include all necessary
accessories and appurtenances required for a complete and operating system whether or not
specifically shown.
1.02 STANDARD
A. Provide all materials and accessories. whether specifically described or not. of the best grade of the
commercial manufacturer. Provide first class workmanship in every respect.
B Provide all lighting fixtures with Underwriters' label and manufacturer's label. Attachment of U L.
labels after delivery of fixtures is not acceptable.
C. Manufacture all lighting fixtures in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
D. Ballasts
1. Provide ballasts for fluorescent lamps which meet U.L. specifications for Class P listing.
applicable ANSI Standard Ballast Specifications. and certified by C.B.M.
2. Provide ballasts for HID lamps which comply with the UL Standard for High- Intensity
Discharge Lamp Ballasts.
E. Provide lamps manufactured by General Electric. North American Phillips or Sylvania. Unless
otherwise indicated. lamp designations shown on the fixture schedule are General Electric.
1 03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Lithonia
B. Cooper
C Columbia
D. Thomas
E. Lightolier
F. Others as scheduled or noted
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Engineer shop drao ings for each fixture.
B Provide shop drawing which includes the following information:
I. Fixture t pe per the fixture schedule.
2. Manufacturer of the fixture.
3. Physical dimensions of the fixture
4. Manufacturer's standard finish.
5 Fixture output distribution cures with utilization parameters.
6. Ballast temperature rating. voltage. wattage. and manufacturer
7. Material type and thickness of lens
S. Accessories for installation such as swivel hangers
9. Number and type of lamps.
1.05 PRODUCTS STORAGE AND HANDLING
16510 -1
A. Protect fixtures delivered to the job site from the entrance of water and dust at all times. Replace
fixtures damaged by improper handling or storage.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all fixtures as called for in the schedules complete with lamps.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise noted.
C. Design all recessed or semi - recessed fixtures compatible with ceilings as installed. Provide frames
w here required for proper installation.
D. Furnish complete. all fixtures requiring end caps, mounting spacers or other necessary items whether
the catalog number shown includes such items or not.
E. Conceal all fixture parts within the fixture construction.
F. Provide safety chains on all high -bay fixtures whether the catalog number shown includes it or not.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A Set luminaries true. free of light leaks. warps, dents or other irregularities. Provide the length of stems
as required to hang all luminaries level and in the same plane. Verify the t} pe of all ceilings before
bidding. and provide fixtures and mountings to suit. Mount all fixtures at a position and height to clear
equipment. ductwork. piping. etc.. in mechanical rooms, storage rooms. etc.
B. Support luminaries only from structural elements which are capable of carrying the total weight
Mount all lighting fixtures rigid with no rocking action.
C. The locations of all lighting fixtures as shown are approximate. It is understood that they are subject
to such modifications as may be found necessary or desirable at the time of installation in order to
meet field conditions. Make such changes without extra charge: however. obtain approval from
Engineer before any work is started which involves such modifications.
D. install ballasts and fixtures in accordance w ith the NEC and ANSI Standards.
E. Adjust all floodlights and spotlights to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. Connect all exit and emergency lighting fixtures to the nearest unswttched circuit or the nearest
emergency circuit
G. Provide and install necessary hardware and accessories to maintain 1.5 inches clearance from
combustible material on all light fixtures with ballast.
H. Provide all exit signs with required directional arrows. to indicate direction of egress travel.
1. Fixtures shall NOT be daisy chained together.
3.02 CLEAN UP
A. Leave all fixtures in clean condition. free of din and defects.
END OF SECTION
16510 -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
n1xtures and equipment as specified in the fixture schedule. Include all
appurtenances required for a complete and operating system tt hether or not
i gessories. whether specifically described or not. of the best grade of
r. liovide first class workmanship in every respect.
es th Underwriters' label and manufacturer's label. Attachment of U L.
ttt�s will not be acceptable.
ures in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
Eat tt hich comply with the U.L. Standard for High- Intensity Discharge
it jbv General Electric, North American Phillips or Sylvania Unless
designations shown on the fixture schedule are General Electric.
te�
1
1
1
tit ings for each fixture.
iclicludes the following information:
the fixture schedule.
th xture.
on f the fixture.
:andard finish
tm ded by the manufacturer.
str nion curves and photometrics
ire tins. soltage, wattage, and manufacturer.
lens
w� approved shop drawings on pole, post and ballard light fixtures for
ire base.
IDG
1
16530 -
SECTION 16520
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
to t e fob site from the entrance of tt ater and dust at all times. Replace
ap andling or storage.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide luminaire complete with the fixture housing. refractor. lamp. and ballast.
B. Provide type, wattage, and voltage lamp designated on Drawings.
C. Where indicated on Drawings. provide parking lot poles and floodlight poles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Orient lighting fixtures as shown on Drawings
B. Adjust all floodlights and spotlights to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Coordinate exact location of lighting fixtures with Architect prior to rough -in.
3.02 CLEAN UP
A. Leas e all fixtures and poles in clean condition. free of dirt and defects.
END OF SECTION
16520 -2
ROUND ROCK PUBLIC WORKS SECTION 16710
EMPTY RACEWAY ROUGH -IN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment. accessories and material required for the rough -
in of empty raceway systems in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
B. Rough raceway sections for indicated devices and outlets in all walls and floors sufficient to
facilitate installation of the following s\ stems without cutting or otherwise damaging NN alls. ceilings
or floors installed in this contract:
1. Communications
2. Fire Alarm
3. Television
4. Data
5. Security
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construct each item of equipment. including parts and accessories, in a workmanlike manner, using
new materials or the best quality obtainable for the purpose intended. Design and build materials in
accordance with the best practices of the electrical industry.
B. Comply with all requirements of sen ing utility.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION
A. Interior conduit s} stems shall have runs less than 100 feet from point to point.
B. Provide accessible pull boxes when necessary. Provide blank covers for all outlet boxes, unless
otherwise noted.
C. Provide mud ring in wall at 16" AFF (UON) and string to above ceiling in non -rated walls or walls
ss ithout insulation or sound bat rier. Pros ide outlet box in wall at 16" AFF (UON) and conduit with
string to above ceiling in rated walls and walls with insulation or sound barrier. Provide insulated
bushing on end of conduits. Conduits routed to above inaccessible ceilings shall be extended, as
required. to above accessible ceilings.
END OF SECTION
16740 - 1